Home

SCADA 3000 - CAS Systems Limited

1. 1 r Ladder Program Status Stopped Status Stopped Program Valid False Program Valid False Enabled False Enabled False Mode Synchronous Duration 0 00 seconds jeload Hate 0 nd Scan Time 0 01 seconds Duration 0 00 seconds Includes C Run Time 2 Stop gt Sten Figure 6 Start Stop form The Ladder and C Program Start Stop screen provides information timing measurements and options At the top of the screen is an option which determines how the outputs relay amp analog are treated when the Control Switch is placed in the Disable position If the option is not set then the outputs will remain in the state they were in when the switch is placed in the Disable position When the option is set all unforced relay outputs will be switched OFF and all analog outputs will be set to their low table value Forced outputs are unaffected by the position of the control switch To enable this option click in the option box at the top of the screen The Start Stop form also indicates if control programs are running or stopped if valid Ladder or C Programs are loaded if control programs are enabled or disabled It also provides control program timing information The timing statistics are described below Duration Amount of time for the Ladder or C Program to execute Scan Time Amount of time for the inputs to be read plus the duration of the Ladder program plus the duration of a synchronous C Program plus th
2. Figure 1 Voice Setup form The first tabbed screen of this form is the Settings screen Here you select various elements of status and alarm messages including how many messages you want and whether alarms are recited during status reports The settings are as follows Number of Custom Phrases Select either 32 or 64 This will determine how many Chapter 11 Programming for Phone Applications custom messages you can record and the length of each message as previously outlined Note Changing from 32 to 64 or vice versa will erase all previously recorded messages This is another good reason to make a permanent list Use Password for Incoming Call Checking this box will require you to enter the touch tone password to obtain access to the voice programming menus when calling in from a telephone The default password is set to 555 See System Programming for information on setting the password Use Password for Local Checking this box will require you to enter the touch tone password to obtain access to the voice programming menus when connecting a telephone to the Voice Port Default is 555 See System Programming for infor mation on setting the password Recite ID Phone Number Checking this box will result in the Unit ID phone number being announced during a status report Recite Custom ID Message Checking this box will result in the custom ID message being announced during a status report The ID message i
3. Standoffs Figure 6 Modem mounting on the main board Line the card up with the connector and push it carefully but firmly into place With the two screws provided with the modem card secure it to the two standoffs 4 Replace the cover manually reconnecting the keypad ribbon to the board Replace the four screws Your modem card is now installed and ready for use Voice Board Installation The FGD 3500 voice board provides high quality long duration record playback messaging for your SCADA 3000 system It features CMOS devices for low power operation automatic gain control anti aliasing filters smoothing filters and high density storage arrays Recordings are stored in on chip non volatile memory cells providing zero power message storage Voice and audio signals are stored directly into memory in their natural form providing high quality solid state voice reproduction Voice card connector pins bottom Standoff Screw holes Figure 7 Voice Board 36 Chapter 3 Hardware Installation The FGD 3500 features 270 seconds of custom message storage 90 seconds of pre recorded vocabulary e High quality natural voice reproduction Low power design Zero power non volatile message storage 100 000 record cycles per message Message sampling rate 5 3 KHz Message bandwidth 2 3KHz Installation 1 Turn off the SCADA 3000 unit 2 For safety put on a grounding wrist strap Remove the four screws on the
4. Figure 3 C Program Upload form If your SCADA 3000 is on a radio network an additional screen will be displayed so that you can select the SCADA 3000 that you want the C program sent to Once the transfer is complete SCADA 3000 will automatically compile the program This procedure is required to translate the program into a language that your SCADA 3000 can understand When the program is compiled SCADA 3000 scans your program looks for errors and converts it to a new format If a problem is found an error code will be displayed The type of error code depends on where the error is found and what kind it is Multiple errors must be corrected one at a time before SCADA 3000 will continue to scan the program Please refer to the ERROR HANDLING section to identify the types of errors in your program Each time you make a change to your C program you must Upload Compile the new version NOTE All C variables are reset to zero when the program is compiled Downloading The C Program source code can be downloaded from your SCADA unit by clicking the down load button from the C Program toolbar or by selecting Program then Download from the C Editor main window Run After the program has been compiled the following form will appear C Program Control Current S Select Program Run M C Asynchronously Reload Rate fi Seconds Synchronously Single Test R Run Time Unknown 3 stat ipa ites J OK
5. Hello this is ID number Custom ID message Alarm Channel 1 is too high It is now 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit Enter acknowledgment code SCADA 3000 will now wait 5 seconds for the Touch Tone acknowledgment code to be entered After the last digit of the acknowledgment code has been received SCADA 3000 will respond by Chapter 11 Programming for Phone Applications saying Alarm Acknowledged The alarm has been acknowledged and the unit will hang up Once the alarm has been acknowledged the dialout process stops If the Touch Tone acknowledgment code is not received SCADA 3000 will offer you a second chance to enter it responding with beep error Enter acknowledgment code If the acknowledgement code is still not received then the SCADA 3000 will respond by saying beep error goodbye The alarm has not been acknowledged SCADA 3000 will hang up and wait for a callback acknowledgment This waiting period is called the intercall delay time During this time you may call the unit back from a Touch Tone phone Wait for the unit to beep Then hit any key on the phone and the unit will give a voice report Once you receive the complete report enter the code to acknowledge the alarm NOTE An alarm cannot be acknowledged using a pulse rotary telephone TIP When SCADA 3000 is programmed to make calls to pagers make sure the intercall delay time is long enough to give the person c
6. Powerful I O Expansion Possibilities Standard on each SCADA 3000 are 16 universal inputs and 8 relay outputs The univer sal inputs can accept contact closures 4 20mA transducers 0 5 Volt sensors and even thermistors As your enterprise grows and you bring new machinery or facilities on line the Sensaphone SCADA 3000 can expand to meet your needs A variety of expansion modules are available to add specialized inputs such as thermocouples or high speed pulse counters as well as additional universal inputs Outputs can be expanded to add more relay channels or 4 20mA analog output channels You can add modules to the SCADA 3000 and expand up to a total of 144 I O points Built in Datalogging Fully programmable time stamped data comes standard with SCADA 3000 which not only internally logs and stores data but produces reports via phone modem directly to your main computer or even a fax machine Powerful Programming Features Ladder Logic the most easily understood and universal control language in use today is made even easier to use in the SCADA 3000 Standard ladder instructions are built in along with counters timers and even analog capability The free software package comes complete with a Windows based drag and drop ladder editor to significantly reduce your set up time C Programming The Sensaphone SCADA 3000 has built in C programming to handle any control algorithms which may be too complex for Ladder Logic Though the
7. Chestnut Street Plant Variables Figure 10 Ladder Counters form Ladder Bits The Ladder Logic environment has 4096 bit variables which can be used as necessary in your Ladder program Remember that Bit variables are stored as part of a 16 bit word There are 256 words The Ladder Bits form will display the 16 bit values for each word 16 words to a page Use the Up Down arrows to flip through the pages to access the Bit values you wish to view To change the value of a bit double click on the value you wish to change Enter the new value in the pop up form and click OK 15 23 SCADA 3000 User s Manual 15 26 SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Variables Figure 11 Ladder Bits form Ladder Program Performance The execution time of the Ladder Program will depend on several factors For example simple on off instructions will run faster than mathematical functions The sequence of events when the ladder program runs goes like this 1 Scan all inputs 2 Run ladder Program 3 Update outputs Listed below are some typical time requirements for estimating the total run time of a ladder program Input Scan Main Board all 16 5 0ms digital 12 5ms analog Universal Input Module 3 5ms per module Pulse Count Module 3 2ms per module Thermocouple Module 3 9ms per module Run Ladder Program 100 instruction program 2 2ms per 100 instructions Update Outputs Main Board Relays all 8 1 0ms Relay Output Module
8. Computer Requirements Diamond Supra Express V 90 Speakerphone modem Soundblaster Compatible Soundcard amp Speakers Microphone Cable with g male to s male connectors The cable must connect to the Line Out jack of the Soundcard and to the Mic input of the modem The microphone plugs into the MIC jack of the soundcard See figure below PC rear view Line To Wall Jack Phone To Telephone Sound Card Modem Card Figure 1 Typical connections between modem amp soundcard Note If your sound card does not have a separate speaker out jack you ll need to use a splitter cable to connect line out to both speakers and the Modem Card micro phone jack SOFTWARE SETUP The PC Alarm Dialout feature is enabled from the SCADA 3000 Control Center screen Run the SCADA 3000 software and select File then Options In the Call Handling section click in the box labeled Enable PC Alarm Dialout then click OK This will bring up the PC Alarm Dialout status window shown below 22 1 SCADA 3000 Users Manual 22 2 SJ SCADA 3000 DialSrv Al ES File Help 9 42 26 AM Com tracing to file C PROGRAM FILES SCADA 3000 CD DialSrv1 trc is False 9 42 26 AM Com loging to file C PROGRAM FILES SCADA 3000 CD DialSrv1 log is False 3 42 27 AM Alarms timer started 19 42 27 AM 1 COM client s connected P1 Idle 7 Figure 2 PC Alarm Dialout status window Click File then Setup to bring up the software setup
9. The SCADA 3000 Real time screen contains a programming utility that allows you to write Distributed Control programs and then run them on your computer To access the Distributed Control program Editor click on the DC icon from the System Tab of the Real time screen and then click on the palette of the Real time screen The System tab is shown below SCADA 3000 RT Builder Ef x File Edi Forms Help System DataPoint Graphic Group Contain Rotate Elec Gauge Valve Audvid Dynamic NS New 1 7 Figure 1 Real Time System tab 23 1 SCADA 3000 User s Manual This will place the Distributed Control management screen shown below on the palette Figure 2 Distributed Control management screen To bring up the Distributed Control program editor click once on the management screen so that it is highlighted then locate the EditScript item on the Property Editor shown below Property editor Figure 3 Distributed Control property editor Now double click on the filename of the Script program which should be the word Empty initially This will open the script editor window as shown below gt New script 00 0o050wWnmnp Figure 4 Script Editor window Use this screen to write and edit your Distributed Control programs You do not have to be on line with the SCADA 3000 to write a program The buttons on the screen are from left to right Load Save SyntaxCheck Help and
10. 0 12 13 lead 0 preset ch ales lag 1 preset ch 15 lead on 12 16 lag on 15 17 all off 6 18 state 0 19 first 1 h 0 0 Chestnut Street Plan off ine Figure 2 C program Example When using the read_uaf and write_uaf functions there is a shortcut to help construct these statements From the C Editor menu select Program then Select Unit Choose the unit that will be runnning this C Program from the drop down box click the button that says Log in Now and click OK When you are ready to enter your UAF click on your right mouse button Click on the Insert UAF parameter and a list of all valid UAFs will be displayed Click on the UAF you want to use and it will be inserted automatically at the cursor point When you are finished writing your program save it to your computer by clicking File then Save lo open a previously saved program use the Open Program button or click File gt Open Uploading Compiling amp Starting Once you have finished writing your C program you can upload it to the SCADA 3000 To upload your C program go on line with the SCADA 3000 Once on line open the C editor as 16 13 SCADA 3000 User s Manual shown above Open the program you wish to upload to the SCADA 3000 Click the Upload button from the toolbar or select Program gt Upload from the main menu Your C program will start transferring to the SCADA 3000 C Program Upload Progress
11. 15 all off 6 state 0 first 1 if state 0 if read uaf input 0 0 gt lead on write uaf output 0 1ead on state 1 if state 1 if read uaf input 0 0 gt lag on write uaf output 0 lag on state 2 if read uaf input 0 0 lt all off write uaf output 0 lead off state 0 if lead 0 lead 1 lag 0 else lead 0 lag 1 if state 2 if read uaf input 0 0 lt all off write uaf output 0 lead off write uaf output 0 lag otff state 0 if lead 0 16 20 Chapter 16 C Programming lead 1 lag 0 else lead 0 lag 1 SCADA 3000 User s Manual 16 22 Chapter 17 PID Programming Chapter 17 PID PROGRAMMING The SCADA 3000 includes eight programmable PID Proportional Integral Derivative control algorithms which allow the unit to operate as a feedback controller A feedback control ler is typically used to maintain a set point for a process In a feedback control application you would have one input the feedback and one output the force or mechanism that allows you to maintain the setpoint To program a PID control algorithm click on the PID button from the SCADA 3000 toolbar or select PID from the Programming menu The following screen will be displayed Poo PIDA PID 2 AD 3 PIO 4 AIDS ADS PID 7 Name water Pressure Enable PID v Status Running Input UAF 1 0 1 Use Outp
12. Chapter 11 Programming for Phone Applications Alarm Name Each alarm can have its own name up to 24 characters that can be used to describe the alarm Since alarms can be set from any source it is important to enter a name and be as specific as possible If you set an alarm from an input it is recommended that you use the same name for both the Input Name and the Alarm Name State This parameter describes the state of the alarm It tells you whether or not the condition has met the recognition time if the alarm exists if it has been acknowledged or if it has returned to its normal range A description of each of the possible messages is listed below No Alarm No alarm exists at the present time The alarm source is within its programmed limits Waiting The source of the alarm is presently exceeding its limits but hasn t met the recogni tion time yet Alarm Alarm High Alarm Low The source of the alarm has exceeded its alarm limits for the programmed recognition time If the source is a Normally Open or Normally Closed alarm type the word Alarm will display If the source is an analog signal the words Alarm High or Low will display to indicate if the High limit or Low limit has been exceeded Cleared The alarm has been acknowledged but the source is still outside of the programmed alarm limits Outstanding The alarm is set but the source has returned to its normal range Status This parameter describes the current status of t
13. Creating New Units To create a new unit click on the RTUs button or select File gt RTUs from the menu on the Control Center screen The following form will appear Unit Database olx Unit Information 31 Select Unit Earle Chestnut Street Plant m Phone Number 610 558 6677 Last Login 2 2 1999 11 03 16 AM D New f More Inf 5 More nto tori Figure 5 Unit DB form Click on New to bring up the Create New Unit form Type in a description for the individual unit the phone number and the slave ID If you are on a Phone communication network and have only one unit per Comm port the slave IDs can all be 1 with no conflict However if 9 3 SCADA 3000 User s Manual you are using a Radio Communication network each unit zzust have a unique slave ID Select the Comm Port to which the unit is connected then click OK If you have more than one modem connected to your computer then you may select Any Phone Modem and the software will select whichever modem is available Create New Unit A x Unit Information Select Comm Port S C Comm 1 Local Unit Description Chestnut Street Plant C Comm 2 disabled Phone Number 610 668 6677 Q Terne eiselti C Comm 4 disabled Slave ID fi Comm 5 disabled C Any Phone Modem X Cancel Figure 6 New Unit form Communicating with the Unit Return to the Unit Database form and click the Online button An interim C
14. FGD 3010 8 Channel Universal Analog Input Module FGD 3020 4 Channel Pulse Count Module FGD 3030 4 Channel Thermocouple Module FGD 3040 8 Channel Relay Output Module FGD 3050 4 Channel Analog Output Module 4 20mA 0 20mA 0 10V FGD 3060 Annunciator Module SCADA 3000 User s Manual Power Supply The modules require 10 15VDC to operate A 14V power supply labeled AUX PWR is provided on the main unit for powering the modules The AUX PWR terminals are battery backed from the main battery connected to the SCADA 3000 Be sure you don t exceed the maximum current available from your main power supply The main board is fused at 4 Amps Alternately you may power the modules from any 10 15VDC power source but to prevent data transmission errors be sure to connect the earth ground terminal to a good electrical earth ground or cold water pipe See Figure 1 Expansion Module Expansion Module Earth Ground RS232 DCE SPARE din jy ES BAT 24V RS232 DTE COM 1 COM 2 FUSE 00000 00000 0000 O 0000 4A AI 7 22060 Figure 1 Main Unit Power to Modules COMMUNICATIONS BUS WIRING The modules communicate with the main unit via a 4 wire cable connected to the Bus terminal block located on the bottom right side of the unit See Figure 2 Figure 2 Bus terminal block 4 2 Chapter 7 Expansion Modules The cable used to connect the modules must be 4 conductor twisted pair with a nominal im
15. Figure 1 Baud Rate Selection Jumpers Note The Radio setting activates the RTS CTS and DCD pins on the connector specifically for radio communications Do not use this setting for normal PC com munications Pin Description and Data Direction The pin descriptions and signal direction for each COM port follow SCADA 3000 User s Manual E 2 COM 1 DCE Pin 1 DCD 2 RD 3 TD 4DTR 5 SG 6 DSR 7 RTS 8 CTS 9 N C COM 2 DTE Pin 1 DCD 2 RD 3 TD 4DTR 5 SG 6 DSR 7 RTS 8 CTS 9 N C STD Example 38 400 Example 38 400 Figure 3 Com Ports Description Data Carrier Detect Receive Data Transmit Data Data Terminal Ready Signal Ground Data Set Ready Request to Send Clear to Send No Connection Description Data Carrier Detect Receive Data Transmit Data Data Terminal Ready Signal Ground Data Set Ready Request to Send Clear to Send Direction Output Output Input Input Output Input Output Direction Input Input Output Output N A Input Output Input No Connection Appendix F Updating Firmware Appendix F UPDATING SCADA 3000 FIRMWARE The firmware in your SCADA 3000 can be upgraded without having to send the unit back or replace any chips This is because of an advanced technology called Flash memory Inside the SCADA 3000 are two Flash memory chips that contain the firmware for each of the units microprocessors One processor is dedicated to Communications th
16. Note Options amp I O modules will increase power consumption Aux Power Output for I O modules 10 14VDC 24V Output Current 320 mA max Automatic charge control amp deep discharge protection Operating temperature 0 to 70 degrees Celsius 32 to 158 degrees F Enclosure Aluminum Housing with integral mounting flanges for wall or panel installation B 2 Appendix C System Events Appendix C LIST OF SYSTEM EVENTS A LIST OF EVENTS THAT WILL BE STORED IN THE EVENT LOGGER Parameter Start up completed Diagnostic 0 hardware reset 1 full reset Data logger 0 reset 1 start 2 stop 3 download 4 full Status password successful Programming password successful Password attempt failed Alarm detected Alarm Number Alarm not configured Alarm acknowledged by max calling rounds Alarm acknowledged by 15 calls to 1 destination Alarm acknowledged by inbound phone call Acknowledgement received No acknowledgement received on outbound phone call Dialing until Acknowledge destination Destination number Dialing Inform only destination Destination number Phone busy No answer Voice call answered Modem Connect Speed Fax connect Speed Email connect Speed Numeric pager connect Alpha numeric pager connect Speed Message delivered Hangup Inbound phone call received Giving voice report SCADA 3000 User s Manual C 2 Inbound phone call terminate
17. On Comm 3 SMTP Server mai myisp com User ID iohnsmith Email Address fiohnsmith voicenet com Userlnactivity Timer Use Inactivity Timeout Timeout co minutes X Cancel Figure 2 Control Center Options Main Tab If your internet access is available all of the time continuously then choose Always On for your access type If your internet access requires you to dial up using your modem then choose Dialup Networking Phone Book Entry Select the Phone Book Entry in the drop down selec tion box that connects to your internet service provider Next select the Comm port that your modem uses to connect to the internet If you are not sure which Comm port your modem uses then go to My Computer double click on Dialup Networking right click on the dial up networking entry for your ISP and choose Properties Next click on the Configure button and locate the COM port information NOTE You must have your internet account Username and Password saved in order for the SCADA 3000 software to automatically log in If your service provider does not use Microsoft Dialup Networking then no names will appear in the Phone Book Entry list and you will have to use a different internet service provider Compa nies such as America Online which use proprietary software will not work with the Web Status feature GLOBAL WEB STATUS SETTINGS 20 2 Your web page will be uploaded to an internet server using FTP Fil
18. Select Dialout Destinations Click in the small checkbox beside each programmed destination that you wish to have notified should this specific alarm occur Repeat this process for each alarm When you re finished click OK The SCADA 3000 has the capability to alarm on 64 events An alarm event can be set from an input output variable or any value that has a UAE Each alarm has a programmable recognition time which must be met before the alarm truly exists In addition each alarm also has program mable high and low limits alarm reset time and the option of speaking a custom voice message There are three stages to complete an alarm event 1 Alarm recognition 2 Alarm notification and 3 Acknowledgment of the alarm Note that not all alarm conditions will go through each stage For example some may not meet the recognition time SCADA 3000 User s Manual ALARM RECOGNITION Each I O point or value that is monitored for an alarm condition has user programmed limits to determine when an alarm exists When the status of this monitored value changes or exceeds the programmed limits it causes a first stage alarm condition At this stage the alarm recognition timer starts running but no dialout occurs If this condition lasts long enough to meet its pro grammed recognition time the alarm becomes active and the SCADA 3000 begins the alarm notification sequence ALARM NOTIFICATION SCADA 3000 can make 6 types of phone calls Voice
19. The Power function is used to raise a value X to the power specified by Y The X parameter is the operand and the Y parameter is the exponent RETURN VALUE The Power function returns x raised to the y power Example The following program will take the square root 1 2 power of the value of input 3 on the main board and store it in the variable c float a float b float c main a read_uaf input 0 3 b 1 2 c pow a b WRITE REC FUNCTION used to write a single DataLog record to the DataLogger Summary write rec Description The write rec function is used to write a single DataLog record to the DataLogger All values selected for logging on the DataLogger programming form will be logged once when this function executes regardless of whether or not the DataLogger is actually running or not This 16 9 SCADA 3000 User s Manual function is useful for event driven datalogging functions such as when an I O point goes out of range or when an alarm exists Do not allow this function to execute continuously or large amounts of data will accumulate in the datalogger Also do not allowe this function to execute more often than once a second because the DataLogger can only resulve timestamps to the nearest second and will throw out records with identical time stamps Example This program will write a datalog record once per minute if input 0 is greater than 100 int last minute main if rea
20. s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above condition may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian mainte nance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appro priate The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device denotes SCADA 3000 User s Manual the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5 0 The REN for the SCADA 3000
21. INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE co Gesunde eh tO eel E DN EAR Rene DAD ESOS CR Procedure Using CDROM ou ss titor oro as n deoa Ade Maias vede tu e dee pen Mad pee 2 Proced reusing Ses duod e o o ics escudo io A cnt ofer Mete odo Mec te 2 UPDATES VIAPINTERINET ais tote a lee to dues Cot eta ut enti s Ug dde 2 Chapter 9 COMMUNICATING WITH THE SCADA 3000 9 1 Running the Software A A Os MOET Tm 1 Communications Programming sss cn i essen wiles dne LUN eae cH a maa eee ees 1 Cellular Phone Communications scc ide E pt ptis orspbib perd ias RIGS 3 Creating New AS PTT 3 Communication LM DLE LU 4 System Se UPlby ias 4 User LOGE with Security Enable cities de too id d a E RO E ANS es cun aoo Nro cua 6 Seting Up User ACCOUN Ses Dos bites eats bek dpt eb eti D EROR D A Odi Becton are meas Sas Dalec User AC CODI Kuh toc eh er AA us UI ah ic rua ant eh Aste nS Eat 6 Changing PASES lc tii 6 Radio Vs Phones Communica e TEE EE C E TO EO OO o ss 7 R9232 COMMUNICONON TONS E D Z User Inactivity Timer areen e irae E OR a A ee ale v ONCE CQ e EE Y EUR 8 viii SCADA Table of Contents Chapter 10 GENERIC PROGRAMMING eere neenon 10 1 SAVING AND LOADING PROGRAMMING FILES sesessesseessee eene 1 CONNECING S carts ai ica 1 eile d wee Ie P 3 D FUMIE SVR oso te a aD COS RH a dead eet RO QU DOR NO e OW n d
22. In either case output 3 on the main board will always be turned on float x main x 7 5 if x gt 100 write uaf output 0 0 0n else SCADA 3000 User s Manual write uaf output 0 0 off write uaf output 0 3 on There are C commands other than if and else and built in variables to access SCADA 3000 s inputs and outputs Details for these will be covered later KEYWORDS The following is a list of all valid components of the C language within the SCADA 3000 char int float if else for do while Definitions CHAR Used to define a variable as a character A character can hold a value from 128 to 127 and must be a whole number Exceeding this range will cause incorrect results Note Variables defined as type CHAR will not save memory space within the SCADA 3000 Example char x main x 12 INT Used to define a variable as an integer An integer can hold a value from 32 768 to 32 767 and must be a whole number Exceeding this range will cause incorrect results Note Variables defined as type INT will not save memory space within the SCADA 3000 Example int result main result 17 FLOAT Used to define a variable as a floating point number A floating point number is one that can have a fractional part i e numbers after the decimal point Floating point numbers can also be very large or very small generally between 107 an
23. Saving 14 31 32 Selecting SCADA Units for 14 3 Valve Tab 14 23 25 Reports 11 22 23 Rings Until Answer feature 10 5 S SCADA 3000 Backup Battery 4 4 Estimating Power Consumption 4 2 4 Firmware Updating Appendix F General Description 1 2 6 General Wiring Considerations 5 1 Grounding amp Power Surge Protection 4 2 4 Mounting Instructions 3 Operating Environment 3 1 Power Requirements 4 1 Power Supply Fuse 4 2 Software Installation 8 from CD 8 2 from Diskettes 8 2 Internet Updates 8 2 Minimum Requirements 8 1 Technical Support 1 5 Software Internet Upgrade 8 2 Appendix G Solar Cell Powering 4 5 System Programming 10 Clock 10 3 Auto Daylight Savings 10 3 Unit Date amp Time 10 3 Dialout Settings 10 4 15 Alpha Pager Speed 10 4 Dialing Method 10 4 Index 4 Dialing Prefix 10 4 Maximum Calling Rounds 10 4 Online Timeout 10 5 Voice Repetitions 10 4 Slave Address 10 3 Unit ID Number 10 3 Unit Name 10 3 System Security 9 4 8 Changing Passwords 9 6 7 Setting Up User Accounts 9 6 8 User Log in with Security 9 6 8 T Terminal Blocks 5 Removing 5 1 2 U UAFs Universal Address Format 10 5 10 Specifying amp Applying 10 6 Alarms 10 9 Bit 10 7 8 C Variable 10 8 Counter 10 7 Diagnostics 10 9 15 Input 10 6 Ladder Variable 10 8 Output 10 6 User Inactivity Timer 10 8 V Voice Board Installation 3 6 7 Voice Programming 11 6 12 Alarm Status Types 11 7 8
24. See Universal Address Format earlier in this chapter for more detailed information on the UAF format SCADA 3000 User s Manual Chapter 11 Programming for Phone Applications Chapter 11 PROGRAMMING FOR PHONE LINE APPLICATIONS DESTINATIONS SCADA 3000 will call up to 64 telephone numbers or E mail addresses both referred to as destinations to report alarm conditions or send reports Destinations can be voice calls fax machines computers with modems running SCADA 3000 software E mail addresses numeric pagers or alphanumeric pagers Choose Program from the main menu then select Destinations You can also access the Destination programming from the Toolbar button labeled Destinations car Zones Alam Intercall Send Name Destination 2 3 4 CallMode Dial Type Delay Report 0 Dave D 509 222 7788 a dd dl unti Ack y Voice Eo Zi i Main Office Fax 610 999 5544 Iv liv lv fiv Inform Fax y po v 2 iim D s pager feos 444 0099 Iv liv Iv fiv Inform y Pager y 60 js 3 Bob D s pager fe10 555 888842226677 MIMIM Iv Inform Alpha 60 3 JE F Next Page Page 1 of 16 Edit Zones Figure 15 Dialout Destinations form The Dialout Destinations form allows you to program information for up to 64 destinations The parameters and their options follow NAME This field allows you to program a description 16 characters max for each destination These descriptions are used to reference the destinations in
25. This will copy the highlighted item to the list of Selected Data Points on the right e g those to appear on the LCD Continue this process by highlighting each data point on the left and copying it to the list of Selected Data Points on the right When you have finished making your list click on the Commit button This will upload the list to the SCADA 3000 and it will immediately start displaying the programmed data points 13 1 SCADA 3000 User s Manual on the display Note that the unit defaults to having all of the main unit inputs and outputs selected for display Removing Data Points To remove data points from the LCD click on the point you wish to remove from the list of Selected Data Points from the box on the right Next click on the Remove from List button identified by the arrow pointing to the left located between the boxes To remove all of the Selected Data Points from the list click on the Remove All button located at the bottom be tween the two boxes Grouping Data Points The selected data points will be displayed four at a time This means that the first four points in the list will be displayed together followed by the next four points etc The selected data points can be rearranged so that they are grouped in an orderly fashion The up down arrows on the far right of the form provide the ability to move data points up and down in the list To rearrange the Selected Data Points highlight the data poin
26. Used to write a value to the SCADA 3000 as described by its UAF Summary float write uaf t g e d int t UAF source type output bit ladder variable c variable alarm int g UAF group number 0 1023 int e UAF element number 0 255 int d New data for UAF on off floating point number Description The write uaf function is for changing the value in any of the UAF registers The parameters of the function specify the location of the UAF register to be changed as well as the new value for the register RETURN VALUE The write uaf function always returns a zero Example main if read uaf input 0 0 2100 0 If input 0 on main board is greater than 100 write uaf output 0 0 0n then set relay output 0 on the main board to on Chapter 16 C Programming RESET FUNCTION Used to reset acknowledge the specified alarm in the SCADA 3000 Summary int reset x int x alarm number 0 63 Description The reset function is used for acknowledging any alarm in the unit The parameter of the function specifies the alarm number to be acknowledged RETURN VALUE The reset function always returns a zero Example main if read_uaf input 0 0 1 If input 0 on main board is closed reset 0 then acknowledge alarm 0 POWER FUNCTION Mathematical function used to raise a value to the specified power Summary float pow x y float x float y Description
27. arrow down to the Alarms category and press ENTER 2 Press the down arrow key until you reach the alarm you need to acknowledge Press ENTER 3 Press the down arrow key until the LCD displays Acknowledge Alarm Press ENTER and the alarm will be acknowledged If you continue to press the down arrow key the Ac knowledge All option will be displayed If you press ENTER while this message is show ing all alarms will be acknowledged Why can t connect with my SCADA 3000 Having trouble connecting locally Some common causes SCADA 3000 is connected to your PC s parallel port LPT1 instead of a serial COM port COMI COM2 etc SCADA 3000 is connected to the wrong serial COM port Most PC s have multiple serial ports Make sure the port connected to the SCADA 3000 unit is the same port shown the UNIT DATABASE form Check that the SCADA 3000 software has configured the COM port as a direct Serial Port connection Click Comm gt Setup from the Sensaphone Control Center Main Menu Click the appropriate Comm port tab and check that the port is Enabled the Type is set to Serial Port and the Port Baud Rate is set to 38400 Having trouble connecting using a modem If your modem won t dial at all Make sure that your modem is connected to a serial COM port on your PC not a parallel LP T port e Check that the PCs COM port connected to the modem is the same port shown on the UNIT DATABASE form Check that the SCADA 300
28. d Vf enssaig enuo1ogrq RENE O CA EA O ae es SE 4 33 9 m3eJadula 29U9JaJo Y pued AO PAS UOQIe 9UOJA 991S SAL exeqq VHO IULEN MOTA I MOTA 0 MOTA dO LAS TANNVHO SNOILVTONOTVO MOTH SV HX d DIO eeeduioT eseg enuo VISd 9unssauq oseg 12eu0 4 DAC 1nje1eduio prepuejg VISd 9 5894 prepurig dnjog peau uoneurogutr ojeudoudde oy ur qp MOT UNI 1939 A YORI 10H SCADA 3000 User s Manual Index Index A Alarm Acknowledgment 11 17 23 Alarm Dialing Priority 11 20 Alphanumeric Pager Dialout 11 19 20 alphanumeric pager dialout 11 13 Computer Alarm Reception 11 20 23 Alarm Printing and Logging 11 21 Audible Alarm 11 22 23 Logging 11 22 Printing 11 22 Maximum Calling Rounds 11 20 Modem Dialout 11 20 Pager Dialout 11 18 19 Viewing Current Alarms 11 20 Voice Dialout 11 17 18 Alarm Dialout 11 16 17 see also PC Alarm Dialout Alphanumeric Pager 11 17 E Mail 11 17 Fax 11 17 Modem 11 17 Numeric Pager 11 17 Voice 11 16 Alarm Notification 11 15 17 Alarm Call Modes 11 16 17 Inform 11 16 Until Acknowledged 11 16 Alarm Recognition 11 16 Notification 11 16 Alarm Programming 11 12 15 see also PC Alarm Dialout I O Point Value 11 13 State 11 13 Status 11 13 Alarm Setup 11 13 15 C C Program 16 Specifications 16 1 C Programming 16 Arrays 16 10 Differences between SCADA amp Standard 16 16 21 Editor 16 12 15 Start amp Stop 16 15 Uploading Comp
29. e 64 Timers e 64 Counters 128 Floating Point variables e 4096 bit variables Note Remember that Bit variables are stored as part of a 16 bit word There are 256 words The real time status of Timers Counters Bits and Variables can be viewed and changed on the C and Ladder Variables form Programming gt Variables The unit will support up to 32K of compiled code You may also store up to 32K of source code optional in the unit However note that compiled code is usually about half the size of the source code Thus if you have a ladder program which exceeds 16K compiled you will most likely not be able to upload its source code SCADA 3000 User s Manual Conserving Memory with Windows 95 and 98 From the main menu select Fi e and then Conserve WinResources This feature conserves Win dows resources to allow large programs more than 500 instructions to be used Under Win dows 95 and 98 it s recommended that you select this especially if you have a large ladder program Under Windows NT deselecting Conserve WinResources will speed up program perfor mance Starting a new Ladder Program To run the Ladder Editor click on Ladder then Open from the Control Center menu bar or click on the Ladder button from the Control Center toolbar Select a unit from the list click either OnLine or OffLine and then click OK SCADA 3000 Ladder Program mode x E Program Mode PRICE lr Online C Offline World Trade C
30. required C alphanumeric character password optional A alphanumeric pager ID The A dialing code is used ONLY for alphanumeric pager destinations It is placed between the pager company s telephone number and a particular pager s ID number by typing the letter A upper or lower case It instructs SCADA 3000 to wait until a connection is made to the alphanumeric pager services computer system before transmitting the ID number for a particular pager Example 1 610 555 4593 A 0504099 C alphanumeric character password The C dialing code is used ONLY for alphanumeric pager destinations and only if your particular pager system requires a character password This password may be required for SCADA 3000 to access the pager service s computer system If required it is placed between the pager company s telephone number and the required character password in the dialout sequence by typing the letter C upper or lower case The character password must precede the pager ID number Example if character password required 1 610 555 4593 C 000000 A 0504099 pager company phone number C character password A pager ID number The alphanumeric character password is optional and is in general reserved for future services Length of the password when used may be different in some systems Consult your pager service for more information CALL ZONES SCADA 3000 is capable of assigning different destinations to specific calling gr
31. such as a radiator or heat register Do not use your SCADA 3000 near water or spill liquid of any kind into it Be certain that your power source matches the rating listed on the AC power trans former If you re not sure of the type of power supply to your facility consult your dealer or local power company Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock Never push objects of any kind into this product through ventilation holes as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble this product but return it to Phonetics Customer Service or another approved repair facility when any service or repair work is required Opening or removing covers may expose you to danger ous voltages or other risks Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the unit is subsequently used If anything happens that indicates that your SCADA 3000 is not working properly or has been damaged unplug it immediately and follow the procedures in the manual for having it serviced Return the unit for servicing under the following conditions 1 The power cord or plug is frayed or damaged 2 Liquid has been spilled into the product or it h
32. transformers rectifiers generators arc welders induction furnaces or sources of microwave radiation e If you must run the cable across power lines run them at right angles to the lines Keep the communications cable at least 6 inches from AC power lines carrying less than 20A at least 1 foot from lines greater than 20A and 2 feet from lines greater than 100KVA e If you run the cable in a metallic wireway or conduit keep the communications cable at least 3 inches from AC power lines carrying less than 20A at least 6 inches from lines greater than 20A and 1 foot from lines greater than 100KVA Running the communications cable through conduit provides extra protection from physical damage and electrical interference If you route the cable through conduit be sure to ground the entire length by connecting it to the building earth ground For best results use ferromagnetic conduit near critical sources of electrical interference Aluminum conduit may be used in non critical areas MODULES Up to 15 expansion modules may be connected to the SCADA 3000 main unit to provide additional inputs and or outputs Each module must be configured with its own unique address using the BUS ADDRESS jumpers see module documentation You may mix amp match mod ules to suit your applications requirements Specific modules are available to connect to various types of sensors and equipment The modules offered by Phonetics are listed as follows
33. value changes from On to Off or crosses a threshold the DataPointShape can change its color and or shape to indicated a change in the I O value You configure an ON color and shape as well as an OFF color and shape A change can be triggered based on a threshold or equality using the threshold type and threshold value properties Properties Align To align shape to edges of the palette area alBottom Stretches the shape across the bottom of the palette alClient Fills the palette with the shape Useful for adding a background graphic alLeft Stretches the shape along the left edge of the palette alNone No realignment is applied Note this will not correct any other previously applied alignment alRight Stretches the component along the right edge of the palette alTop Stretches the component across the top of the palette Anchors Sets one or more sides of the shape as a positional anchor with respect to the edges of the palette akBottom Anchors the element a fixed distance from the bottom of the palette akLeft Anchors the element a fixed distance from the left side of the palette akRight Anchors the element a fixed distance from the right side of the palette akTop Anchors the element a fixed distance from the top of the palette Chapter 14 Real Time Screen Design Brush Color Color of the shape Style Pattern within the shape Constraints Limits the maximum and minimum size of the shape MaxHeight Sets th
34. 0 9ms per module Analog Output Module 2 4ms per module Examples Program A small Total Run Time Main Board with no modules 8 2ms or 122 scans per second All inputs are digital 100 instruction ladder program Chapter 15 ladder Logic Programming Program B medium Total Run Time Main board using all analog 23 8ms or 42 scans per second inputs plus a Universal Input Module and an Analog Output Module plus a 200 instruction ladder program Program C large Total Run Time Main board using all analog 75 9ms or 13 scans per second inputs with 8 Universal Input Modules 4 Relay Output Modules 2 Pulse Count Modules 1 Analog Output Module and a 1000 instruction ladder program Ladder Program Examples Example 1 The ladder program below Figure 5 illustrates simple input to output control If input 0 closes then output 0 will turn on If Input 0 opens then the output will turn off Figure 12 Simple input to output control Example 2 The following program Figure 6 would be used to refill a tank when it becomes empty Say the tank has a float switch at the top to indicate that the tank is full and a float switch at the bottom to indicate that the tank is empty When the level gets too low the low level float switch opens making the XIO instruction true which latches the pump on The pump will stay on until the high level switch closes causing the XIC instruction to become true which unlatches the p
35. 128 variables is referenced The Element field is not used and should be set to 0 Examples V 0 0 This UAF references ladder variable number 0 V 35 0 This UAF references ladder variable number 35 C Variable The SCADA 3000 allows up to 1024 floating point variables to be defined in the C program The Group specifies which of the 1024 variables is referenced The Element field is not used and should be set to 0 Examples C 0 0 This UAF references C variable number 0 V 64 0 This UAF references C variable number 64 Gas Flow The SCADA 3000 calculates gas flow for up to four meter runs The following UAFs refer to various Gas Flow parameters and computed results The Group refers to one of the four meter runs 0 3 The Element refers to the specific parameter within the specified meter run A list of the Elements follows Element Description 0 Gas flow calculation Enable disable O disabled 1 enabled 1 Gas density specific gravity 2 Carbon dioxide content mole 3 Nitrogen content mole 4 Dynamic viscosity lbs mass foot sec 5 Btu factor BTUs MCF 6 Real time MCF per day updated once per minute 7 Volume for today MCF 8 Volume for yesterday MCF 9 Volume for this month MCF 10 Volume for last month MCF 11 Volume for the hour MCF 12 Average differential pressure for the hour inches of H2O 13 Average temperature for the hour deg F 14 Average static pressure PSI 15 Total BTUs for the hour MBTUs 16 Fl
36. 30005 retrieve the selected I O status and alarm information then create and upload the web pages to a specified server and directory on the world wide web hosted by your own internet service provider Most internet service providers allocate space on their server for their subscribers to place their own web pages as part of the internet service contract Contact your internet service provider for information The Web Status software also allows you to save the pages to a local or network drive This makes it possible to share the web page internally via a company intranet page Host ISP Figure 1 SCADA Web page path REQUIREMENTS This feature requires that you have a computer which is already set up to access the internet Dial up connections must use Microsoft Dialup Networking to get online Providers which use proprietary software such as America Online cannot be used Your internet service provider must support File Transfer Protocol FTP INTERNET SETTINGS Select your method of accessing the internet by selecting File then Options from the Sensaphone Control Center The following screen will appear 20 1 SCADA 3000 Users Manual Main Web Status Debug Messages Debug Level o 2j Maintain Log File Call Handling Enable PC Alarm Dialout Act as Unit Email Server Internet Settings Access Type Dialup Networking Phone Book Entry Phone Book Entry MylSP Dialup v
37. 4A A small amount of margin is required to insure that the fuse doesn t blow under normal operation Power Supply Selection To size the power supply properly multiply the Total Power computed above by 1 5 This will insure that the power supply will have enough reserve power to operate properly during peak power demand Example If the Total Power was 19 53 Watts then the Power Supply should be rated at 19 53 Watts x 1 5 29 30 Watts or 30 Watts Phonetics SCADA 3000 Power Supplies FGD 3100 Hard wired power supply 60 Watts FGD 3110 Plug in power supply 50 Watts others are available 4 3 SCADA 3000 User s Manual 44 BACKUP BATTERY OPTIONAL In the event of a power failure SCADA 3000 can continue to operate if connected to a sealed lead acid gel cell rechargeable battery The capacity or Amp Hour AH rating of the battery may vary between 5 and 18 AH To compute the appropriate size battery multiply the backup time required by the Total Cur rent Example Battery Capacity Hours of backup x Total Current 12 hours x 1 302 Amps 15 62 AH In this example a battery with a capacity of at least 15 6 AH is required to provide 12 hours of backup time Note that actual backup time will vary somewhat depending on temperature battery age and dialing activity The battery connects to the terminals labeled BAT and on the SCADA 3000 See Figure 2 below Note Only connect the battery while the Power
38. 8 Channel Relay Output Module FGD 3050 Scada 3000 4 Channel Analog Output Module FGD 3060 Scada 3000 8 Channel Annunciator Module Related Publications Ladder logic programming and C programming are widely used languages This manual does its best to present these topics as they apply to the SCADA 3000 however there are numerous texts available which provide extensive information specific to ladder amp C programming Each I O module comes with its own documentation for insertion into this binder For your convenience the documentation for each separate module includes a labeled divider to provide fast amp easy access to that section For the latest technical information check our website at www sensaphone com Technical Support If any questions arise upon installation or operation of the SCADA 3000 please contact Phonetics Technical Service Department at the number shown below and have the following information e Date of Purchase Serial Number bottom of unit e Firmware version while on line click Diagnostics Processors COMM CONTROL e PC Software Version while running the software click Help gt About SCADA 3000 User s Manual Technical Support is available from 8 00 AM to 5 00 PM EST You may also e mail your questions to support sensaphone com Phonetics Inc 901 Tryens Road Aston PA 19014 Phone 610 558 2700 Fax 610 558 0222 www sensaphone com Chapter 2 Quick Start Guide Chapter 2 Q
39. Alarm ID 0001 To find out exactly what the alarm is the person would have to call 610 555 1234 and enter the Alarm ID number The computer would then recite the complete Alarm information and allow the person to enter an acknowledgement code to cancel the dialout process ALARM PROGRAMMING Step Five is to program alarms Alarm programming for PC Alarm Dialout is identical to pro gramming alarms for normal telephone line operation Click the Alarms button from the toolbar or select Programming then Alarms from the main menu This will bring up the Alarms Programming screen For detailed information on the alarm parameters see Alarm Program ming in chapter 11 Alarm Acknowledgement Alarms can be acknowledged when the call is received by entering the touch tone acknowledgement code or by calling the computer back and entering the Alarm ID followed by the acknowledgement code When the computer answers the call it will prompt you for the Alarm ID number This must be a 4 digit number When the number is entered the computer will recite the SCADA 3000 Unit ID message and then the alarm message It will then prompt you for the Acknowledgement code for the SCADA 3000 that generated the alarm Once the alarm is acknowledged all remaining calls to Until Acknowledged destinations for this alarm will be cancelled Remaining calls to Inform Only destinations will continue until all of the messages have been delivered or until the maximum number o
40. Aom Wod Dalua Sound Wewfis gt Select Fire E phonetieNS CADAOOD valero S Skatam wav v ok Figure 19 Audible programming form REPORTS SCADA 3000 can send periodic reports to selected fax and e mail destinations see Destina tions Reports may include information from the Event Log and or the Datalogger You can select how much information you want to send with each report Io program the report param eters select Programming gt Reports from the menu or click on the Reports button from the toolbar The following screen will appear Chapter 11 Programming for Phone Applications SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Eifel E3 Report Cont VV Event Log 500 Records VV Data Log 100 Records Report will be an estimated 6 pages Report Time System Time 5 30 38 PM Next Report Time 02 0271 399 05 12 05Pm Hours Minutes Report Interval pss lo Zu Figure 20 Report form Io receive an Event Log report click on the Event Log box and enter the number of records you would like to receive The SCADA 30005 Event Log stores up to 1000 events To receive a Data Log report click on the box and likewise enter the number of records you would like to receive A Data Log record includes all logged data for one time period Set the date and time you would like to receive the next report This only needs to be set once for the first report After that it will automatically send at the
41. C program can run independently of ladder programs we have built in the capability of both programs to share and pass information back and forth for ultimate control And of course the necessary software to develop C programs is included in our free software package SCADA 3000 User s Manual PID Functions Control needs are rounded out with the SCADA 3000 built in Proportional Integral Derivative control functions Any analog input and output channel pair can be associ ated with up to 8 PID algorithms Each algorithm has its own set of fill in the blank parameters Gas Flow The SCADA 3000 has the capability of measuring natural gas flow Calculations for up to four meter runs can be performed simultaneously The SCADA 3000 supports two methods of gas flow measurement orifice plate and positive displacement turbine meter The formulas used for gas flow calculations are in accordance with A G A Report No 3 A G A Report No 7 and A G A Report No 8 In addition to real time measurement the SCADA 3000 also computes hourly daily and monthly data Complete Warranty and Technical Support All Sensaphone products are manufactured entirely in the United States Phonetics stands behind the SCADA 3000 with a 3 year comprehensive warranty and technical support Support is available at 610 558 2700 or through our website at www sensaphone com or by e mail at support sensaphone com Who should use this manual The very nature of
42. Custom Alarm Alarm Source Appendix L Programming Forms Time Time Lo a a MEA E EAN xpo 73 E PA E y EA So po p gr ME A ANA AA ED A EAN po eee ee o po peg Ec NE ERNEUT a rs IRSE ee pp AENA AAA E pp op EA EA ESA AAA E lo o dl ANA EA Mb oe el L prse N C Limit Message Destination Numbers Name UAF eu Ly EA E El E po p NT i p EE ecij I ve edw uwv woO rjo o oS9 cl ae st VI SIrSl a DS 3kl CI i Al eol srl min El COL o 1I a 1 1 i i icocloleileltoloioielio oldvlc SCADA 3000 User s Manual AAA e A A LEAL L d L L L 89 AAA NAAA AE R AAA A ASS ee PIE NN VS EN PSN PENN eS OE ESTARE AE S LE AAA AAA Pe INN INN INS INS INN INN NS INN INN NE Ss pos pup NS SNS EN NN mr uie cu AAA AAA AAA E AIRES SOMA NENNEN NN CNN NIN SN SNE NN CNE EN Boe do e Ro cd 5 cp cs groom AAA EL Ee AA os poo Y e peppeanmpxgne grege AE LL HH 0E a He E EY Loop opperiri peor ee xe ceo peo boe hec du EP AS Op O OA EA A AN NE E EA MEANS ESAS EA AE AAA AS eS AAA AAA AAA AAA S E PR EA EE AE AAA E Al HE t p cj x i SE A AA E p E oq ne y 0 ee ise Ni A eee ee ii ae Ee i AE puppe REGERE o a Tem CER INCL ACC Lac m FA et N A USIH MOT oum oui OTON SI9QUINN uoyeuns q j ISESSITA 9UIEN Ava 9 qeuq yur jrurTq JOSH 30094 ron d L jno erq U10 Sn
43. I O wiring ducts SCADA 3000 User s Manual 6 2 The terminal blocks for wiring the outputs and inputs are removable They should only be removed or attached when power to the SCADA 3000 is OFF If for instance you had to return your SCADA 3000 for service you could remove the terminal blocks in order to maintain your current wiring configuration To remove terminal blocks use your thumb or forefinger to push the screw section of the block straight out see figure below o oo o Figure 2 Removing terminal blocks Locking Clips Chapter 7 Expansion Modules Chapter 7 1 O EXPANSION MODULES ADDING EXPANSION MODULES The capabilities of the SCADA 3000 can be expanded by connecting additional I O modules to the main unit This allows the system to monitor or control up to 144 points A communica tions cable and a power cable must be routed to each module Modules can be located up to 2000 feet from the main unit Battery backed power is provided for the modules however care must be taken not to exceed the maximum power limit of the power supply When adding an I O module be sure to turn OFF power to the SCADA 3000 during all wiring and installation When powered up the unit will automatically check to see if any modules are connected Cabling Notes Follow these guidelines to protect the communications cable from electrical interference e Keep the communications cable at least five feet from any electric motors
44. Manual 15 22 on Program then Compile and Upload or click on the Compile and Upload button from the toolbar Once your program compiles without errors you can upload it by clicking the Yes button at the prompt The software also allows you the option of uploading the source file into the SCADA 3000 The source file is the same file that can be saved on your computer containing the graphical representation of your program It also includes instruction addresses titles and comments Note that the compiled code is usually about half the size of the source code so if your compiled code exceeds 16K it s unlikely you will be able to upload the source code as it will likely be larger than the 32K limit To upload the source file with the compiled file select Program from the main menu and click Upload Source so that a check appears next to it If you upload the program now both the com piled code and source code will be uploaded to the unit This feature allows any user to down load the complete ladder program Running and Stopping Ladder Execution The ladder program is controlled by the Ladder and C Program Start Stop form located on the SCADA 3000 Main Programming form This is accessed by clicking the Start Stop button on the Main Programming toolbar or by selecting Programming then Control from the main menu SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Control Control Status Control switch is Enabled C Program
45. Manual for a list of AT commands supported by your modem If your modem connects with a SCADA 3000 but the connection sometimes drops out 1 Click Comm gt Setup from the Sensaphone Control Center Main Menu 2 Click the appropriate Comm port tab and try increasing the values of the following Check Change Packet Retries Information flows back and forth between SCADA 3000 and your PC in data packets Both units automatically check for packet transmission errors When a bad packet is detected it gets re sent Packet Retries determines how many times a packet is re sent before a communication error is logged Check Change Retry Delay Once a packet is sent this is how long SCADA 3000 software will wait for a response from the 3000 unit before re sending it Check Change Packet Time Out This is the amount of time between the bytes of data that a make up a packet also known as Inter character Delay Time Will SCADA 3000 retain its programming if there s been a long power failure and the backup battery dies When all power is removed from the SCADA 3000 voice messages and unit programming are retained in nonvolatile memory by an internal 3V lithium coin cell battery This battery should provide at least 2 years of data storage without power and up to 10 years of intermittent use l ve set up a Polling schedule but my PC won t make polling calls to my SCADA 3000 units In order for your PC to actually make the scheduled Polli
46. Month Day Year Hours 23 10 Programming Methodology 23 10 11 Properties of the Script Component 23 5 Referencing I O Points 23 3 5 Running your Program 23 5 Sample Application 23 3 Saving your Program 23 5 Syntax Checking 23 4 Requirements 23 1 Sample Program 23 11 Script Editor 23 1 3 Structure 23 6 7 E E mail Server Option 21 Event Logger 11 28 Deleting Events 11 29 Downloading 11 28 Printing Exporting amp Copying 11 29 Viewing 11 28 29 F Firmware Appendix F Updating F 1 2 G Gas Flow 18 1 6 Calculated Information 18 5 6 Orifice Plate Method 18 1 3 Index 2 Positive Displacement Method 18 1 Programming 18 2 3 I O Expansion Modules 7 1 4 Communications Bus Wiring 7 2 3 Power Supply 7 2 Types 7 4 I O Programming 10 11 15 Input Type 10 12 Outputs 10 14 15 UAF 10 13 15 Tables and Calibration 10 13 Units 10 12 Input Configuration 5 10k Thermistors 5 3 6 Curve Data Appendix D 4 20mA Current Loop Transducers 5 5 Analog Voltage Output Transducers 5 4 6 Correct Jumper Positioning 5 2 Normally Open Normally Closed 5 2 Internet Web Status 20 Formatting the Web Page 20 5 Browser Refresh 20 5 Logo Settings 20 5 Frequently Asked Questions 20 7 8 Global Settings 20 2 4 Global Status 20 2 wml format 20 3 Internet Settings 20 1 2 Requirements 20 1 Web Status Options 20 6 7 Alarm Options 20 6 FTP Delivery Options 20 6 7 Instant Web Page 20 7 Local Web
47. Motherboard Diagnostics Between them these screens provide status information for both microprocessors the software version each is running the circuit board temperature numerous internal voltages and system current consumption Values shown are typical MODULE COMMUNICATIONS DIAGNOSTICS When external I O modules are connected diagnostic information is provided to evaluate the communications performance between the Main Unit and each module Click Diagnostics and select Module Information The following screen will appear SCADA 3000 tnut Street Plant Module Information Figure 3 Module Diagnostics The information on this form can help to identify communications problems due to wiring or interference It also provides the software version and internal processor statistics as well A well connected system would have zero errors Timeouts amp Bad Checksums on the form above Chapter 20 Internet Web Status Chapter 20 INTERNET WEB STATUS The SCADA 3000 Software can generate a web page and post it on the internet at a program mable time interval The web page s will include alarm and selected I O information for one or more SCADA 3000 units The web page can be created in both standard HTML and WML formats the latter allows viewing on an internet capable cell phone The web page can be updated on a programmable basis by setting up a polling schedule In this scenario your host computer would contact one or more SCADA
48. Move Comparison Instructions EQU Equal NEQ Not Equal LES Less than LEQ Less than or equal GRT Greater than GEQ Greater than or equal Math Instructions ADD SUB MUL DIV POW Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Power SCADA 3000 User s Manual Rules Conventions of Ladder Logic Programming 1 One output per rung 2 Each rung controls an output 3 A normally open contact XIC Instruction when evaluated by the program is examined for a 1 closed contact to make the instruction true 4 A normally closed contact XIO Instruction when evaluated by the program is examined for a 0 Open contact to make the instruction true 5 The output on a given rung will be energized if any left to right path has all contacts closed 6 An output can control either a connected device 1f the UAF is also a termination point or an internal output used exclusively within the program 7 An internal output does not control a field device It provides interlocking functions within the program 8 Input contacts can represent input signals sent from connected inputs contacts from internal outputs or contacts from connected outputs 9 Repeated use of contacts is allowed A given input output or internal output can be used throughout the program as many times as required 10 Contacts can be programmed in series or parallel depending on the output control logic required 11 The maximum number of parallel branches
49. N E Redmond WA 98052 Phone 425 882 2206 Fax 425 867 0865 Internet www data linc com DataRadio COR Ltd Headquarters Dataradio COR Ltd 603 West Travelers Trail Burnsville MN 55337 2553 USA Toll Free 1 800 992 7774 Headquarters Telephone 612 890 8155 Headquarters Fax 612 882 5671 Internet www johnsondata com FreeWave Technologies Inc 1880 South Flatiron Court Boulder CO 80301 USA Phone 303 444 3862 Fax 303 786 9948 Internet www freewave com OMNEX Control Systems Inc 74 1833 Coast Meridian Road Port Coquitlam B C V3C 6G5 Phone 1 800 663 8806 Fax 604 944 9267 Internet www omnexcontrols com RF Neulink A Wireless Solutions Company 7610 Miramar Road San Diego California 92126 Tel 858 549 6340 or 1 800 233 1728 Fax 858 549 6349 Internet www rfneulink com Scala Electronic Corporation Post Office Box 4580 Medford OR 97501 USA Phone 541 779 6500 Internet www scala net Wi Lan Inc Head Office 801 Manning Road NE Suite 300 Calgary Alberta T2E 8J5 Phone 403 273 9133 Toll Free 1 800 258 6876 Fax 403 273 5100 Internet www wi lan com Murandi Communications Ltd 6715 8th Street NE Suite 240 Calgary Alberta Canada T2E 7H7 Phone 403 777 9988 Fax 403 777 9989 Internet www murandi com Chapter 12 Programming for Radio Applications SCADA 3000 User s Manual Chapter 13 LCD amp Keypad Programming Chapter 13 LC
50. Next Page Page 1 of 18 AO Figure 4 I O setup form INPUT TYPE There are six different choices for Input Type Select the one that matches the transducer or signal source for your application e Closure This sets the input to look for a dry contact closure either Normally Open or Normally closed No external voltage should be applied When the input jumper is config ured for a contact a low current 5V sense voltage is applied at the input terminals Run Time This sets the input to start a timer whenever a closed contact is applied to the input The timer will stop when the contact opens The input will accumulate the time until the reset button is clicked or the time overflows the maximum Run time is displayed as hours minutes seconds When referencing a Run Time input from a C or Ladder program the value will be provided in seconds eg 05 12 45 will be 18765 seconds e 0 5 volt This sets the input to read the voltage present at the input The input range of the SCADA 3000 is 5 volts You can set engineering units on the Table and Calibration tab to scale the 0 5V signal linearly e 4 20 mA This sets the input to read the current flowing into the positive input You can set engineering units on the Table and Calibration tab to scale the 4 20mA signal linearly SCADA 3000 presents a 237 Ohm load when configured for 4 20mA e 10K deg F This sets the input to read temperature in degrees Fahrenheit from a 10K thermistor There are sev
51. Pages amp Filenames 20 6 Online Options 20 6 Web Status Polling 20 4 7 Selecting Data Points 20 4 5 Setting up a Polling Schedule 20 7 K Keypad Programming 13 Navigating the Display by 13 2 Using the Keypad 13 3 5 L Ladder Logic 15 Comparison Instructions 15 11 14 Compiling Verifying Uploading 15 21 Deleting Rungs Instructions 15 21 Elements amp Functions 15 2 Entering UAFs Titles Comments 15 20 Examples 15 27 30 Ladder Run Viewer 15 23 30 Math Instructions 15 14 17 Performance times 15 26 29 Printing 15 23 Program Development 15 17 18 Rules amp Conventions of 15 2 Running Stopping Execution 15 22 30 Saving Loading Files 15 21 Statistics 15 23 Starting a New Ladder Program 15 18 23 Adding Rungs 15 19 Branching 15 19 Changing Instructions 15 20 30 Cut Copy Paste 15 21 30 Supported Elements amp Instructions 15 1 Syntax Checking 15 21 30 Viewing Ladder Variables 15 23 26 Bits 15 25 26 Counters 15 25 Timers 15 24 25 Variables 15 24 LCD Programming 13 Alarms 13 5 6 Grouping Data Points 13 2 Keypad Use 13 3 6 Data Points 13 3 Return 13 6 System Status 13 6 Programming Data Points for Scroll Mode 13 1 Removing Data Points 13 2 Scrolling Display 13 2 3 M Modem Card Installation 3 4 5 O Output Wiring 6 Index P Pagers Programming Destinations for 11 Special Alphanumeric Dialing Codes 11 3 PC Alarm Dialout 22 Alarm Programming 22 6 Alarm Acknowledgeme
52. ROTATING ELEMENTS ON THE PALETTE There are four components on the Rotate Tab Rotating Blower Rotating Pump Rotating Compressor Rotating Turbine SCADA 3000 RT Builder Biel ES File Edit Forms Help Data Group Graphic DataPoint Elec Rotete Contain Valve Gauge Audvid Dynamic NIZA face Rotating Rotating ower Compressor Turbine Rotating Pump Figure 21 Rotate Tab SCADA 3000 User s Manual 14 20 Properties Align To align graphic component to edges of the palette area alBottom Stretches the component across the bottom of the palette alClient Fills the palette with the component Useful for adding a background graphic alLeft Stretches the component along the left edge of the palette alNone No realignment is applied Note this will not correct any other previously applied alignment alRight Stretches the component along the right edge of the palette al Top Stretches the component across the top of the palette Anchors Sets one or more sides of the element as a positional anchor with respect to the edges of the palette akBottom Anchors the element a fixed distance from the bottom of the palette akLeft Anchors the element a fixed distance from the left side of the palette akRight Anchors the element a fixed distance from the right side of the palette akTop Anchors the element a fixed distance from the top of the palette BackGndMode bmOpaque or bm Transparent Color Backgrou
53. SCADA 3000 s internal clock Click the System button on the extreme left end of the toolbar or select Programming gt System from the SCADA 3000 RTU form 8 Upload C and Ladder programs separately Reminder You are setting the clock INSIDE the SCADA 3000 unit If you re connected with a phone modem it s possible that you and the unit are in different time zones Why won t my SCADA 3000 dial out If you are on line with the SCADA 3000 through its RS232 port it will not dial out until you close the connection Check that you have a Touch Tone telephone line If SCADA 3000 is set for Tone dial it will not be able to dial out if it s on a Pulse telephone line The Destination telephone number may be incorrectly programmed Verify the telephone numbers Is a 1 area code prefix required Or does your telephone line require a 9 prefix to reach an outside line There may be no Call Zone selected Be sure to check your Call Zone programming for your destinations Likewise the Alarm Call Mode may be disabled for this destination Check and enable the Alarm Call Mode Recognition time may be set too long for an alarm condition to become a valid alarm You can shorten the Recognition time for the alarm or increase the amount of time that the specific alarm exists Remember an unacknowledged alarm exists only when the red alarm LED blinks on the front panel There are no Destinations selected for alarm Noti
54. Select one and click OK Next set the preset by right clicking on the instruction and choosing Set Preset Enter the preset value and click OK You may use the CTD instruction in combination with the CTU function eg One increments the count and the other decrements the count by using the same address In this application the COUNT Value and the PRESET value for each instruc tion are one in the same SCADA 3000 User s Manual The instruction executes in 5 7us and requires 176 bytes The GROUP for this type is the counter number from 0 63 The ELEMENT specifies an individual function for the selected counter There are 7 functions associated with each timer Element Function Number Description Range of Values 0 Up Counter Enabled 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 1 Down Counter Enabled 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 2 Counter Done 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 3 Counter Overflow 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 4 Counter Underflow 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 5 Counter Preset 32 768 to 32 767 6 Counter Value 32 768 to 32 767 Examples C 0 0 This UAF indicates if Counter 0 is enabled or disabled C 19 7 References the current value of Counter number 19 The counter value and status bits can be viewed or changed from the Counter Status form To view the counter values click on the Ladder and C Variables button from the Toolbar on the Main Programming form Select the Counters tab In addition to viewing the state of the coun
55. Switch is OFE 00000 00000 0000 O 0000 Figure 2 Wiring from optional battery to SCADA 3000 To determine battery backup time Battery capacity AH 18 AH 13 8 hrs Total Current A 1 302 A Whenever the power switch is turned on and the power supply is plugged in SCADA 3000 will automatically charge the battery The unit also includes special circuity to prevent the battery from being damaged in the event of an extended power outage When the battery runs down to 9V the unit will automatically disconnect it preventing deep discharge damage The battery will remain disconnected until main power returns Note that once the deep discharge circuit has been activated the unit requires power at the 15V terminals to turn back on even if the 12V battery is fully charged The battery should provide 5 years of service before needing replace ment NOTE Have battery serviced by qualified service personnel only Chapter 4 Power Supply POWERING THE SCADA 3000 WITH SOLAR CELLS The SCADA 3000 is a relatively low power device 2 4 Watts depending on options and is suitable for operation from solar cells Typically solar power is only used when AC power is unavailable or too costly to have service installed at the unit s location Proper component selection is critical to keep the unit functioning during extended periods of darkness or poor sunlight intensity Critical applications should overcompensate on capacity to in
56. Verification will run automatically in the background while you begin programming it compares the unit s programming parameters to the parameters stored in your computer You do not need to wait for this verification process to com plete in order to start programming your RTU If for any reason you wish to cancel the verification process click on Diagnostics and select Show Register Verification Figure 2a The Abort amp button will appear on the lower left side of the form SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant BEI File Status Programming Modules Diagnostics View Help a aaa 9 TESTES 011 10 aa aaa Figure 1b Main programming form without verification selected From the main menu select Program gt System or click on the System button from the toolbar Chapter 10 Generic Programming SYSTEM INFORMATION SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant System Programming EER System Informatio M Dialout Settings Unit Name Chestnut Steet Plant Dial Method Tone v Diaing Pref Unit ID Number 610 558 6677 Voice Reps 2 lt MaxCiling Rounds 100 Slave Address 1 E ES Advanced Alpha Page Speed 1200 y Clock Call Reception Settings Date Monday Juy 31 2000 y Rings till Answer 1 Online Timeout 4 zi min Time 11 05 55 AM O settorc Carrier Wait Time 60 2 sec Auto Daylight Savings Y l Current User Voice Call Security Curent User Security Disabled Voice Pw
57. ability to enable or disable the security option Programming A full access account that allows complete programming capability however no user account password management is allowed Operator A limited access account which permits the user to read view any parameter control outputs enable disable control programs and acknowledge alarms This account prohibits the ability to change programming or load program ming Status only A read only account which will allow users the ability to read view any param Chapter 9 Communicating with SCADA 3000 eter or download the Datalogger Event logger C program or Ladder pro gram This account will allow the user to change their password Disabled An account set to disabled will prohibit the user from logging in This can be used to temporarily restrict access without deleting the user account The system has the security option disabled as a default which essentially gives any user full access to all system programming Only a user with an Administrator account can enable secu rity Also additional users can only be set up by a user with an Administrator account To set up an Administrator account and enable security follow the steps below 1 Go online with the SCADA 3000 and click on the System button from the toolbar or select Programming then System from the main menu The following form will appear SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant System Programming olx S
58. alarm exists on Alarm channel 9 If read_uaf alarm 9 0 2 a low level alarm exists on alarm channel 9 else no low level alarm on channel 9 Example 3 Checking for high level alarms The following lines of code will check to see if a high level alarm exists on Alarm channel 9 If read uaf alarm 9 0 3 a high level alarm exists on alarm channel 9 else no high level alarm on channel 9 Chapter 16 C Programming Example 4 Forcing Alarms from the C Program To make an alarm occur as the result of a C program action you must define a C variable and then use the same C Variable as the Source Data Point on the Alarms form On the alarms form you would select the Alarm Type to match the value of the C variable For numeric values set the Alarm Type to limit for digital values set the Alarm Type to either bit 0 or bit 1 For example suppose you have a C program that computes the average temperature of a liquid based on readings from several sensors The average temperature is stored in a program variable called avg_temp This C Variable would be used as the Source Data Point for an alarm and you would program high and low alarm limits accordingly float avg temp float sensor A float sensor B float sensor C float sensor D main sensor A read uaf Input 0 10 sensor B read uaf Input 0 11 sensor C read uaf Input 0 12 sensor
59. at the intersection to the left where the rung meets the ladder Choose Delete from the menu or highlight the rung by left clicking at the intersection and click the Delete button in the toolbar To delete instructions click on the Instruction and click the Delete button from the toolbar or right click on the struction and choose Delete from the menu Syntax Checking You can check your program for instruction and address errors by selecting the Syntax Check button from the toolbar or by clicking Program gt Syntax Check from the main menu If any errors are found the instruction with the error will be highlighted in red The syntax checker will locate errors one at a time Continue running the syntax check program until all errors are eliminated Syntax check status will be displayed on the lower righthand side of the screen Compiling Verifying and Uploading The ladder program must be compiled before it can be uploaded to the SCADA 3000 The unit will support up to 32K of compiled code with the option of also storing up to 32K of source code Compiling translates the graphical instructions into a sequential file that can be read by the SCADA 3000 In addition the program will be checked for missing or incomplete addresses and illegal logic If any errors are detected they will be listed on the screen Once you correct the errors be sure to re compile the program before uploading it To Compile the program click 15 21 SCADA 3000 User s
60. be used with DIV instructions Valid Sources Valid Destinations Inputs Outputs Outputs Ladder variables Timers preset amp value C Variables Counters preset amp value Ladder variables C variables Gas flow values enable and flow rate only Diagnostics Alarms Chapter 15 ladder Logic Programming POW A to the Power of B The Power instruction raises the value stored in the memory location referenced by Source A by the value stored in the memory location referenced by Source B when rung conditions are true The result is stored in the destination memory location D The operand values can be fixed constants values contained in I O or variables stored in any memory location The POW instruction executes in 45us and requires 114 bytes Valid Sources Valid Destinations Inputs Outputs Outputs Ladder variables Timers preset amp value C Variables Counters preset amp value Ladder variables C variables Gas flow values flow rate only Diagnostics Alarms Ladder Logic Program Development The SCADA 3000 Ladder Logic editor allows you to build save and load complex ladder programs for use with the SCADA 3000 main unit and expansion modules The ladder program can run by itself or in combination with the C Program Specifications of the Ladder Program include e 32K of Program memory about 1000 instructions note that Windows NT is required if you plan to write programs of 500 or more instructions
61. by double clicking on the timer value you want to change A Change form will appear to let you enter a new value for the timer Use the Up Down arrows to flip through the pages to access the timers you wish to view RTO Retentive Timer This instruction is used to turn an output ON or OFF after the timer has been on for a preset time interval The specified timer starts at 0 and increments whenever the rung status is true It stops when the rung status is false but it does not reset the TIMER VALUE as in the timer ON OFF instructions The timer can only be reset to zero from the RES RESET ladder instruction having the same address as the timer The timebase for the RTO instruction is 01 seconds for example PRESET 500 is 5 seconds The timer bits are updated as follows ENABLED Set when rung is true and reset when rung becomes false RUNNING Set when rung is true and TIMER VALUE is less than PRESET and reset when rung is false or when DONE bit is set DONE Set when TIMER VALUE is equal to or greater than PRESET and reset when rung is false The timer address can only reference one of the 64 internal timers T 0 through 1 63 Right click on the instruction and choose Select Timer A list of the 64 timers will be displayed Select one and click OK Set the preset by right clicking on the instruction and choosing Set Preset Enter the preset value and click OK The instruction executes in 4 5us and requires 84 bytes The GROUP for t
62. connect to the internet If you re not sure which Comm port your modem uses then go to My Computer double click on Dialup Networking right click on the dial up networking entry for your ISP and choose Proper ties Next click on the Configure button and locate the COM port information Enter the name of the SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol server used by your ISP Internet Service Pro vider This should be included with the account information from your ISP You may also obtain it by calling them or checking their website Next Enter your e mail account User ID as provided by your ISP and your e mail address Next select Comm then Setup from the Sensaphone Control Center main menu Select the Comm port tab corresponding to the modem that will be receiving e mail calls Click the box labeled Answering Incoming Calls as Shown below Chapter 21 E mail Server Option Comm Port Setup OF ES Comm 1 Comm 2 Comm3 Comm 4 Comm 5 v Enable Port Y Full Duplex Buffering Type Phone Modem y 5 Port Baud Rate 115200 y Modbus Protocol Settings Packet Retries 7 Retry Delay 500 Packet Timeout 1500 Buffer Size 256 Figure 2 Comm Port Setup form The last step is to change the e mail telephone number in the SCADA 3000 Go on line with each of your SCADA 3000 units and click on the System button from the toolbar or select Programming then System from the Main menu Next Click on the Advanced button locat
63. corre sponding screw terminals for that input The configuration jumper should be set to the storage position as indicated in the diagram below Jumper in Storage Position for 0 5V 0 5V transducer Figure 6 Wiring a 0 5V transducer The shunt set to the 0 5V position is reflected in the following circuit diagram 5 4 Chapter 5 Input Wiring 15v Protection Network 15v Figure 7 0 5V Circuit diagram 4 20mA Current Loop Transducers The inputs on the SCADA 3000 are compatible with transducers that produce an analog output current of 4 to 20mA Analog 4 20mA output devices sometimes require a 24VDC power supply to operate The SCADA 3000 provides a built in 24VDC power supply for this purpose The 24VDC power supply has enough capacity to power up to sixteen 4 20mA devices Follow the wiring diagrams below for connecting a 4 20mA device The configuration jumper should be set to the 4 20mA position as indicated in the following diagrams a 3 Jumper in m 4 20mA Position 4 20 mA Transducer Figure 8 Wiring a 4 20mA device using the built in 24 VDC supply The shunt set to the 4 20mA position is reflected in the following circuit diagram 15v 3 Protection Network Figure 9 4 20mA Circuit diagram 3 2370 15v 5 5 SCADA 3000 User s Manual If for any reason you choose to utilize a separate power supply your wiring configuration from the
64. data This will return to the DataLog form EVENT LOGGER The SCADA 3000 keeps track of important system events with its built in Event Logger Each SCADA 3000 can store up to 1000 system events System events include user log ins alarms incoming amp outgoing telephone calls and alarm acknowledgments See Appendix B for a complete list of events stored by the SCADA 3000 The Event Log can be viewed retrieved several ways 1 It can be sent as a scheduled report from the SCADA 3000 via fax or e mail see Reports 2 it can be downloaded manually while a user is online and 3 you can have your computer automatically call one or more units and retrieve the Event Logger based on a polling schedule see Polling Once the events have been downloaded to your computer you can run the Event Log viewer to perform queries on the data Note that once the event logger in the SCADA 3000 is full the oldest records will be overwritten by the newest DOWNLOADING THE EVENT LOGGER To download the Event Logger go online with your SCADA 3000 and click on Status then Download Event Log from the main menu of the unit programming form The software will begin downloading the events from the unit and store them in a database on your computer When this process is finished the following form will appear Event Log Download Download completed 28 New Events Added 9 Abort 000 View Events Figure 24 Downloading the Event Logger To v
65. e URN CELA 3 RPM US RETE D m UU UM 3 o A d tI se etudes ADR ed AU DE e RANE TET 3 CLOCK e Mr n HET ct 3 Unit Date Tm m M 3 Auto Davligbitoonvintds 6 ete A o eu OU o DIU Arf 3 DIALOUT SETTING rita ates GR END Nob npn e es DEO Mi Cebu a Heina da boo f ee tutu 4 Dialing Method ERNEUT D TEL CODES 4 Dialing Preh Steerer deti Se Und MSS AO dU S M EL LU MEE CSS 4 MITA Calling Reuhds d veces te eot ld de M 4 VAlpliciPader SBEed doeet Mc eae deb test AI A RA Aie d Led 4 Voic amp Repetihons ii pads dd quao ape A uice etes ate Dd pu eU A Eu E E EE 4 A O A a a a MEL 4 CALL RECEPTION SETINGS ior roris a te axe epu lene Hero d VR IUD edu kE a ooo REUS 5 Rings Until A A A O 5 Carrier Wait Tine id 5 Online JTimeoub oot sete De Ee T D DU M ADU DM Aa ae LM 5 Voice ed o 5 Current Uso Ma a da 5 UNIVERSAL ADDRESS FORMAT UAF sess enne nennen enne enn 3 S NUI TET HERE 5 How to specify and apply UAFs e ie a S e D dd 6 In Use ete O 6 GIU fep Te TEES 6 TNS a disi eret dre A RE 7 Sul 7 ASS AS eh ee Da RU cau 7 ladder VHS MR EET P EE 8 C Variable eias ite AICS SCRE O rabia ido i ue iu ert 8 A eene at DD M D M CM M 8 Alanis sae deo e tira ED e a toS cease cel her tenet cde a tI apte iih 9 Diago rro meta pM 9 Expansion Module Diagnostics A essct sn do E AEAEE EEEE eM LE Codec 10 I O PROGRAMMING ebat rotten ita tah fate oe Maa teat
66. e ada 12 eb Ue qm T PTT 12 Uploading Compiling SSlabNus seti asado qnia et EM ais 13 Ib fe iata rara siere A A O EEE 14 PUI so cee gs sat tl he a al a o Dicis ed e Cai 14 DIC GC SIOD s oec eterne paste ionst oil omi bai Doa dui owetuis cotenen e vi ehh boats nle arbos ERR maig oe op Erbe eR 15 S nchronousor A A Pm NAN A NAE E EN 15 o A 15 VIEWING THE C VARIABLES oscars 16 Forcing Pv LUG nna nen a is 16 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN STANDARD C AND SCADA 3000 C sse 16 C PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES os optet es eto reto de oo Ud ee E Epid iet era 18 Chapter 17 PID PROGRAMMING ee eene eere eere eene enero tne stro enu 17 1 EID AGORA E Seale ate AIC dest NA 2 TIMING aha tte cea leas TE Wr adn US 3 Chapter 18 GAS FLOW MEASUREMENT oooooconcconoconoconccconcconcconcconocononoos 18 1 A cuits tceseat ath vais MIL Le EUN AS AER HR ETFI ovr NUNG d POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT gt sas doa wet oa E lena UL ON E E a t tie bb ur rE aL Like aks Meet toe tei na ccc IU IM I E Cd E 4 CALCULATED INFORMATION esto pecu t bM EE Pe Ede ro Rp iere Etats 5 koiri Data IDG CTE onm ehou ed iia lis J Day Paldam EET 9 o1 D SR TRE tc 6 Chapter 19 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS scccsscssscssscssscsscsssscsccsecesssceees 19 1 MAIN BOARD DIAGNOSTIG S eon ii eC en ub pete lex AA MODULE COMMUNICATIONS DIAGNOSTICS cooooooccccooococcccocononocononnonononnnnnnoconannnnccnonannnoos 2 Chapter 20 INTERNET WEB STATUS ccsccosscss
67. e t Ona atten 5 TON ner neve scat a O etr Seta scelto oie TOS 5 FOF Tima ON TEA kgrsa RE DT ean E A E AD gallu RIO Retentive Tia et t S e b Sul a aa ccd alec e e a eee A Z AE Up Coume eorr ince trac a d eds Auct dA aA dl 8 EMMA Coon Dow Counen MERE C EE 9 PIES iris AAA MS RATA sa SN o o a 10 MO OE A O 1 COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS apio A ares 11 EQU EQUAL Oe POMPE oS tue Rn Lon Re E E o t rete 11 MENO EQUAL das 12 LE SSIES S TRAN LEE 12 EQ LESS THAN OR IAL NK 13 CUN iris R TA N E A RCN 13 CEG ICREATER THAN OR EQUA oo terc e de p b E POOR e E EH OIG 14 MATH INSTRUCTIONS dei Late unosi de te td shen dte doc Ee eta tudo sede dee iua dialers 14 PN NRI Ten 14 o AAA A A 15 A rese raan setas asa NON 1 5 RP UC CT 16 POW TAT IS o de DN DAR Las nse os ota Si pel Bare AM IZ LADDER LOGIC PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT rennen nenne 17 Conserving Memory with Windows 95 and 98 cenit nda 18 STARTING A NEW LADDER PROGRAM sssssenee eene emere enne nennen eren 18 Adding OIG RR tates Salt EI T lela D NP DNI 19 Instruction Too Oso tes Dok oon UL ASA I GRAM BC RULES sida 19 Es TTE PR TRO O ina 19 Entering Data Points Titles and Comments 3 0 0 0 Se reto tei teste pe e ere ERA E eR 20 Changing insmuclloHs situs Apud DI LC A E UM SS A IAM SET A MD MULUS 20 WOO MET TUUM NITE 21 SAVING and loading MBs s cocta e nnani ook veal ect ek tad ee tat lt ate o 21 Deleting Rungs and UNS isse Stet me eer nt At outa CR Ne Ed sats et A 21 Syntax Checkihg Nested ate ce
68. figure should be available from the manufacturer s data only used for orifice meter runs Pulses per Cubic Foot Enter the pulses per cubic foot for the positive displacement meter as provided by the meter manufacturer Specific Gravity Enter the specific gravity real gas relative density Carbon Dioxide Content Enter the mole of carbon dioxide typical range 0 04 to 28 94 Nitrogen Content Enter the mole of nitrogen typical range 0 3 to 53 6 Dynamic Viscosity Enter the dynamic viscosity in pounds mass per foot second BTU Factor Enter the factor to convert cubic feet of gas to BTUs Low Flow Cutoff Enter the minimum differential pressure that determines when no gas is flowing Units are in inches of H O Static Pressure UAF Enter the UAF of the input that is measuring static pressure for this meter run The transducer must provide the signal in units of PSI Absolute Differential Pressure UAF Enter the UAF of the input that is measuring differential pressure for this meter run The transducer must provide the signal in units of inches of H O only used for orifice meter runs Temperature UAF Enter the UAF of the input that is measuring gas flowing tem perature for this meter run The units for this input must be set to degrees Fahren heit Pulses UAF Enter the UAF of the input that is measuring pulses from a positive displacement meter for this meter run only used for positive displacement meters UAF
69. height of the font object in pixels If you wish to use a specific point size you should set the size property Pitch Can be set to one of three values fpDefault fpFixed or fpVariable Using fpDefault as the pitch value will cause the default pitch style to be used with the font The fpFixed and fpVariable values can be used to explicitly set the pitch a value of fpFixed causes each character in the font to have the same width monospacing while a value of fpVariable allows different characters within a font to have unique widths Size Sets the point size of a font object If you need to ensure that the font fits within a specified area you can manipulate the Height and Pitch properties Style Sets the default style of the font or text fsBold Sets the default to boldface fsltalic Sets the default to italic fsStrikeout Forces a line through the font fsUnderline Underlines the text as default Height Vertical size in pixels overridden if you chose a Max Min Height Hint Type in the text that will appear upon mouseover Left Sets the position of the component as measured from the left side of the palette Max Value Upper datapoint value limit Chapter 14 RealTime Screen Design Min Value Lower datapoint value limit Show Hint Checkbox Enables the hint message to display on mouseover Stay On Top Checkbox Check if you want the container component to float above any other graphics Top Y coordinate of the t
70. information DATA LOGGING CAPACITY The SCADA 3000 has enough memory to store up to 100 000 pieces of information including the time stamp This means that if you are datalogging one point the memory would store one time stamp and one value at each interval resulting in 50 000 time stamps and 50 000 values 100 000 records A record thus comprises one time stamped log of the selected data points If you select more than one point to be logged the SCADA 3000 will store a time stamp plus the value for each point selected The following formula can be used to determine the number of time stamped records for a given number of points 100 000 of points 1 Time stamped Records As an example if you wanted to log 35 points the calculation would compute a capacity of 2 777 records If your interval was set to 30 minutes the Data Logger would be able to run for 57 85 days before overwriting any data In the Data Logger status window under the heading Records the unit will always provide you with the number of records used and the number available You can see the available number change after you select the items to be logged and then click the Commit button SELECTING DATA POINTS TO LOG All values in the SCADA 3000 are referenced by the data point On the form above there are two large list boxes the one on the left provides a list of the data points that can be chosen for datalogging and the box on the right shows the data point
71. is limited to 6 12 Only 1 Counter or timer per rung 13 A RES instruction resets all status bits and the accumulated value for the counter or timer that is being addressed 14 Do not use a RES instruction on a TOF instruction 15 The OSR instruction is not allowed inside a branch 16 Preset and Accumulated values for timers range from 0 to 432767 If a timer preset or accumulated value is a negative number a runtime error will occur 17 The timer timebase is fixed at 0 01 seconds 10ms 18 The preset and accumulated values for counters range from 32768 to 432767 and are stored as signed integers Negative values are stored in 2 s complement form 19 When using an RES instruction to reset an alarm an OSR instruction should be used preceding the RES to prevent continuous alarm resetting Description of Ladder Elements and Functions Each ladder logic symbol or functional block will contain an address field a title field and a comment field Timers and counters will contain additional fields for preset s and accumulated values Listed below is the logic definition for the SCADA 3000 Logic Definition Contact State Bit Value Input Voltage Open 0 Off 5V Closed 1 On 0V Chapter 15 ladder Logic Programming XIC Instruction Examine if Closed AIC 1 6 8 J E This instruction is used to determine if a contact has closed or to check if a bit is ON When the address represents a discrete input the pr
72. must be grouped together into pairs Standard C will allow IF condition 1 amp amp condition2 amp amp condition3 SCADA 3000 requires IF condition1 amp amp condition2 amp amp condition3 3 There are no shortcut statements such as i red 5 or bits amp 5 However statements such as the following are allowed if placed inside parentheses IF x read_uaf input 0 5 0 4 Bitwise operators are not implemented There are no bitmask bitmask amp 4 5 Variables declared before the main statement retain their values after the program has been executed This provides the programmer with nonvolatile memory be tween runs of the program This is useful for accumulating timing and most SCADA 3000 applications 6 There are no user defined functions or procedures 7 Suggested programming philosophy Avoid the use of WHILE loops This will lengthen the execution and response time of your C program and serves no advantage Write your programs such that they run straight through and exit If your program is checking for a certain condition to occur using a WHILE loop will cause your program to concentrate on that one condition unnecessarily Since the program will execute at regular time intervals you can use an IF statement and achieve the same or even better results For example we need a program to set output 3 on whenever input 1 closes Listed below is an example of how this would be do
73. naa S DM tea 11 Tes Veg ONS fe dig mae prem etre GM M M M LM MESE 12 A ba ea aaae er a d CR ob ni Aeon bete Ee pte oet i REM a ea pa EP ERE ay SGN 12 TABLE S AND CAUBRATION etel ltda 13 Ut aE OS edid cic d tum EE AC US oue PUE 13 e VIDI NT NC EE 14 UAF aco Peete ahaa AA ASES ta GPa cy DI HE eho 15 Chapter 11 PROGRAMMING FOR PHONE LINE APPLICATIONS 11 1 DESHNATION S uie oa Ui vt dde Co elas a La MA bct delet NAME aii iia E 1 DESTINATION o O 1 UT A O 1 Alphanumeric A e debes oed ute Ae ea tbe 1 SCADA 3000 User s Manual A cereo cn tee o raa endet t ea aao rentre S Ee 2 Special Dialing Codes suero tete gt tede D ENS teat arate ds ER Qe to oe ce eather seen aue 2 Special Alphanumeric Pager Dialing Codes ud doc 3 CALZONES isa a aae s E A 3 ALARM CAMDEN 4 Disabled M LE E 4 ME a o A Peor haies oe Lema nie eee etie n R Tn o ien 4 A O dila dios edet opas de dta Qus 4 DRAE stabat teneatis Med a AE 5 INITERCALE DELAY oa PR e erm RA AA SERA 5 SEND REPORT S cisicietod setis euet eoi mA Nus ERE Geant OD stad c Gn C Vaated Bert boe ot Fa futs 5 VOICE PROGRAMM Saa Que Care usc et esae seno ud deduce et de RS IRSE E 6 RECORDING AND PROGRAMMING MESSAGES sse eene nnns 6 ltems Included in the Status Report o E aen 7 C stomizing Your Status Rd 8 Linking Custom Voice Messages to Data Points ccccccceeceeeceeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeesseaeeeeeeesensseeeeeeeeenaes 9 Recording and Playback of Messages a a eo hc ot Sid 1
74. object Next edit the properties of the vessel to assign it to an I O value Adjust the minimum and Chapter 14 Real Time Screen Design maximum values set the colors and so forth A list of properties with descriptions is provided below Basic Properties BackGndMode There are 2 settings bmOpaque and bm Transparent The bmOpaque setting will display the background color of the component or image as specified by the Color property The bmTransparent setting will display the component background as transparent so that any component image or background will be visible Color Background color of component when set to bmOpaque Datapoint Assigns the component to an I O point within a SCADA unit Reveal the sub properties by clicking the white box next to the word Datapoint Select a SCADA unit first then select the datapoint Datapoint Enter the datapoint UAF or click in the Datapoint box above and then click the button at the end of the box to display the Datapoint selection form DisplayPercent Displays the datapoint value as a percent of the MinValue and MaxValue see these below DisplayValue Displays the actual datapoint value FillColor Selects the fill color for components which display the level as a moving bar FillStyle Provides options to have the fill be solid or to have various patterns Font Sets the font for the selected object Charset Specifies the character set for the font Dependent upon wh
75. object in pixels If you wish to use a specific point size you should set the Size property SELECTING SCADA UNITS You may retrieve and display I O information from one or more SCADA 3000 units on a single Real time screen To do this you must define which units will be opened when the screen is run To select SCADA units click on the Data tab Next click on the SCADA 3000 icon and then click on the palette The SCADA icon will appear on the palette It becomes invisible in Run mode Use the Property Editor to assign the icon to a unit in your database Click on SCADA Unit in the Property Editor to assign the icon to a unit in your database Click on SCADAUNit in the Property Editor and click on the button at the end of the box This will bring up a form to select a SCADA 3000 from your database Use the pulldown menu to the right to bring up the list of possible units Select the unit you re configuring Once you select a unit the Active box should show a checkmark Click on the Connect Type box above SCADAUnit in the Property editor and select the type of connection for the unit See figure below You have three choices Property editor ox Figure 5 Connect type menu SCADA 3000 User s Manual Local Means that the unit is connected directly to your computer via a serial port Modem Indicates that your computer must dial into the unit via your modem When more than one unit requiring a modem connection is selected on t
76. programmed intervals This is useful if you would like your reports sent at the top of the hour or at a specific time of day The report interval can be set between 0 hours 0 minutes and 199 hours 59 minutes DATALOGGING SCADA 3000 s built in Data Logger can log and store up to 50 000 samples from up to 128 Data Points All samples are logged at the same time on a programmable time interval Each stored sample includes a time and date stamp with the year stored as four digits The Data Log viewer allows you to select or query stored data from multiple units and display it in grid format From the grid you may copy the data to the Windows Clipboard and paste it into another application such as MS Excel or Lotus 123 or you can export the data in a comma delimited format The Data Log Viewer also provides the ability to graph one or more data points on a line chart From the main programming form choose Programming DataLog or simply click on the DataLog button from the toolbar The Data Log programming screen is shown below SCADA 3000 User s Manual Figure 21 DataLog form Programming the SCADA 3000 Data Logger requires four steps 1 Select the items you wish to log amp click on the commit button 2 Set the time interval for logging 3 Set the time you wish to start the Datalogger 4 Click the Enable box The following information describes in detail how to complete these steps and also how to retrieve and view the Data Log
77. rate only Diagnostics Alarms GRT GREATER THAN This instruction will test to see if Source A is greater than Source B If Source A is greater than Source B then the rung is evaluated as true otherwise the rung is false Source A must be an address Source B can either be a program constant integer only or an address The GRT instruction executes in 15us and requires 44 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may be used with GRT instructions Inputs Outputs Timers preset amp value Counters preset amp value Ladder variables C variables SCADA 3000 User s Manual Gas flow values enable and flow rate only Diagnostics Alarms GEQ GREATER THAN OR EQUAL This instruction will test to see if Source A is greater than or equal to Source B If Source A is greater than or equal to Source B then the rung is evaluated as true otherwise the rung is false Source A must be an address Source B can either be a program constant integer only or an address The GEQ instruction executes in 15us and requires 44 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may be used with GEQ instructions Inputs Outputs Timers preset amp value Counters preset amp value Ladder variables C variables Gas flow values enable and flow rate only Diagnostics Alarms MATH INSTRUCTIONS The SCADA 3000 incorporates basic math instructions including add subtract multiply divide and power These instructions wi
78. res Ack Code Pr On Since 7 31 2000 10 59 40 AM Access Level Administrator User Accounts Y OK Figure 2 System form The System form includes the global system parameters that apply to the unit in general Unit Name The Unit Name is the text description of the SCADA 3000 It can be up to 24 characters long This is automatically filled in from the information you provided when setting up the unit on your computer When SCADA 3000 sends a cover page with a Fax transmission or alerts an alphanumeric pager the Unit Description is sent as part of the basic information Unit ID Number The Unit ID Number is the identification number of the SCADA 3000 and can be up to 16 digits long This number should be programmed to be the same as the telephone number where the unit is installed The Unit ID Number serves several purposes 1 It s the first thing spoken by SCADA 3000 during any voice call Hello this is Unit ID Number 2 When SCADA 3000 sends a cover page with a Fax transmission or alerts an alphanumeric pager the Unit ID Number is sent as part of the information Slave Address This is the modbus address of the SCADA 3000 unit It is set by default and should not be changed unless you are using multiple units on a radio network On a radio network each unit must have a unique slave address The Slave ID can be set to any number between 1 and 247 CLOCK Unit Date amp Time The date and time must be program
79. rounds the number of times a SCADA 3000 will dial through your list of destinations to deliver its messages Default is 100 5 Alphanumeric Pager Speed Default setting is 1200 Baud Call Reception Settings 1 Rings till Answer the number of times the SCADA will let the phone ring before answering an incoming call Default is 1 ring range is 1 20 rings 2 Carrier Wait Time The amount of time SCADA will wait for a modem connec tion when receiving an incoming call Default is 60 seconds range is 0 to 90 sec onds Note Don t set this time too short or a modem connection may never be estab lished 3 Online Timeout Automatically logs you off if there are no communication re quests from the computer within the specified time period The default setting is 4 minutes Range 0 255 with 0 representing a disabled setting Click OK 1 0 PROGRAMMING Click on the first of the three Motherboard and Module I O programming buttons Bala to bring up the I O form for the first 8 inputs the second button for the next 8 inputs and the third button for the 8 outputs SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant 1 0 Points All ES Motherboard 8 Univ Inputs 0 7 1 0 Status 1 0 Setup Table and Cal UAF 170 Name Value Min Max r o 0 lveWeli 96 00 Inches 0 00 100 00 r o i levlwel2 144 00 Inches 0 00 144 00 el 1 0 2 ow 35 00 GPM 34 99 100 00 1 0 3 Outilow 30 00 GPM 29 99 100 00 el
80. screen See figure below EISCADA 3000 DialSrv Setups BUSY ATHCLS 8HVAN 90HVRA 70 CONNECT ATHVLS 6 ATHOTM Figure 3 PC Dial Server Setup In the Parameters section select the Com Port where your modem is installed Set the maximum baud rate supported by your modem typically 115 200 Connect Timeout This is the amount of time in seconds allowed for a connection to be established The timer starts when the number is dialed default 60 seconds Disconnect Timeout This is the maximum amount of time in seconds permitted for mes sage delivery to take place after a connection has been established default 60 seconds Modem Commands and Modem Messages Do not change These settings are configured to work with the Diamond Supramax Express Speakerphone modem The ability to alter these settings is provided for cases where a different modem is being used Contact Phonetics Technical support for more information Email Settings The PC Alarm Dialout program can send alarm messages to any e mail address if your computer has internet access The program supports two methods of accessing the internet RAS Dialup or Local Always On LAN connection DSL T1 Cable modem etc Enter the following information Host Enter the name of the SMTP server used by your Internet Service Provider ISP UserID Enter your e mail account user ID as provided by your ISP FromAddr Enter your e mail address Connect Type Sel
81. send a fax transmission to either a fax machine or a PC with the ability to receive a fax directly E mail This instructs SCADA 3000 to deliver a message to the E mail address programmed in the destination field NOTE For E Mail Dial Types only E mail addresses may be programmed in the destination field NOT telephone numbers SCADA 3000 is pre programmed with a toll free 800 number that will automatically connect to Phonetics E mail server system E mail service requires a subscription fee Contact Phonetics for other e mail options Numeric Pager This instructs SCADA 3000 to dial a numeric pager and leave the unit s ID number and alarm input numbers on the display This will happen automatically just by entering the pager s telephone number in the destination field If you want to change the information that is sent to your pager or you are having trouble receiving the page you may use the special dialing codes to customize the dialout to your pager NOTE When dialing to a numeric pager it is sometimes necessary to combine codes Certain pager systems vary and you must adjust accordingly To test your pager system use an extension telephone on the same line as the SCADA 3000 unit and listen in during the SCADA 30005 dial out to confirm that your pager service is reached without a problem If you must add a pause use the letter P to insert a two second pause wherever necessary Alpha Pager This instructs SCADA 3000 to
82. settings you should contact Phonetics Technical Support either by phone at 610 558 2700 or email at support sensaphone com The two buttons are resets The lefthand one clears any settings you ve entered in the boxes below The second to the right resets those settings to their previous values Appendix H Troubleshooting Appendix H TROUBLESHOOTING Why does my SCADA 3000 begin dialing as soon as turn it on e SCADA 3000 will dial out for only two reasons to deliver an alarm message or a report If the alarm LED is blinking an unacknowledged alarm exists and SCADA 3000 is trying to deliver an alarm message If the alarm LED is either off or on steady the unit is dialing out to deliver a report The shunt for setting your input type may be in the wrong position causing a false alarm condition Check that it is in the correct position for the type of sensor you re using The unit might have an unacknowledged alarm for which it s still trying to dial out and deliver its message Even though the condition no longer exists the unit will attempt to deliver its message until it is finally acknowledged If this is the case either go on line with a PC and clear the alarm or call the unit back and give the Touch Tone acknowledgment code You can also plug a telephone into the Voice Record jack and give the Iouch Tone acknowledgment code On site you can also check and acknowledge an alarm via the Keypad 1 Press the MENU button
83. the Disable position H 5 SCADA 3000 User s Manual H 6 FGD 0006 FGD 0007 FGD 0010 FGD 0013 FGD 0022 FGD 0023 FGD 0027 GD 0051 GD 0052 FGD 0102 FGD 0103 FGD 0104 FGD 0105 FGD 3010 FGD 3020 FGD 3030 FGD 3040 FGD 3050 FGD 3060 FGD 3100 FGD 3110 FGD 3200 FGD 3210 FGD 3400 FGD 3500 Appendix Accessories Appendix I SCADA 3000 ACCESSORIES ISOTEL Surge Protector Humidistat CADA 3000 Annunciator Module CADA 3000 60W Hard wired Power Supply CADA 3000 55W Plug in Power Supply CADA 3000 5AH Battery amp Mounting Kit CADA 3000 18AH Battery amp Mounting Kit CADA 3000 33 6 Modem Option SCADA 3000 Voice Module Option S S S S S S SCADA 3000 User s Manual Appendix J Replacement Parts Appendix J SCADA 3000 REPLACEMENT PARTS BAT 0004 CR2430 3V Lithium Battery 5 2AH 12V Sealed Gel Cell Battery CON 0027 16 Position Terminal Block Plug CON 0033 2 Position Jumper Shunt CON 0034 4 Position Terminal Block Plug CON 0108 4 Position Jumper Shunt CON 0120 9 Position Terminal Block Plug FUS 0005 500mA TR5 style Time Lag fuse Wickman 3720500041 FUS 0006 4 A 250V size TR 5 Fuse Wickmann 33721400041 HSG 0013 SCADA 3000 Enclosure Base HSG 0014 SCADA 3000 Enclosure Cover LIT 0020 SCADA 3000 Instruction Manual SCADA 3000 User s Manual J 2 Appendix K Returning the Unit for Repair Appendix K RETURNING THE UNIT FOR REPAIR In the event that the SCADA 3000 does no
84. the TIMER VALUE as long as the rung remains true until it reaches the PRESET value If the rung becomes false then the timer stops and resets to 0 The timebase for the TON instruction is 01 seconds for example PRE SET 500 is 5 seconds You can have up to 64 timers The timer bits are updated as follows ENABLED Set when rung is true and reset when rung is false RUNNING Set when rung is true and TIMER VALUE is less than PRESET and reset when rung is false or when DONE bit is set DONE Set when TIMER VALUE is equal to or greater than PRESET and reset when rung is false The timer address can only reference one of the 64 internal timers T 0 through T 63 Right click on the instruction and choose Select Timer A list of the 64 timers will be displayed Select one and click OK Set the Preset by right clicking on the instruction and choosing Set Preset Enter the preset value and click OK The instruction executes in 4 5us and requires 84 bytes The GROUP for this type is the timer number from 0 63 The ELEMENT specifies an individual function for the selected timer There are 5 functions associated with each timer SCADA 3000 User s Manual Element Function Number Description Range of Values 0 Timer Enabled 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 1 Timer Running 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 2 Timer Done 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 3 Preset Value 0 to 32 767 4 Timer Value 0 to 32 767 Examples 1 0 0 indicates if Time
85. the compiler Note Do not use the characters or within the body of a comment Begin comment End comment PREDEFINED VARIABLES SCADA 3000 s C language has several variables that are predefined These variables are auto matically updated with the proper information outside of the C program and cannot be changed by the user They include Chapter 16 C Programming input year output month timer day counter day_of_week bit hours ladder_variable minutes c_variable seconds gas_flow on alarm off diagnostic MONTH DAY YEAR HOURS MINUTES amp SECONDS These variables represent the values from the real time clock They are defined as integer type Their internal definitions look like the following int year int month int day int day_of week int hours int minutes int seconds Note You do not need to define these at the beginning of your program to use them Description YEAR Holds the present value from 1999 to 2100 MONTH Holds the present value from 1 to 12 DAY Holds the present value from 1 to 31 DAY OF WEEK Holds the present value from 0 Monday to 6 Sunday HOURS Holds the present value in 24 hour time from 0 to 23 MINUTES amp SECONDS Holds the present value from 0 to 59 Example This program will turn on output 0 at midnight main if hours 23 amp amp minutes 59 M FUNCTION LIBRARY In SCADA 30005 C language there are five fun
86. the end of this section Some of the options that must be considered when selecting a radio modem include licensed unlicensed operation baud rate requirements cost power requirements geographical constraints While most of these issues will depend upon your particular circumstances we can give you some general information to start off with Licensed frequency radios are generally cheaper but they require registration with the FCC Unlicensed radio modems spread spectrum while usually more expensive can be faster to get up and running Both types of radio modems may be used with the SCADA 3000 The baud rate of the radio modem will determine how quickly information will be transmitted and received The SCADA 3000 s COM2 port can operate over a range of 1200bps to 38 4Kbps Faster radio modems generally cost more Consider a radio modem that can communicate at 38 4Kbps for networks with many SCADA 3000 units Power requirements will vary for different radio modems Most operate from a 12V supply Radio modems with greater distance capability typically require more power Be sure that your power source is capable of powering the radio modem Geography may determine whether a radio modem can be used at all Typically mountainous regions will not work Line of sight provides the best chances of error free data transmission CONFIGURING SCADA 3000 FOR USE WITH RADIO MODEMS The SCADA 3000 COM port is configured for connection directly to a ra
87. the sample C Ladder and Real Time screen files The two buttons to the right are resets The Reset to Default button will reset the directory names where the newly downloaded files and backup files will be saved as shown in the New and Backup fields The Reset to Previous button can be used to revert back to the previous direc tory names where newly downloaded files and backup files will be saved New Shows the drive and directory name where downloaded files will be saved Backup Shows the drive and directory name where a backup copy of the old SCADA 3000 files will be saved if Maintain Backup Copy has been selected Maintain Backup Copy if checked creates a backup of the previous version of software A Revert to Backup option in the file menu will be created if you choose this The default setting is Off Local Files Proxy Server Set these settings if your internet connection goes through a proxy server Need to use Proxy Server Proxy Server J OK Figure 4 Options Proxy tab Proxy Tab If you have to go through a proxy server in order to access the internet check the Need to use Proxy Server box and type in the settings you use Ifyou are unsure see your System Adminis trator SCADA 3000 User s Manual G 4 Figure 5 Options Server tab Server Tab The default settings should be maintained on this tab The boxes will be blank in the default setting Before entering any custom
88. the whole process takes about 2 minutes 20 8 Chapter 21 E mail Server Option Chapter 21 EMAIL SERVER OPTION The SCADA 3000 software can be used as an e mail server to receive and forward e mail mes sages from one or more SCADA 3000s This means that if you have a computer with internet access you can use it to receive e mail calls from your 3000 and forward them over the internet yourself instead of using the Phonetics pay service for e mail You can choose to use the same modem for both incoming and outgoing calls or you can add a separate modem specifically to handle additional calling activity The choice to use one or two modems depends on how much dialing activity you have on your computer SCADA 3000 polling incoming alarms e mail reception internet dial up etc REQUIREMENTS The E mail Server feature requires that you have a computer which is already setup to access the internet It can be either an always on connection via DSL cable modem T1 or a dial up connection Dial up connections must use Microsoft Dial up Networking to get online Pro viders that use proprietary software such as America OnLine cannot be used You must also have a telephone line and modem to receive the e mail calls from your SCADA 3000 s HOW DOES IT WORK Each SCADA 3000 has a telephone number it calls when it delivers e mail Typically this is the telephone number of the modem connected to Phonetic s e mail server however you can
89. this product requires that the user have some knowledge of electrical wiring and computer based control This manual is written assuming that the user has this type of background Safety issues must be considered in the design of any control system to prevent injury and also to insure that it will meet Local and National Electric Codes If you intend to connect high voltage circuits to the unit and you do not have experience working with high voltages Phonetics strongly recommends that you obtain this knowledge or have the work performed by a qualified individual General Description Pictured below is the SCADA 3000 main unit often referred to in this manual as the CPU or motherboard Descriptions of the numbered elements follow Chapter 1 Introduction 4 o ON 1 OUTPUTS o oF 70q 2 3 4 S 6 7 8 rower e 2 EE Oar E E 5 FAULT INPUT ONE IS OKAY TEMPERATURE IS 67 13 PHONE Figure 1 SCADA 3000 CPU 1 Power Switch Switches power from the 15V IN terminals to the SCADA 3000 circuitry Also applies power to the AUX PWR terminals and will charge and or operate from a battery connected to the BAT terminals 2 Control Enable Disable Switch Manual override switch to disable or stop the ladder C control and PID programs from running The software can be used to start and stop the control programs only if the switch is in the Enable position If the switch is set to the Disable position th
90. to the SCADA 3000 The SCADA 3000 can operate with as many as 144 I O points that is up to 144 functioning inputs and or outputs Phonetics offers three different types of input and three types of output modules Input Modules UNIVERSAL INPUT MODULE This module provides 8 Universal Inputs They are identi cal to the 16 inputs on the SCADA 3000 main unit Inputs can be set up and wired as NO NC dry contact thermistor analog voltage input or 4 20mA transducer PULSE COUNT MODULE This module will count contact closures from a dry circuit at a rate of up to 10 800 pulses per second There are four pulse count channels per module In addition the pulse rate for each channel will be computed on a per second per minute or per hour basis If a rate computation is not desired you may also select totalizer overflow to accu mulate pulses that exceed 1 million The most common uses for a pulse count module include flow rates and rpms THERMOCOUPLE MODULE The Thermocouple module offers 4 inputs for thermo couple temperature sensors Thermocouples differ from thermistors in that they can measure a much wider range of temperatures such as those encountered in cryogenic freezer and industrial oven temperature measurement applications The SCADA 3000 Thermocouple expansion module features very accurate 16 Bit input resolution and is compatible with E J K T R and S type thermocouples Output Modules RELAY OUTPUT This unit offers 8 more o
91. top cover and slowly remove it being careful to manually unplug the ribbon connection from the keypad in the center Note Pulling the cover off quickly can damage the ribbon or connector 3 The 36 pin voice board connector socket is below and to the left of the LCD window There are three standoff screw mounting holes in the lower left quadrant of the main board one for the upper left corner of the voice board and two for the bottom corners See Figure 8 Voice card connector m s LCD ribbon connector Standoffs Figure 8 Voice board mounting on the main board Line the voice board up with the connector and push it carefully but firmly into place With the three screws provided with the voice card secure it to the three standoffs 4 Replace the cover manually reconnecting the keypad ribbon to the board Replace the four screws Your voice board is now connected and ready for use See Chapter 11 for information on recording your own messages 37 SCADA 3000 User s Manual 3 8 Chapter 4 Power Supply Chapter 4 POWER SUPPLY amp BATTERY BACKUP POWER REQUIREMENTS The SCADA 3000 is designed to be powered from a 10 15V DC power supply 15V required to charge an external battery This wide operating voltage range permits the unit to be powered from 12V solar cells in truly remote applications Most applications will have 120VAC available and we re
92. used to compare against the datapoint value D ataPointAleit1 TD ataPointAlert wavolavert TWavplaver y Datapoint DynComponent E DynProperty ThresholdType t Thresholdvalue ChestnutStreetPlan RepetitionRate Repetitions SCADA Datapoint mapped to Component Datapoint Figure 29 WAV palette amp properties 14 28 Chapter 14 Real Time Screen Design Properties Audio Checkbox Check to be able to hear sound Color Select a color for the placeholder for the sound file Datapoint Select Datapoint to link to a specific I O and SCADA to link to a specific RTU Filename Link to the file that plays Play Checkbox Check to play the file Repetition Rate How often the animation or sound file repeats Repetitions How many times the file plays Height Sets the height of the AV file Hint Text message that appears when the cursor rests over an object Left Sets the position of the gauge as measured from the left side of the palette Run Checkbox Check to have the AV file play Title Assign an name or title to this AV element Top Sets the position of the gauge as measured from the top of the palette Transparent Checkbox Check if you want the linked file to be transparent Width Width of the AV element PLACING DYNAMIC ELEMENTS ON THE PALETTE There are three dynamic component tools that can be used to perform dynamic property ma nipulation of other components The functio
93. widths Size Sets the point size of a font object If you need to ensure that the font fits within a specified area you can manipulate the Height and Pitch properties Style Sets the default style of the font or text fsBold Sets the default to boldface fsltalic Sets the default to italic Chapter 14 Real Time Screen Design fsStrikeout Forces a line through the font fsUnderline Underlines the text as default Height Vertical size in pixels overridden if you chose a Max Min Height Hint Type in the text that will appear upon mouseover Left Sets the position of the component as measured from the left side of the palette Off Color Color of the component in the off state Default color is Red On Color Color of the component in the on state Default color is Green Show Hint Enables the hint message to display on mouseover State Checkbox This is the On Off Enabled Disabled Datapoint state Stay On Top Checkbox Check if you want the element to float above any other graphics Visible Checkbox Check to make component visible Width Horizontal size in pixels overridden by Max Min Width values if any PLACING CONTAINER COMPONENTS ON THE PALETTE The Contain Tab offers the following realtime elements Container Tank ContainerVessel ContainerPipe ContainerFill ContainerBoiler ContainerKettle Most of these are simple line drawing representations of containers and can have dynamic propertie
94. will be connecting your serial port directly to the SCADA 3000 set the baud rate to 38400 Answer Incoming Calls Check this box if you want the modem to receive alarm calls or e mail calls from the SCADA 3000 Full Duplex Buffering Allows communications to run faster during Register Verifi cation by buffering multiple bytes during transmission Highly recommended for modem communications The Modbus Protocol Settings are explained below Packet Retries Information flows back and forth between SCADA 3000 and your PC in data packets Both automatically check for packet transmission errors When a bad packet is detected it gets sent again Packet Retries determines how many times a packet is sent before a communication error is logged Default retries is 5 Packet Timeout The amount of time before the PC gives up and determines that an individual modbus request has timed out Decreasing this parameter will not increase performance but increasing the parameter may remove occasional errors Default 500 milliseconds Retry Delay This is the amount of time the SCADA 3000 software will wait for a response from a unit before it decides to make another communication request Default is 500 milliseconds Buffer Size Determines the number of bytes to be buffered during communications typical 2 56 When you finish configuring the ports manually click OK to close this form Chapter 9 Communicating with SCADA 3000 Cellular Phone C
95. 0 NES lae pio EI E ET TT RES 10 Remote Voice POMO ee Wa aera aA es 1 To heard Status Reposo ir oO PIS DOR PEE HDI eb eee 12 ALARM PROGRAMMING essen eene nennen nennen nennen nn nr rana nn nn inneren nene 12 A ao ceras open quU 13 A C cD Um 13 SUUS oe O O A IN aoo ue EOD DW AORN Dun umi ER C IPRC be 13 PA POE A RE ROI A OA A RIA E AA A ORE 13 ALARMSETO Pra riot dais 13 B oun eile e CET eS 15 AARM RECO CNIT ON s dot tete t ve p ate mittel ki etae Mr et i e ade he Se ech ene 16 Dielout Note Call Progressi asd sin rd vid ou earns Sate 16 ALARM CALL MODE UNTIL ACKNOWLEDGED VS INFORM sssseeeneenenennn 16 o o A sate sedge aera detenta OO 16 lil umso c M OMM ED CAS EE M eA AT 16 Alarin Diglowt Voice di Liter t a A BEEN ER FUGA BEEN QI EXER ME A 16 Alarm Dialout Numeric Pager AES ta di Cota eee eos kee 17 Alarm Dialout Alphanumeric Pager ai is it ties 17 Alarm Dialout Modem het MT 17 Alarm DOUE epe Sm D A a Oo Pan IN DR UG wd Nw NN 17 Alarm Dialout iii raider 17 ALARM ACKNOWLEDOMENT cues eiecti eco leen ene era eri tod nig sen ebd E Bei eo oD REIS iaa 17 Alarm Acknowledgment Voice Dialout c aoa P ott aires 17 Alarm Acknowledgment Pager Dial oUt 5o dic roti toot rat es peres ines nos ossce e e Ho pellets 18 Alarm Acknowledgment Alphanumeric Pager Dialout ssse 19 Alarm Acknowledgment Modem Dial out iioi ui itur eH HO OLG eget as 20
96. 0 software has configured the COM port to connect to a Phone H 1 SCADA 3000 User s Manual H 2 Modem Click Comm gt Setup from the Sensaphone Control Center Main Menu Click the appropriate Comm port tab and check that the port is Enabled and the Type is set to Phone Modem Make sure that your modem is turned on and plugged into a working telephone line If your modem dials the SCADA 3000 but won t connect Rings Until Answer may be too high If Rings Until Answer is set too high the SCADA 3000 software will time out before the 3000 can answer the call Increase Dial Time Out or reduce the number of Rings Until Answer Carrier Wait Time may be too short Dial Time Out may be too short COM port Baud Rate setting may be too fast This is frequently the case when using a cellular telephone to make a modem connection to a SCADA 3000 Wireless phones are more subject to noise and interference than land lines so you may need to slow down the baud rate to establish and maintain a reliable connection 1 Click Comm gt Setup from the Sensaphone Control Center Main Menu 2 Click the appropriate Comm port tab and select a slower Port Baud Rate until a reliable connection is established Check your Modem Setup String SCADA 3000 software allows you to enter a setup string of modem AT commands These are usually only needed if you are having trouble getting your modem to connect to a SCADA 3000 unit See your modem Operators
97. 00 will run the program depending on your pro grammed Reload Time Async mode or everytime your ladder program runs Sync Mode Synchronous or Asynchronous You can have your C program run sequentially with your ladder program synchronous or you can have it run independently on a fixed time interval asynchronous It depends on what your application requires In synchronous mode the inputs are scanned before the program starts and the outputs will not update until the C program has finished executing In asynchronous mode inputs and outputs are updated as changes occur during program execution Generally if you have a long C program or it takes a long time to run you do NOT want it to run synchro nously because this will slow your ladder program amp input output scanning to unacceptable levels Order of events in synchronous mode 1 Read motherboard inputs 2 Read expansion module inputs if any 3 Run ladder program if enabled 4 Run C program if enabled 5 Update main board outputs 6 Update expansion module outputs if any Control Switch On the front panel of the SCADA 3000 is a switch labeled CNTRL This switch is used to manually deactivate any control programs Ladder C program PID control onsite If this switch is in the DISABLE position no control programs will run Additionally you can have the control switch turn all outputs OFF See the section on the Ladder amp C Program Start Stop form Run
98. 0504099 E mail The SCADA 3000 can send alarm messages and reports via e mail In the Destination field enter the e mail address For this to work you must have an internet e mail account and register the unit with Phonetics The unit will automatically dial a toll free number to the e mail server at Phonetics and then forward the information to you A monthly fee is required to receive e mail from your SCADA 3000 Simply fill out the e mail registration card that came with your unit or contact Phonetics for more details Other e mail delivery options may be available Contact factory for details Example Jhalio AOL com Special Dialing Codes Sometimes when dialing out on certain phone systems SCADA 3000 may need special instruc tions to access an outside phone line to contact numeric pagers or to use alphanumeric pager services The following dialing codes give SCADA 3000 instructions on how to send the phone digits when dialing the phone number Each code is counted as one digit toward the total of 50 digits The dialing codes are P two second pause A two second pause can be placed anywhere within the phone number by typing the letter P upper or lower case The pause takes up one digit and may be used more than once This is typically required when a pager service is answered by a voice prompted message or when a pager service allows only a few seconds to enter a number before disconnect ing You must add enough pauses to get p
99. 1 0 4 Water Temperature 61 00 Deg F 60 99 100 00 el 1 0 5 Pump 1 Runtime 45788 00 Seconds 0 00 45788 00 el 1 0 6 Pump 2 Runtime 3269400 Seconds 0 00 32694 00 el 1 0 7 Fuellevel 32 00 Gallons 0 00 100 00 T Y OK Figure 7 I O Points The form above shows the first eight inputs on the main unit 0 7 retrieved by clicking on the first of the three buttons Click the I O Setup button to open the setup form Here you assign each input a name a type and the units of measurement applying to that type To set the Low and High values for inputs and the calibration factor if any click on the Table and Cal button Click on OK to close the form once you ve programmed your inputs Chapter 3 Hardware Installation Chapter 3 HARDWARE INSTALLATION This chapter provides the information necessary to install the Sensaphone SCADA 3000 Cor rectly installing the unit will ensure proper functioning and maximum service life Please read the entire chapter before attempting installation OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SCADA 3000 should be mounted and operated in a clean dry and safe environment Do not mount the unit where it will be subject to shock and vibration Do not mount the unit where it will be subject to dirt dust or moisture Ideally the unit would be mounted in a steel or a fiber glass NEMA 4 enclosure Do not mount the unit or the expansion modules close to motor starters contactors or
100. 23 12 Appendix A Proper Operation Appendix A CHECKING YOUR SCADA 3000 FOR PROPER OPERATION We recommend that you test your Sensaphone weekly to be sure it is functioning properly This will ensure that when a problem arises the Sensaphone will be ready to alert the appropriate personnel There are several tests that can be performed 1 Call the unit and listen to the Status Report This will test the unit s ability to answer the phone and speak a message It will also verify that the inputs are reading properly the alarm conditions are OK the electricity is on the control programs are running and that the battery is OK 2 Create a test alarm on an input and allow the unit to contact all programmed tele phone numbers This will make sure that the Sensaphone is programmed properly It will also prepare personnel to respond appropriately when they receive a call from the Sensaphone 3 Test the battery if connected by unplugging the external power supply and making sure that the Sensaphone continues to function Check the battery voltage with a DC voltmeter or through the SCADA keypad in the Diagnostics menu to make sure it is at least 1 3V Reconnect the power supply when finished 4 Test the internal modem by calling the Sensaphone from a computer and logging on While connected run the motherboard diagnostics to verify that all internal system parameters are correct SCADA 3000 User s Manual A 2 Appendix B Spe
101. 4 Program destinations 5 Program alarms Step One is to let the SCADA 3000 know that the PC is going to handle all alarm dialing activ ity To do this log in to each SCADA 3000 and click the System Programming button from the toolbar or select Programming then System from the main menu On the System screen click the Advanced button located within the Dialout Settings area The following screen will appear Chestnut Street Plant Advanced Dial C1 X PC Dialout When enabled all Alarm Dialouts will be made by the PC i iis uni ine at all times q for Voice Destinations Intended for Radio Networks Alarm Dialing Priority This willicause the unit to disconnect any RE connections so it can make alarm phone calls Ja Log Off and Dial Alarm Destinations Immediately Email Delivery Settings Dials Default Phone Number G Custom Phone Number Figure 4 Advanced Dialout Screen Check off the box labeled PC handles all Alarm Dialout Functions This will prevent the SCADA 3000 from trying to dial out when an alarm exists 22 3 SCADA 3000 Users Manual Note PC Alarm Dialout does not support the delivery of Reports Step Two is to program the Unit ID Number which is located on the System screen Typically this would be the telephone number of the SCADA 3000 but in this case enter the telephone number of the computer modem By entering this number personnel will receive th
102. 5 Current Alarms COMPUTER ALARM RECEPTION Alarms from your SCADA 3000 unit s can be received and logged on a computer when the destination type in your SCADA unit is set to modem The computer that will be receiving the alarm calls must have a modem the computer must be on continuously and it must be running the SCADA 3000 software To enable your computer to receive alarms click on Comm then Setup from the Control Center form Select the Comm Port tab which corresponds to your Chapter 1 1 Programming for Phone Applications modem and click the box that says Answer Incoming Calls See sample below This will set your modem to answer when the phone line rings Commi Comm2 Comm3 Comm4 Comms V Enable Port F Full Duplex Buffering Type Phone Modem E PotBaudRae 115200 y Answer Incoming Cals v Modbus Protocol Setti Packet Retres 7 Rem Delay 500 Packet Timeout 500 Butter Size 256 ET Figure 16 Comm Port torm When an alarm call is received the software will try to match the calling unit with one in its database If a match is found it will download the event log and display the alarm information on the Alarm History form shown below Alarms lofxj Current Alarms Alam History Logging Audible 5 25 2000 11 14 26 AM Chestnut Street Plant Alarm Low Detected 4 0 water Level Doa Y 0K Figure 17 Alarm History form This form will store all alarms that are received on
103. 8 Deleting Events from the Event Log Databases 29 Printing Exporting and Copying the Event Log soe ee Ie Heo ad even wake 29 POLLING Sta iaa 29 SETTING UP A POLLING SCHEDULE s carece ace aio 29 G n ral Sel JB ses ao o tec oos pae von ee E a E en N O E te esie esac N 31 CHANGING THE POLLING SCHEDUTE usina tbi fodere d eee t e OPER edere D ans 31 INTRODUCTION vr SELECTING RADIO MODEM S cositas estu esie Meer Dr dap itu plunder easiest du eat CONFIGURING SCADA 3000 FOR USE WITH RADIO MODEMS eem Chapter 12 PROGRAMMING FOR RADIO APPLICATIONS 12 1 ROW CONTROL tt dee ter Peo dH een ree Ral 2 OST COMPUTER SEDIPS y dehet haies es RU i anced eue e e tei aus 2 COMMUNICATING WITH YOUR SCADA 3000s sse mene 6 RADIO MODEM MANUFACTURERS cui ci 6 Chapter 13 LCD amp KEYPAD PROGRAMMING e eere eere nnne 13 1 Displ y sre AA D ND A TE A E E A 1 Programming Data Points for Scroll Mode ves doen RERO I RO YR ee Pee RU iaa 1 Removing Dala Points acd ia p aid utar auido sopor et pda 2 Gro ping Date POIS on ao 2 NAVIGATING THE DISPLAY USING THE KEYPAD conta it 2 O A e eros N 2 USING THE KEYPAD vto AS 3 DATA EOI Onis is dd e dl t ee dl e dear beac oot 3 A RA A A A IS 3 CHS stink sa A a tle har Nas alg esas cd ML ol aide N A E Se cee o NETS on e Ped ens dl tat SAN das Aa ads d 3 O O A a Meese 4 xi SCADA 3000 User s Manual S See ET NTR PETTY er SPER TORN TEN PETROS
104. ASIC LANGUAGE ssssssssseeeeeeneene nennen nnne nnns 6 STRUCTURE sita th det o tede id ot oni E deed 6 RE VOR aia ad od uc MM He EE M il da ra 7 DEFINON S 20 dalla andadas toad nie leve teint 7 Di statement nadia ca ta wae dote Peter AA oo E A LN E dus a 7 f Then Else E IE A O EAS SENA 7 Fore Next Statement esaerea ALO 8 Do soo MEMES RAS AAN 8 OPERATORS oo iio dotes een ee em cer t 9 PROGRAMMING METHODOLOGY sse eene nennen eene rennen nenne 10 SAMPLE PROGRAM S odii Rice dat eel Na 11 SCADA 3000 User s Manual Appendix A CHECKING YOUR SCADA 3000 FOR PROPER OPERATION A 1 Appendix B SCADA 3000 SPECIFICATIONS eee eren eene nennen B 1 Appendix C LIST OF SYSTEM EVENTS censere ee eee een eene eene tee tnues C 1 Appendix D 10k THERMISTOR CURVE DATA ee eeee eere eene rne D 1 Appendix E COMMUNICATIONS PORTS csssccssssssscssscssscssscssecesecesesees E 1 Appendix F UPDATING SCADA 3000 FIRMWARE eee eene enne nnn F 1 Appendix G SOFTWARE INTERNET UPGRADE eese eene eene ernnen G 1 STARTING THE PROXGRAM reet croacia ii in cria desea 1 NN 1 AA A O O IDONEOS NSEC hPa edat uei A the ae A AE ches A Mie te tA ENA 1 e uS VM C e io 2 Loa o a PA A TRUE DN TE 2 A A NN PERSE 3 o o ORE MOREE RE E AE E RET A RS E IE ROUES A 3 Savor Mta ML ELM E EAE Sk E MC E E S 4 Appendix H TROUBL
105. Alarm Acknowledgment Maximum Calling Rounds ooccocooooccccccconononocccccononnononcnononnnnnnnno 20 ALARM DIALING PRIORITY savas ish oat tacit tect Naat Au aetate des e bs abt dote a 20 VIEWING CURRENT ALARMS sti Ret oleae PEU POOR e a ike ERR ete 20 COMPUTER ALARM RECEPTION etsi a aid 20 Alarm Printing and Logging sce sae socks hacks ccc Gee ast chit naan et Le outa ne iene EE 2 A 22 loggin gia TT TT ULM 22 Zudible ATO deterioro Ether toni e ev htm oreet erbe vota ie d etnies n presb hl e vlr 22 SCADA Table of Contents REPORIS os sis at CO a dd 22 DATALOGGING narnia ara ences DR ARR IU eub GS DRE UN ER A AOS 23 DATA LOGGING CAPACITY T TR 24 SELECTING DATA POINTS TO 609 4 etos Hr aD ar E E Dus ois i E E E 24 ORDER OF DATA POINTS LOGGED stas 29 TIME INTENVA Lo nan t Er a a pp Renate te areca ES Va dans 25 Bde ccuSa mp 25 STOPPING THE DATA LOGGER rasca sia derit cumini aie eh ei Neve RE eR RON 26 RESETIING THE DADA LOGGER 2 eati P E reo tu Matera mans oat ees utut 26 DOWNLOADING THE DATA LOGGER secet sia iaa 26 VIEWING THE DATA erni a E E 26 o A E LM SM cuu LEID A M DD M E UA LI DARE 27 Expollibuc codec o nde quier quan opu A uci I 27 CO RD PDC tocaran dana 27 DNA aia 27 UUM Picea shane TEE 28 NEW Que pe 28 eo TTE ERIS 28 By EI LOGGER ooo toL M MM E a ir LE CU EE toot 28 DOWNLOADING THE EVENT LOGGER ssesseseeeeeneenen nennen eere enne 28 VIEWING THE EVENT LOGGER odii ai esas le lage 2
106. Auto Automatically formats tic marks TicAuto Count Tics are used to mark intervals on the gauge s face The count determines the number of intervals shown Title Assign a name or title to a gauge Title X Places the x coordinate of the title Title Y Places the y coordinate of the title Top Sets the position of the gauge as measured from the top of the palette Track Color Strip chart Sets the background color of the strip chart Value GaugeLevel Temporarily forces a value into the gauge to view its appearance Visible Progress Bar GaugeLevel Checkbox check to make the bar visible Width Width of the gauge X Resolution Strip chart A decimal number which sets the scale of the x axis based on a 24 hour period If the X Resolution is set to a value of 1 then the x axis will cover 24 hours If the X Resolution is set to 0 5 the x axis will cover 12 hours Default 0 001 about 1 5 minutes PLACING AUDIO AND VIDEO ELEMENTS ON THE PALETTE Two types of AV elements can be added to your palette An AVI player for animations and movies and a WAV player for sound files 14 27 SCADA 3000 User s Manual SCADA 3000 RT Builder i X File Edi Forms Help Data Group Graphic DataPoint Elec Rotate Contain Valve Gauge AudVid Dynamic Ree WAVplayer DCAVIplayer Figure 26 AudVid Tab Playing an Audio or Video Message You can have the real time screen play an audio m
107. Click on the item you wish to add to the Web Report and then click on the first of the three buttons between the two list boxes the one with an arrow pointing to the right This will copy the highlighted item to the list of Selected Data Points Continue this process by highlighting each chosen data point and copying it to the list of Selected Data Points To remove a data point from the list highlight the data point from the Selected Data Points list box and click on the middle button the one with the arrow pointing towards the left This will remove the highlighted item When you are finished editing the list click on the Commit button Next select the Formatting Tab Chapter 20 Internet Web Status FORMATTING THE WEB PAGE The web page that is created can be programmed to refresh automatically updating the data at specific intervals It will also contain a top and bottom Sensaphone logo which can be changed based on your preferences In addition you can have the logos be active links to other world wide web addresses The Formatting tab is where you specify these elements of your page SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Web Status Setup rl ES Options UAFs Formatting Browser Refresh Never page must be reloaded manually Web Browser will automatically refresh the page every 5 Minutes Settings for Top Left Comer Logo Default phonetics ipa C Custom C PROGRAM FILES SCADA 3000 WebSt
108. Close The first step in creating a Distributed Control Pro gram is to load the template program template vbs This program includes some pre and post program instructions which are required for your program to run properly To load the template program click the Lozd button then go to the following folder and select the template vbs program C Program Files SSCADA 3000 gt Samples gt Scripts gt template vbs Click on template vbs and click OK The template program should appear in the window The program you will write must be entered between the comments labeled Begin User Program and End User Program Do not change or delete any of the instructions that appear before or after the User Program area 23 2 Chapter 23 Distributed Control Using Visual Basic Script S Template VBS Clolx Program Name Template vds dim bTerminated EntryProc dim i j k i 0 bTerminated False Scripti Status Starting do while not bTerminated j7su ElapsedSecs i i 1 if 1 mod 100 0 then Scriptl Status Running 25 Sub ExitProc 29 bTerminated True Do End Sub Figure 5 Template program REFERENCING SCADA 3000 I O POINTS Every I O point or component that is placed on the Real time screen is assigned a unique tagname which is made up of the Component Name and the Property Name The Component Name is based on the type of component used on the screen along with a number Each time that component is used on the scree
109. D amp KEYPAD PROGRAMMING The SCADA 3000 includes a 4 line by 20 character liquid crystal display LCD and a 4 button keypad on it s front panel The display is used for viewing the values of data points checking system information and acknowledging alarms It has two modes of operation scrolling and manual In scrolling mode the display will scroll through a programmable list of data points showing 4 at a time Every 5 seconds it will change to display the next set of points You can customize the display to show only the points pertinent to your application The keypad is used to manually view specific information acknowledge alarms and program the data points that appear when the display is scrolling You can also program the scrolling data points from the SCADA 3000 software Display Backlight An LED backlight is integrated into the display to allow viewing in dark environments To turn on the backlight simply press one of the keypad buttons The backlight will come on for a few minutes then shut off automatically to save energy Programming Data Points for Scroll Mode Click on the LCD button from the toolbar on the main programming form or select Program ming then LCD from the main menu The following form should appear SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Display Include List Select UAFs that will appear on the LCD Biel Es Available UAFs Alarms z 2 0 0 Alarm 0 _ Timers 410 0 Al
110. D read_uaf Input 0 13 avg temp sensor A sensor B sensor C sensor D 4 Example 45 Acknowledging Alarms from the C Program The following lines of code show how to acknowledge an alarm from the C Program If a momentary normally open push button was connected to input zero depressing the button would acknowledge the alarm Example main if read_uaf input 0 0 1 I input 0 on main board is closed reset 0 then acknowledge alarm 0 Example 6_Lead Lag Pump Down Control This program will perform simple pump down control with alternating lead and lag pumps The program controls two relay outputs from the reading of one analog level indicator The level input is assumed to be on channel zero of the motherboard and the relay outputs are assumed to be on channels zero and one of the motherboard As long as those I O points are acceptable the only set up is to change the variable set up for lead on lag on and all_off For this example the three set points are preset in the source code With some minor modifica tions you can make these parameters programmable from the C Variables form int lag int lead int state float lead on SCADA 3000 User s Manual float lag on float all off int first 0 empty 1 lead on 2 lag on main if first 0 lead 0 preset channel 0 as lead lag 1 preset channel 1 as lag lead_on 12 lag on
111. DA 3000 software and firmware via the Net Upgrader program that comes installed with your SCADA 3000 Net Upgrader allows future upgrades to be performed quickly and easily Instructions for using the upgrader are included in the online Help files To find out which software revision is currently installed on your computer run the SCADA 3000 software and select Help gt About For detailed information on the procedure for installing new firmware see Appendix F in your owner s manual Chapter 9 Communicating with SCADA 3000 Chapter 9 COMMUNICATING WITH THE SCADA 3000 Running the Software To run the software double click the SCADA 3000 icon on your desktop The Control Center form will appear See Figure 1 The Control Center form is the main menu to access all of the features of the SCADA 3000 Sensaphone Control Center BEI File Real Time Control History Polling Comm Help Comm 1 Comm 2 Comm3 Comm4 Comm 5 Alarm Polling Chestnut Street Plant 37 AM SCADA Working Directory es to c PROGRAM FILES SCADA 20004 07 46 AM Startup Completed Figure 1 SCADA 3000 Control Center screen Communications Programming The software will communicate to SCADA 3000 through your computer s local serial port phone modem or radio modem These communication paths must be properly configured for a connection to be established To set up and configure ports manually choose the COMM pulldown menu in the Control Center form and th
112. DATAPOINT ELEMENTS ON THE PALETTE The DataPoint Tab offers four element buttons you can use to place I O related elements on the palette SCADA 3000 RT Builder File Edit Forms Help Data Group Graphic DataPoint Elec Rotate Contain Valve Gauge Audvid Dynamic DIS zl DataPoint DataPoint DataPoint Label Value x m Shape Figure 18 DataPoint Tab The DatapointLabel is a dynamic label which can be assigned to the I O name of any point in the SCADA 3000 For example if the label were assigned to input 0 on the main unit UAF 1 0 0 whatever name was entered for Input 0 in the SCADA 3000 would now appear on the screen SCADA 3000 User s Manual New_1 Design Figure 19 Label attached to vessel object Labels can be used to customize the screen You can edit the size font and color of the text You can place DataPointValue labels directly on top of graphics to provide real time readings Label properties are listed below Properties Label Value Align To align graphic component to edges of the palette area alBottom Stretches the component across the bottom of the palette alClient Fills the palette with the component Useful for adding a background graphic alLeft Stretches the component along the left edge of the palette alNone No realignment is applied Note this will not correct any other previously applied alignment alRight Stretches the component along the right edge of the pa
113. DDRESS 0 through MODULE ADDRESS 15 Scroll down or up and press ENTER for any of these to display the INPUT CHANNEL list Scroll through this list and press ENTER for any Channel to view its current value or to execute the Add Remove or Freeze functions For each using the arrow keys you can scroll through 3 menu choices ADD TO DISPLAY REMOVE FROM DISPLAY or DISPLAY FROZEN The names for the channels are customizable with your software Outputs Use the DOWN arrow and ENTER to select the Outputs display The list goes from MOD ULE ADDRESS 0 to MODULE ADRESS 15 Scroll down or up and press ENTER for any of these to display the OUTPUT CHANNEL list 0 7 Scroll through this list and press ENTER for any Channel to view its current value or to execute the Add Remove or Freeze functions For each using the arrow keys you can scroll through 3 menu choices ADD TO DISPLAY REMOVE FROM DISPLAY or DISPLAY FROZEN The Outputs are likewise customizable to display the identifier of your choice Timers The third option under Data Points is Timers The choices are TIMER NUMBER 0 63 Use the down arrow to scroll through the timers below those displayed Press ENTER for any of the timers to bring up the TIMER PARAMETER feature There are five parameter choices selected by using the arrow and ENTER keys Press ENTER for any of parameter to view the current value or to execute the Add Remove or Freeze functions For each address using the arrow keys
114. E COMPONENTS ON THE PALETTE ooo ari suene e ca such dea es 23 PLACING GAUGES ON THE PALE TE itid ERAI Ie eatin itt ee MR Md tru 25 SE IAG eS EMI I ET 29 Seting US PUNA de Rid rSn RI tt rt duos uere esc eu pU 25 PLACING AUDIO AND VIDEO ELEMENTS ON THE PALETTE 0 ccccccceeeesteeeeeeeneeeeeeees 27 Playing an Audio or Video Message ius da Oreste er Head tu Ur oes ea tede ted 28 PLACING DYNAMIC ELEMENTS ON THE PALETTE sssseseeeeenem een 29 REAL TIME OUTPUT CONTRO L rita dia toda eoe ee eH e DEI Eno COR 3 SAVING THE REALTIME SCREEN irat e eb ee I rl tee toads wt peed Gee eoque 32 LOADING A REAL TIME SCREEN FOR EDITING sssseseeem 32 RUNNING THE REAL TIME SCREEN ioo chi E ge EO PN eere OS 32 Chapter 15 LADDER LOGIC PROGRAMMING eee eene eene nnt 15 1 RULES CONVENTIONS OF LADDER LOGIC PROGRAMMING eeeeen 2 DESCRIPTION OF LADDER ELEMENTS AND FUNCTIONS 0 000000 ceccccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneees 2 Locus i ii ol qu ote p ette ue se Ln OM RAUNT CoP CRUD OO RR on Aa bue Lut NCE roD RAN 2 XIC Instruction Examine if Closed a sas ae pan a tasa rtt RO ar tc arena easi e D efl 3 Peu Vere Mim A ET okt a TO T 3 OTE TishUChOn TOUR Energize T 4 SUN SOR Tmt Idol decis G00 oa tale clk Gs to OT TU TM 4 COTE OUI ICICI sede A ard tan sete E ed veceepndasecnatees 4 SCADA Table of Contents OSI CE SHOR ISG sedat oe tutu O cef Et Le ELLA e P
115. ESHOOTING scssssssscesssssssssrssssscsssssscsesscssecenees H 1 Appendix I SCADA 3000 ACCESSORIES ccsscsssssssssssssssscssscssscssnssenees I 1 Appendix J SCADA 3000 REPLACEMENT PARTS eese eene eene J 1 Appendix K RETURNING THE UNIT FOR REPAIR eere eere K 1 IMPORTANT INFORMATION FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS sssee emere 2 Appendix L PROGRAMMING FORMS ccsscssscssscsssssssscssscssscssscsensesnces L 1 Index Warranty Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Congratulations on your purchase of the Sensaphone SCADA 3000 the intelligent RTU and software system for powerful low cost SCADA solutions The SCADA 3000 comes complete with all the software you ll need in a single integrated package Your entire system is easier to set up easier to program and support and much more cost effective than other traditional SCADA systems Flexible Communications SCADA 3000 RTUs communicate with the host PC by standard data radio ordinary phone lines or a combination of both With an adaptor even cellular phone communi cation is possible Built in Alarm Notification The Sensaphone SCADA 3000 s complete set of communications options and capabili ties can save you expensive delays and downtimes Whether you use phone lines or radio the SCADA 3000 system can report alarms using custom voice numeric pagers alphanumeric pagers fax and even e mail
116. Each input can have its own name programmed to distinguish it The name can be up to 24 characters This screen will show the current value the chosen units of measure and the minimum maximum values for each input Min and Max in this case reflect the minimum and maximum values that the input channel has attained On the far right of each input channel listed is a Reset button If you click the Reset button it will set the Min and Max to the Current Value So if temperature is currently 60 F and you click the Reset both Min and Max will show 60 as their values As the temperature changes Min or Max will adjust accordingly Note If the input channel is set as a Runtime counter clicking the Reset button for that input channel will clear Min Max AND the current Runtime count and the Runtime will start again from 0 Click on the I O Setup button to move to the second screen and configure the input type and units of measure for each input The I O setup screen follows SCADA 3000 User s Manual SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant 1 0 Points BE xl Motherboard 8 Univ Inputs 0 7 1 0 Status 170 Setup Table and Cal UAF 1 0 Name Type Units Forced Status 1 0 0 Leve Well1 420 ma y finches y M quee CN MEI que Eloy ME CET Go I 0 4 Water Temperature 10k deo F y Deg F y I 0 5 Pump 1 Run time Run Time y Seconds y I 0 6 Pump 2 Run time Run Time Seconds y 1 0 7 Fuel Level 4 20 ma y Gatons y
117. Fax E mail Modem Numeric Pager and Alphanumeric pager Dialout Note Call Progress SCADA 3000 monitors the progress of telephone calls when it is dialing out for alarms After it dials it will allow the line to ring up to ten times If the call is not answered before ten rings have occurred the unit will hang up wait the programmed intercall time and then dial the next number If SCADA 3000 dials out and encounters a busy signal it will hang up immediately wait the programmed intercall time and then go on to the next number in sequence ALARM CALL MODE UNTIL ACKNOWLEDGED VS INFORM Until Acknowledged Destinations programmed with Alarm Call Mode Until Acknowledged will continue to be contacted until one of them acknowledges the alarm Note Fax E mail and Modem destinations cannot be programmed as Until Acknowledged Inform Destinations programmed with Alarm Call Mode Inform will be contacted until the alarm message has been successfully delivered one time If a transmission to an Inform destination was successful that destination will not be contacted again Important Destinations programmed as Alarm Call Mode Inform CANNOT ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS Alarm Dialout Voice When dialing out to a destination programmed as voice SCADA 3000 waits for the phone to be answered then recites its user recorded identification message then the message identifying the value that has gone into alarm Below is a
118. Figure 4 Start C Program form Chapter 16 C Programming Click on Run Once to test run your program one time The form will display The Run Time the amount of time it took for your program to complete and whether or not it ran from begin ning to end OK If not it will display any errors encountered The run time is useful in deciding whether to run the C program in synchronous mode or asynchronous mode It will also help you to decide what to enter for the reload time if you choose asynchronous mode Start amp Stop After the program has been compiled run once and all errors have been corrected you can START the program Before STARTING though you must determine if the program will be running synchronously or asynchronously and if running asynchronously you must also deter mine what the Reload Time will be The Reload Time is the time between each successive execution of the C Program This is programmable so that you can make the unit most efficient by telling the SCADA 3000 to execute the program only when necessary For instance if you require the program to run every half hour it is not necessary to waste SCADA 3000 time and have the program run every 10 seconds The Reload Time must be at least double the Run Time and can only be programmed in whole numbers The Run Time is provided when you RUN the program So if your Run Time is 1 5 seconds the Reload Time must be at least 3 seconds After the program is STARTED SCADA 30
119. Linking Messages to UAFs 11 9 Local 11 10 Messages 11 6 8 Custom 11 6 7 Password for Incoming 11 7 Password for Local 11 7 Recite ID Phone Number 11 7 Recording amp Programming 11 631 Recording and Playback 11 10 Remote 11 11 Status Report Customizing 11 8 To Hear a Status Report 11 12 3 YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY 1 WARRANTOR Dealer Distributor Manufacturer 2 ELEMENTS OF WARRANTY This Pr oduct is warranted to be free from defects in materials and craftsmanship with only the limitations and exclusions set out belaw 3 WARRANTY AND REMEDY Three Year Warranty In the event that the Product does not confom to this warranty at any time during the time of three years from original purchase warantor will repair the defect and return it to you at no chage This warranty shall terminate and be of no further effect at the time the Product is 1 damaged by extraneous cause such as f water lightning etc or not maintained as reasonable and necessay 2 modified 3 improperly installed 4 repaired by some one other than warantor 5 used in a manner or purpose for which the Poduct was not intended or 6 sold by original purchaser WARRANTORS OBLIGA TION UNDER THISW ARRANTY ISLIMITED TO REP AIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT THISW ARRANTY DOES NOTCOVERP AYMENT OR PROVIDE FOR THE REIMBURSEMENT OF P AYMENT OFINCIDENT ALORCON SEQUENTIAL DAMAGES It must be clear that the warrantors are not insuring your premis
120. Note that Tab delimited files have the option of having the fields enclosed in quotes Next choose if you would like the alarm type to be described using text Alarm Alarm Low or Alarm High by checking the Alarm Type as Text box or check the Alarm Number as UAF box to receive it as a number 1 2 or 3 corresponding to the UAF alarm definition This selects between showing the Alarm Num ber as a UAF e g A 0 or as a number only e g 0 The log file will be updated each time an alarm is received An example of the alarm log entry as you ve chosen to format is shown in the Sample Log Entry box Audible Alarm The computer receiving the alarm can optionally play an audio message whenever an alarm is received The computer must have a soundcard and speakers to use this feature The audio message can be either the Windows default sound or a customized message which can be re corded by the user using standard Windows audio recording tools The audio file must be in the Windows Wave format Io enable this feature select the Audible tab Next click on either the Windows default sound or Wave File To select your own Wave file click the Select button A default Wave file is included which speaks the message Sensaphone SCADA 3000 Alarm exists You can preview the message by clicking the play arrow The audible programming form is shown below Amme BEE Curent Alarms Alam History Loggng Audible F Edile Aer on Incoming
121. Open 4 In the Select a Processor field click Control ROM 5 Click the begin Upload button After a few seconds the upgrade will begin When its 100 finished click on the Logout button During the Upload process the LCD will display Uploading Control Flash Programming After the upload process the display will change to Reprogramming Control Flash Memory This will take about one minute after which the display will return to its normal scrolling messages Do not disrupt the unit until the reprogramming message has disappeared 6 Go online with the unit again 7 Click on Diagnostics gt Flash Upgrade from the main menu again 8 Click on the Select HEX file button 9 Open the SCADA 3000 firmware folder 10 The two HEX files should appear Click on the Comm HEX file communications and click Open 11 In the Select a Processor field click Communications ROM 12 Click the begin Upload button After a few seconds the upgrade will begin When its 10096 finished click on the Loqout button During the Upload process the LCD will display Uploading Communications Flash Programming After the upload process the display will change to Reprogramming Communications Flash Memory This will take about one minute after which the display will return to its normal scrolling mes sages Do not disrupt the unit until the reprogramming message has disappeared The Flash upgrade is now complete You m
122. SCADA 3000 should look like the following diagram ollo 4 20mA Temp Dry E gps mig ufu a SCADA 3000 CPU L Jumper in M IN yPWR 4 20mA e Position El External 24V Power Supply 4 20 mA D Transducer Figure 10 Wiring a 4 20mA device using an external 24 VDC supply Connect powered 4 20mA devices according to the diagram below Bg ojo ojo a LE ck kee 4 20mA Temp Dry Oo Oyo nip mjo a SCADA 3000 CPU 15V Aux EG Jumperin MNE PISTE E 4 20mA se Ss E EH Position Powered 4 20 mA Device Figure 11 Wiring a 4 20mA Powered Device 5 6 Chapter 6 Output Wiring Chapter 6 OUTPUT WIRING The SCADA 3000 provides eight latching relay outputs that can be used to switch equipment on and off The relays are capable of switching up to 2A at 125VAC and have integral contact protection They may be controlled manually while on line using the SCADA 3000 package or automatically via a ladder program or C program LED indicators are provided to show the ON OFF status of each relay output Output relays are a latching type and will continue to hold their state without power NOTES ON CORRECT USE The Outputs can be used to control a wide variety of AC and DC devices However care must be taken to insure that the SCADA 3000 is not used in such a way that will severely degrade the life expectancy of the outputs or cause the unit to malfunction e g microprocessor res
123. Sensaphone SCADA 3000 User s Manual Version 2 0 Phonetics Inc Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete accu rate and up to date Phonetics Inc assumes no responsibility for the results of errors beyond its control Phonetics Inc also cannot guarantee that changes in equipment made by other manu facturers and referred to in this manual will not affect the applicability of the information in this manual Copyright 1999 by Phonetics Inc Manual Version 2 0 January 2001 Written and produced by Phonetics Inc Please address comments on this publication to Phonetics Inc 901 Tryens Road Aston PA 19014 Sensaphone is a registered trademark of Phonetics Inc All other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Satety Instructions Important Safety Instructions Your SCADA 3000 has been carefully designed to give you years of safe reliable performance As with all electrical equipment however there are a few basic pre cautions you should take to avoid hurting yourself or damaging the unit Read the installation and operating instructions in this manual carefully Be sure to save it for future reference Read and follow all warning and instruction labels on the product itself To protect the SCADA 3000 from overheating make sure all openings on the unit are not blocked Do not place on or near a heat source
124. Sets one or more sides of the object as a positional anchor with respect to the edges of the palette akBottom Anchors the object a fixed distance from the bottom of the palette akLeft Anchors the object a fixed distance from the left side of the palette akRight Anchors the object a fixed distance from the right side of the palette akTop Anchors the object a fixed distance from the top of the palette Constraints Limits the maximum and minimum size of the object MaxHeight Sets the maximum height of the object 0 disables this property MaxWidth Sets the maximum width of the object 0 disables this property MinHeight Sets the minimum height of the object 0 disables this property MinWidth Sets the minimum width of the object 0 disables this property Hint A text message which appears when the cursor rests over an object Show Hint Enables the hint message to display Visible Makes the object visible or invisible New_1 Design F Figure 8 Vessel object displaying set I O properties Right click Tools By right clicking your mouse anywhere on the palette you can bring up a menu containing short cuts for customizing your palette and the objects on it Figure 9 Right click Menu Builder Form Switches the foreground window to the RT Builder Chapter 14 RealTime Screen Design Properties Edit Image graphics Can be used as a shortcut to grabbing BMP files Delete objects Removes the object from the palet
125. This will delete all data points in the Se ected Data Points list box Note Changing data points to be logged will delete all presently stored data Be sure to download the contents of the Data Logger before making any such changes ORDER OF DATA POINTS LOGGED Once you have selected the items to be logged you may want to arrange the data points in a specific order This may be important because the Datalog viewer will arrange the data in the order it was logged so if you want to view certain data points side by side you should log them adjacent to each other To rearrange the Selected Data Points highlight the data point you would like to move or drag the mouse over a group of data points and use the arrows to the right to move them up or down The interior arrows will move the data points up or down one place and the outside arrows will move them to the extreme top or bottom of the list When finished editing the list click the Commit button TIME INTERVAL The time interval determines how often the SCADA 3000 will log data The default setting is 1 minute You may set the time interval to as little as once a second or to several hours between logs It is recommended that you set this parameter as high as your application allows for several reasons 1 Setting the Data Logger to just a few seconds can produce large amounts of data This will quickly start to consume large amounts of space on your hard drive 2 A short time interval will
126. U instruction is evaluated between these transitions When the COUNT value reaches the PRESET the DONE bit is set The ability of the counter to detect false to true transitions depends on the speed frequency of the incoming signal see ladder timing specifications The COUNT value is retained when the rung conditions again become false The COUNT can only be set to zero using the RES RESET instruction that has the same address as the counter The counter overflows at 32767 but will continue counting from 32768 if not reset The counter bits are updated as follows ENABLED Set when rung is true and reset when rung is false Also reset from a RES RESET ladder instruction DONE Set when COUNT is equal to or greater than PRESET Also reset from a RES RESET ladder instruction OVERFLOW Set when the COUNT increments past 32767 The CTU address identifies the register where the COUNT value is stored The counter address can only reference one of the 64 internal counters N 0 through N 63 Right click on the instruction and choose Select Counter A list of the 64 counters will be displayed Select one and click OK Next set the preset by right clicking on the instruction and choosing Set Preset Enter the preset value and click OK You may use the CTU instruction in combination with the CTD function eg One increments the count and the other decrements the count by using the same address In this application the COUNT Value and the PRESET value f
127. UICK START GUIDE This section presents a useful shorthand guide to configuring your SCADA 3000 unit for the first time More detailed information on the processes covered can be found in Chapters 8 9 and 10 of this manual Install the software from your CD ROM or other media Double click on the SCADA 3000 icon on your desktop The Contr ol Center for m will appear Sensaphone Control Center File Real Time Control History Polling Comm Help Comm 1 Comm 2 Comm3 Comm4 Comm 5 Alarm Polling Chestnut Street Plant 6 5 2000 9 07 36 AM Begin Startup version 1 4 1 build 199 6 5 2000 37 AM SCADA Working Directory set to C PROGRAM FILES SCADA 30001 6 5 2000 9 07 46 AM Startup Completed Figure 1 Control Center form The Control Center form is the main menu for accessing all features of the SCADA 3000 Connect the SCADA 3000 COM 1 port to a serial port on your computer to communicate directly or connect the SCADA 3000 to a telephone line to communicate via modem Configuring Communications 1 Choose the Comm pulldown menu 2 Select Setup Comm Port Setup BEES Comm1 Comm2 Comm 3 Comm 4 Comm 5 v Enable Port IV Full Duplex Buffering Type Phone Modem z amp Port Baud Rate 115200 Modbus Protocol Settings Packet Retries 7 Retry Delay 500 Packet Timeout 500 Buffer Size 256 Figure 2 Communications Port Setup form 3 Configure Communications port s SCADA 3000 User s Ma
128. Width Sets the maximum width of the box 0 disables this property MinHeight Sets the minimum height of the box 0 disables this property MinWidth Sets the minimum width of the box 0 disables this property Font Sets the default font T Font Click in the font box then click the small button at the end of the box to select a font Charset Specifies the character set of the font Dependent upon what values of Charset are valid as supplied by the font vendor Color Sets the color of the text Height Sets the height of the font object in pixels If you wish to use a specific point size you should set the size property Pitch fpDefault fpFixed or fpVariable Using fpDefault as the pitch value will cause the default pitch style to be used with the font fpFixed causes each character in the font to have the same width monospacing fpVariable allows different characters within a font to have unique widths Size Sets the point size of a font object If you need to ensure that the font fits within a specified area you can manipulate the Height and Pitch properties Style Sets the default style of the font or text fsBold Sets the default to boldface fsItalic Sets the default to italic fsStrikeout Forces a line through the font fsUnderline Underlines the text as default Height Vertical size in pixels over ridden if you chose a Max Min Height Hint Text shown on mouseover Left X coordinate of left edge of co
129. Width Sets the width of the shape PLACING ELECTRICAL ELEMENTS ON THE PALETTE The ELEC tab holds the dynamic graphical components related to electrical states Electrical Contact Breaker Fuse Motor and State Indicator SCADA 3000 User s Manual SCADA 3000 RT Builder tl E File Edit Forms Help Data Group Graphic DataPoint Elec Rotate Contain Valve Gauge Audvid Dynamic D MI Contact StateInd Breaker Motor Figure 20 Electrical Tab Properties Align To align graphic component to edges of the palette area alBottom Stretches the component across the bottom of the palette alClient Fills the palette with the component Useful for adding a background graphic alLeft Stretches the component along the left edge of the palette alNone No realignment is applied Note this will not correct any other previously applied alignment alRight Stretches the component along the right edge of the palette al Top Stretches the component across the top of the palette Anchors Sets one or more sides of the component as a positional anchor with respect to the edges of the palette akBottom Anchors the component a fixed distance from the bottom of the palette akLeft Anchors the component a fixed distance from the left side of the palette akRigbt Anchors the component a fixed distance from the right side of the palette akTop Anchors the component a fixed distance from the top of the palette BackGn
130. a and 2 reset only the old data When you click the Reset AX button all of the data in the SCADA 3000 will be deleted and the Records Used will return to 0 When you click the Reset O d button only data that has been downloaded previously will be deleted Therefore any data that has not been downloaded yet will remain in the unit The Records Used parameter will reflect the number of records remaining in the unit Clicking the Reset Old button before downloading the Data Logger can be used to reduce the download time If multiple users will be downloading data from the Data Logger care must be taken to delete records ONLY after all users have downloaded or to instruct all users never to delete the Data Logger DOWNLOADING THE DATA LOGGER To get the Data Logger information from the SCADA 3000 to your computer you must down load it This procedure retrieves the data from the SCADA 3000 and stores it in a database on your hard drive To avoid overwriting data in the SCADA 3000 you must always download the data before the number of available records gets to zero To download the Data Logger click on the Download button on the lower left part of the form When all of the data has been down loaded the SCADA 3000 software will update the database and provide some statistical informa tion regarding the download process You may choose to view the data at this time or click OK to return to the datalogging form The Datalog download form follows Data
131. a list of the data points that may be used with OTU instructions Relay outputs Ladder bits Chapter 15 ladder Logic Programming OSR One Shot Rising OSA B 4 8 usn This instruction is used to make an event occur one time It is not associated with a particular input but rather with the instructions preceding it on the rung itself When rung conditions preceding the OSR instruction go from false to true the OSR instruction will be true for one scan After one scan is complete the OSR instruction becomes false even if the rung conditions preceding it remain true The OSR instruction will only become true again if the rung condi tions preceding it transition from false to true again The OSR address identifies the location where the OSR bit is stored The OSR bit is used to remember the previous rung state The bit address you use for this instruction must be unique The instruction executes in 3 5us and requires 44 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may be used with OSR instructions Ladder bits Note You can only use one OSR instruction per rung and you cannot use the OSR instruction in a branch TON Timer On Delay TON T 8 EN DN RN CNT PRE 566 This instruction is used to turn an output ON or OFF after the timer has been on for a preset time interval The specified timer starts at 0 and begins running when the rung status changes from false to true It then keeps running incrementing
132. ack to acknowledge the alarm When the computer answers the call it will prompt you for the alarm ID and then ask for acknowledgement A sample of a call to the computer is shown below SCADA 3000 Alarm exists Enter Alarm ID waits for 4 digit entry Custom ID message Alarm channel 1 Custom alarm message is too high when the alarm occurred it was 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit Enter acknowledgement code 555 acknowledgement code entered Alarm ID 0001 acknowledged goodbye Numeric Pager When dialing out to a destination programmed as Pager the PC Alarm Dialout program leaves the unit ID number usually the computer s phone number and the alarm ID number on the display of a numeric pager A sample is shown below 610 555 1234 0001 To acknowledge the alarm you must call the computer back and enter the alarm ID number and the acknowledgement code See voice sample above Alphanumeric Pager When dialing out to a destination programmed as Alpha the PC Alarm Dialout program leaves a text message up to 80 characters long on the display of an alphanumeric pager A sample is shown below Water Plant 9 610 555 1234 AlarmID 0001 Alarm Message Level TooHigh 425 inches To acknowledge the alarm you must call the computer back and enter the alarm ID number and the acknowledgement code See voice sample above FAX and E mail When sending messag
133. alid Visual Basic program regardless of length you must follow its simple structural elements KEYWORDS These are short words or symbols that define variables or execute specific actions within a Visual Basic program They include operators assignment comparators and comments PREDEFINED VARIABLES These are variables that have specific predefined values that are automatically updated and cannot be changed by the user FUNCTIONS These are word commands that perform a predefined function within a Visual Basic program ARRAYS This is a more advanced programming type that significantly shortens and simplifies long programs ERROR HANDLING When a program is compiled it is scanned for language related errors An error message including the type of error is displayed EDITING TOOL The SCADA 3000 Realtime Editor provides a Distributed Control program editing utility that allows you to write compile and run Distrib uted Control programs This chapter provides basic instruction in the Visual Basic language and gives all the commands that are valid for use with SCADA 3000 Sample programs are included STRUCTURE 23 6 Listed below is information that will help demonstrate the Visual Basic language structure as it is used in the SCADA 3000 Refer to the following pages for explanation of the keywords func tions and commands used within the sample programs All programs must start with the predefined template template vbs Your speci
134. any variables defined limit is 1024 Bracket expected Compiled file too big Reserved word declared as variable C EDITOR The SCADA 3000 Software contains a C programming utility that allows you to write C pro grams upload download them to the SCADA 3000 save load C programs on your computer compile run and start programs in the SCADA 3000 This can be performed while online through the RS232 serial port or remotely via modem To access the C Editor open the Con trol Center form and click on the C button inthe toolbar or choose C from the main menu The following form will appear Chapter 16 C Programming SCADA 3000 C Editor olx File Edit Program Help aj aaa i Ale al 1 2 3 4 5 6 Tj 8 9 0 0 0 Chestnut Street Plan off line YA Figure 1 C Editor form Use this form to write and edit your C programs You do not have to be on line with the SCADA 3000 to write a C program The buttons on the form are from left to right Open Program Save Program Cut Copy Paste Undo Syntax Check Compile Program Upload Program Download Program and Start Stop Program An example of a C Program written in the editor window follows SCADA 3000 C Editor lolx File Edit Program Help sumo Ala el 1 int lag 2 int lead 3 ant state 4 float lead_on 5 float lag_on 6 float all_off int first 8 0 empty 1 lead on 2 lag on 9 main 10 Dr if first
135. are Select register 199 Radio Timeout The RTS hold time default setting is 00 OA which corresponds to 100ms To read the current value of this register click the Force Read button To change the value click the Force Change button enter a new code and click OK A list of valid codes vs hold times appears below Code Time Code Time 00002 Oms 000A 100ms 00 01 10 ms 00 0B 110ms 00 02 20 ms 00 0C 120ms 00 03 30 ms 00 OD 130ms 00 04 2 40 ms 00 OE 140ms 00 05 2 50 ms 00 OF 150ms 00 06 2 60 ms 00 102 160ms 00 07 70 ms 0011 2 170ms 00 08 80 ms 0012 2 180ms 00 09 2 90 ms 00 13 190ms HOST COMPUTER SETUP The radio modem for the host computer connects to an external serial port on the computer The radio modem for the host computer must have a transmit frequency that matches the receive frequency of the SCADA 3000 radio modems Similarly the host computer s radio modem must have a receive frequency that matches the transmit frequency of the SCADA 3000 s radio modems Next you must configure the serial port settings by running the SCADA 3000 software and selecting COMM then Setup from the main menu of the Sensaphone Control Center form The following form will appear Chapter 12 Programming for Radio Applications Comm Port Setup of x Comm 1 Comm2 Comm3 Comm 4 Comm5 v Enable Port IV Full Duplex Buffering Type Phone Modem LS Port Baud Rate 115200 Packet Retries 7 R
136. arm 10 11 0 Alarm 11 412 0 Alarm 12 zi Selected UAFs 55 of 64 Slots Available fs Commit 1 0 0 Motherboard Input O ETA Counters zz 1 0 1 Motherboard Input 1 A20 Alarm 2 Bits 3 1 0 2 Motherboard Input 2 4 4 30 Alarm 3 Ladder Variables 0 0 0 Motherboard Output 0 A40 Alam 4 C Variables D 0 1 Motherboard Output 1 45 0 Alam Gas Flow El 6 0 0 Gas Flow Channel 0 Param 0 46 0 Alarm 6 MES 60 1 Gas Flow Channel 0 Param 1 4 4 7 0 Alarm 7 4 0 0 Alarm 0 48 0 Alarm 8 4 1 0 Alarm 1 49 0 Alarm 9 Figure 1 LCD Programming Form This programming form is used to select the data points which will scroll on the LCD display The box on the left provides a list of all the data points that can be chosen for display The box on the right shows the data points that have been selected to appear on the display In this process you will be choosing items from the list on the left and copying them to the list on the right In the drop down box next to the heading Available UAFs choose the data point category by clicking on the down arrow The choices are Inputs Outputs Timers Counters Bits Ladder Variables C Variables Gas Flow Alarms and Diagnostics When you pick a category a list of all possible points in that category will appear Click on the item you wish to add to the scrolling display and then click on the Add to List button identified by the arrow pointing to the right between the boxes
137. arrying the pager some time to get to a phone to call the unit back Alarm Acknowledgment Alphanumeric Pager Dialout SCADA 3000 will dial out to your alphanumeric pager service and leave a message on the display of your pager See Chapter 10 Programming for dialing to pagers The unit will then hang up without speaking a voice message and wait for callback acknowledgment This waiting period is called the intercall delay time During this time you may call the unit back from a Touch Tone phone to receive a report of the alarm condition and acknowledge the alarm by entering the acknowledgment code NOTE An alarm cannot be acknowledged using a pulse rotary telephone Below is an example of what SCADA 3000 will say when you call it back to acknowledge a typical alarm Hello this is ID number Custom ID message Alarm Channel 1 is too high It is now 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit Hello this is ID number Custom ID message Alarm Channel 1 is too high It is now 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit Hello this is ID number Custom ID message Alarm Channel 1 is too high It is now 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit Enter acknowledgment code SCADA 3000 will now wait 5 seconds for the Touch Tone acknowledgment code to be entered After the last digit of the acknowledgment code has been received SCADA 3000 will respond by saying Alarm Acknowledged The alarm has been acknowledged and the unit w
138. as been exposed to water 3 The unit has been dropped or the enclosure is damaged 4 The unit doesn t function normally when you re following the operating instructions Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak CAUTION To reduce the risk of fire or injury to persons read and follow these instructions 1 Use only the following type and size batteries Sealed lead acid gel cell 12V 5 to 18AH 2 Do not dispose of the batteries in a fire The cell may explode Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions iii SCADA 3000 User s Manual 3 Do not open or mutilate the batteries Released electrolyte is corrosive and may cause damage to the eyes or skin It may be toxic if swallowed 4 Exercise care in handling batteries in order not to short the battery with conducting materials such as rings bracelets and keys The battery or conductor may overheat and cause burns FCC Requirements Part 68 The SCADA 3000 complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the back of the unit there is a label that contains among other information the FCC Registration Number and the Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this equipment You must upon request provide this information to your local telephone company The REN is useful to determine the quanti
139. ast the voice message In this case you must enter the number you wish to be displayed on your pager Example 555 2233 PP 444 8877 POUND or ASTERISK When dialing to a numeric pager a pound sign or an asterisk may be used within the phone number An asterisk typically is displayed as a dash on most pagers Example 16105554591 PP 986 0331 W wait for answer This code instructs SCADA 3000 to wait until the call is answered before continuing The W code takes up one digit and may be used only once The W code is typically used in the middle of a dialout number when calling a numeric pager The SCADA 3000 will wait for the pager company to answer the call before sending the number to be dis played on the pager Example 1 610 555 4593 W 6105582000 pager company phone number W number to display on numeric pager Note that digits following W will always be dialed as touch tones when calling a numeric pager I send alarm number This code instructs SCADA 3000 to send the alarm numbers that have an alarm to a numeric pager The I code takes up one digit and may be used only once Note that this is only required if you must insert additional dialing codes such as pauses to make your pager work otherwise the alarm number will be sent automatically Example 555 2233 PP 4448877 I Chapter 11 Programming for Phone Applications Special Alphanumeric Pager Dialing Codes A alphanumeric pager ID
140. at values of Charset are valid as supplied by the font vendor Pitch Pitch can be set to one of three values fp Default fpFixed or fpVariable Using fpDefault as the pitch value will cause the default pitch style to be used for the font The fpFixed and fpVariable values can be used to set the pitch explicitly A value of fpFixed causes each character in the font to have the same width while a value of fpVariable allows different characters within a font to have unique widths Size Sets the point size of a font object Style Sets the default style of the font or text fsBold Sets the font to be boldfaced fsItalic Sets the font to italic fsStrikeout Forces a line through the characters fsUnderline Underlines the text in that font set Height Sets the height of the object Left Sets the position of the object as measured from the left side of the palette MaxValue Sets the maximum value of the fill MinValue Sets the minimum value of the fill StayOn Top Enables the object to stay on top when it overlaps other objects on the screen Top Sets the position of the object as measured from the top of the palette Value Sets the datapoint value in design mode to view its effect on the object e g fill level on off state Width Sets the width of the object SCADA 3000 User s Manual Advanced Properties Align Stretches the object to align with the top bottom left right or client part of the palette Anchors
141. ated with it Input and Output instructions will only have only one while math functions may have up to three Title and comment text fields are generated automatically when you place an instruction The title field is yellow the comment field is green Double click on the title or comment field to edit or insert text To select a data point or to edit an address right click on the instruction A list of parameters will appear Click on the parameter you wish to edit A typical instruction sequence with UAF addresses and labels is shown below Ladder Program O x Figure 5 Adding Data Points amp Titles To add Rung Title and Comment fields place the mouse at the intersection of the rung and ladder on the lefthand side Right click the mouse button and choose Rung Title or Rung Com ment Enter the text Press Enter Note Do not click Delete to remove a title or comment Delete removes the entire Rung Changing Instructions Instructions of the same type may be changed without re entering addresses For example XIC can be replaced by XIO CTU can be replaced by CTD ADD can be replaced by SUB and so on Chapter 15 ladder Logic Programming To perform an instruction change click on a new Instruction button from the Toolbar Then right click on the instruction you wish to change and select Change from the menu that pops up Cut Copy Paste The Ladder Editor supports Cut Copy amp Paste operations for all ladd
142. atus phonetics ipa Settings for Bottom Logo Default sensaphone jpg gt http www sensaphone com Custom C PROGRAM FILES SCADA 3000 WebStatus sensaphone ipa Create Now J OK Figure 5 Web Status Brmatting tab Browser Refresh If you select Never page must be reloaded manually the data on the Web Status page will not change automatically but only when you manually reload it If you select Web Browser will automatically refresh the page every X minutes the browser will update the web page at the interval in minutes that you specify Note that this is indepen dent of the actual polling interval over which new SCADA 3000 data is being collected If the Scada 3000 hasn t been polled then the web page isn t going to change and as a result the refresh will simply reload the old page It is recommended that you set the web page refresh to a time interval that matches the polling interval Settings for Top Left Corner Logo Default phonetics jpg will place the Phonetics logo in the top lefthand corner of the page Select Custom and click on the Customize button if you want to select a logo of your choice The file must be in one of the following formats JPEG GIF or PNG Type an http address in the Links to box if you want the logo to perform as a live link on the status page Settings for Bottom Logo Similarly the default for the bottom logo i
143. ay go back on line and restore your programming Appendix G Software Internet Upgrade Appendix G SOFTWARE INTERNET UPGRADE The Internet Upgrade program allows you to retrieve SCADA 3000 Software and Flash Firm ware updates via the internet The program will check to see what software versions you have and then check our website and list the files that need to be updated Follow the instructions below to configure the program and update your files Note You must have internet access to use this program You should connect to the internet before running the upgrade STARTING THE PROGRAM Click on the Internet Upgrade program Icon from the desktop or select it from the Windows Start menu The program will display all pertinent SCADA files as shown below LI Sensaphone Software Internet Upgrade x QE Very E Retrieve Install Last Check 7 2 1999 4 45 41 PM Event Log Viewer exe 0 0 0 12 A Newer Version is Available Data Log Viewer datalogger exe 0 1 0 50 A Newer Version is Available Ladder Assembler 1 ladasm1 exe File is up to date Ladder Assembler 2 ladasm2 exe File is up to date SCADA Library File scadalib dll 1 0 A Newer Version is Available Real Time Viewer E ditor teallime exe 01 File is up to date SCADA 3000 Help File docs s3k hip m SCADA 3000 Help Contents docs s3k cnt Ladder Help File docsMadder hlp Ladder Help Contents docsMadder cnt C Program Help File docs c_program hip C Program Hel
144. barriers may be required when connecting this unit to any equipment in a hazardous location ORIFICE PLATE When measuring gas flow with an orifice plate there are three signals which must be input to the SCADA 3000 STATIC PRESSURE upstream Usually from a 4 20mA transducer PSIA Gas FLOWING TEMPERATURE Usually from a 10K thermistor degrees F DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE Usually a 4 20mA signal from the orifice meter inches of water These signals can be connected to any input on the SCADA 3000 In addition they can be any type of analog signal that is compatible with the inputs of the SCADA 3000 POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT When measuring gas flow using positive displacement there are three signals which must be input to the SCADA 3000 STATIC PRESSURE upstream Usually from a 4 20mA transducer PSIA Gas FLOWING TEMPERATURE Usually from a 10K thermistor degrees F DISPLACED VOLUME This signal must be the pulse output from a positive displace ment meter or turbine meter It must provide a dry contact signal to a SCADA 3000 Pulse Count Module The static pressure and gas temperature signals can be connected to any input on the SCADA 3000 In addition they can be any type of analog signal that is compatible with the inputs of the SCADA 3000 The displaced volume pulse output must be connected to a SCADA 3000 Pulse Count Module FGD 3020 SCADA 3000 User s Manual To program the SCADA 3000 for gas flow click on the gas
145. block straight out See Figure 1 Locking Clips Figure 1 Removing terminal blocks INPUT CONFIGURATION Correct Jumper Positioning It is extremely important that you position the jumpers correctly on the SCADA 3000 The input jumpers are located directly behind the Input terminal strip There is one jumper for each input 16 total Note that each jumper connects four pins If you look closely at the jumpers you will note that each one reveals two thin metal strips When the jumper is fit into place the strips contact the header pins corresponding to the input you are setting The strips must be positioned vertically not horizontally for your inputs to work See illustration below Please be particularly careful when positioning the jumpers Jumper Detail OO OO 0 0 oo OO oa Jumper Jumper Correctly Incorrectly Applied Applied Figure 2 Correct Jumper positioning Normally Open Normally Closed Dry Contacts Dry contact sources consist of relays or switches that are isolated and have no external voltage applied These devices can be connected directly to the input terminals without regard for polarity Note that Solid State outputs may be polarity sensitive If using Solid State outputs observe the polarity markings next to the terminal strip on the SCADA 3000 Choose an input and connect the wires to the corresponding screw terminals for that input The configuration jumper should be set to the TMP DRY position The follow
146. cause the Data Logger to fill up faster thus requiring frequent downloads 3 A full Data Logger will take longer to download 4 As you begin to acquire more and more data in the datalogger database the software will start to take longer to perform a query DATA LOGGER START TIME You may program the Data Logger to start at a specific time to keep the data on a fixed time schedule For example if you want to log data every minute you could enter a start time of 12 00 00PM and all of the time stamps would occur on the exact minute starting at 12 00 00PM To have the Data Logger start at a specific time enter the time in the Next Log box Note that 11 25 SCADA 3000 User s Manual for the start time in the Next Log box to work correctly the time must be ahead of what the system time indicates For this reason the system time is provided just above the Next Log programming box After you have set the time in the Next Log box click the Enable Data Logger box As soon as the System Time matches the Next Log time the data Logger will start If you do not enter a time in the Next Log box you may simply click the Enable Data Logger box This will start the Data Logger immediately STOPPING THE DATA LOGGER To stop the Data Logger click the Enable Data Logger button to remove the check mark This will stop the Data Logger from writing any new data RESETTING THE DATA LOGGER The Data Logger has two reset options 1 reset all of the dat
147. ce or repairs please contact Phonetics Inc 901 Tryens Road Aston PA 19014 610 558 2700 Fax 610 558 0222 The telephone company may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the net work until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning Part 15 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are de signed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interfer ence in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Satety Instructions Telephone Consumer Protection Act The FCC Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send a message unless such message contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the teleph
148. change this number By changing the e mail telephone number to your own modem your computer becomes the e mail server When your SCADA 3000 needs to send a report or alarm message to an e mail address the unit will dial your computer and send the message Your computer will then log on to the internet and forward the e mail message to the designated party PROGRAMMING To set up your computer as an e mail server click File then Options from the SCADA 3000 Control Center Menu The following screen will appear SCADA 3000 Users Manual Options E3 Main Web Status Debug Messages Debug Level o Maintain Log File M Call Handling Enable PC Alarm Dialout Act as Unit Email Server V M Internet Settings Access Type Dialup Networking Phone Book Enty Phone Book Entry MyISP Dialup On Comm s y SMTP Server mail mpisp com User ID iohnsmith Email Address ohnsmihemysdeom User Inactivity Timer Use Inactivity Timeout J Timeout E minutes X Cancel Figure 1 Control Center Options Main Tab In the Call Handling section check the box labeled Act as Unit Email Server Under Internet Settings select the type of internet access for your computer either Dialup Networking or Always On If you chose Dialup Networking then select a Phone Book Entry by clicking the Down arrow Next select the Comm port that your modem uses to
149. cifications Appendix B SCADA 3000 SPECIFICATIONS ja nN Normally Open Normally Closed Dry Contact Run Time 0 5V Analog Voltage 4 20mA Current Loop 10K Thermistor nput Voltage Range Vine to Vin OK Thermistor Temperature Range 100 to 300 F 65 to 150 C nput Resolution ybical A D Converter error Redundant fast acting low leakage over under voltage diode clamps 5V through 10KQ 20mA load resistance 237 Ohms 1 1 4 Watt BV input impedance BIE 3 3 E 3 JE JE 2E E 3 c c cg 7 EIE E Z amp l 8 33 jo n elg e gt a e lt lt gim g i z 2 elo 5 o als To zio c 3 Sigo c oz B ss 73 Eis 3 e lt ga a eje AE S 32 5 FIE lt lt gt Y n 3 5 RS S F e o ale 6 s s 3 lt lt 7 E E ge O 2A 125VAC 2A 30VDC 1 12 i IA 125VAC 1A 30VDC 125VAC 125VDC i 250VA 60W i 125VA 30W y RSS EC NIC nput Output Expansion us Termination Impedance Baud Rate Bps LED Indicators Alarm Fault Control Monitoring Battery Phone amp Outputs 0 7 Options Voice Module part FGD 3500 33 6K Modem part FGD 3400 ELLO resistive inductive pil Baud Rate Bps SCADA 3000 User s Manual Power Supply Requirements Input Voltage without battery 10 15VDC Input Voltage with battery 14 7 15VDC Current consumption 215mA min 270mA w backlight on add 8mA w voice option add 85mA w modem option add 38mA per 4 20mA loop powered from 24V supply
150. cing while a value of fp Variable allows different characters within a font to have unique widths Size Sets the point size of a font object If you need to ensure that the font fits within a specified area you can manipulate the Height and Pitch properties Style Sets the default style of the font or text fsBold Sets the default to boldface fsltalic Sets the default to italic fsStrikeout Forces a line through the font fsUnderline Underlines the text as default Height Vertical size in pixels overridden if you chose a Max Min Height Hint Type in the text that will appear upon mouseover Left Sets the position of the component as measured from the left side of the palette Off Color Color of the component in the off state Default color is Red On Color Color of the component in the on state Default color is Green Show Hint Enables the hint message to display on mouseover State Checkbox This is the On Off Enabled Disabled Datapoint state Status Off Message showing if status is off Default is Open Status On Message showing if the status is on Default is Closed Status Text Checkbox Check if you want the status text to display Stay On Top Checkbox Check if you want the component to float above any other graphics Title Description of the component Visible Checkbox Check to make component visible Width Horizontal size in pixels overridden by Max Min Width values if any PLACING
151. ck the wml box if you would like web pages created in wml format in addition to the HTML format The wml format is specifically for use with internet capable cell phones Username and Password are those needed to access and make changes via FTP to your site In addition to FTP programming the screen also allows you to set default logos for your web page The default settings shown above provide a Phonetics logo graphic at the top of the page and a Sensaphone banner graphic at the bottom The bottom graphic will link to www sensaphone com A Logo or picture file JPEG GIE PNG of your choice can be selected to appear at the top and bottom of your web page rather than the default graphics You can also set up the logos to link to web pages of your choice The settings here will operate as the global default settings for all of your SCADA 3000 units The chosen host and directory are where all web status reports will appear The file name of the web page will be based on the SCADA 3000 unit name such as O_ChestnutStreetPlant htm1 however this can be customized to your preference Note that the default settings can be over ridden on a per unit basis making it possible to upload web pages for individual units to differ ent web servers See Web Status Options 20 3 SCADA 3000 Users Manual 20 4 SELECTING DATA POINTS FOR WEB STATUS POLLING Go online with the SCADA 3000 unit that you want to configure for web status polling On
152. commend using one of the 15VDC power supplies listed below FGD 3100 SCADA 3000 60W 15V 4A Hard wired power supply FGD 3110 SCADA 3000 50W 15V 3 3A Plug in power supply with cord Both supplies will accept inputs from 90 264 VAC 47 63Hz The FGD 3100 has terminals for hardwiring AC power The FGD 3110 requires a power cord with an IEC connector on the end included The SCADA 3000 Main unit includes an Aux Power output specifically for powering SCADA 3000 expansion modules The Aux Power terminal is backed up by the external battery 90 264VAC 47 63 Hz Expansion Module Expansion Module Power supply FGD 3100 a a 15V GNDWIC NC NC Earth Ground a O e sme BIN AD e e RS232 DTE COM 1 YU O 2 S 2000 COM 2 00000 poss 00000 0000 0000 4A Figure 1 Wiring from Power Supply to SCADA 3000 SCADA 3000 User s Manual GROUNDING AND POWER SURGE PROTECTION SCADA 3000 should be earth grounded by connecting a true earth ground to the terminal labeled EG This is essential to protect SCADA 3000 from possible damage due to static elec tricity power surges and lightning strikes The Sensaphone SCADA 3000 can be damaged by power surges and lightning through the telephone line and the power supply Although SCADA 3000 has built in surge protection consideration should be given to provide additional protection for the unit and for any electronic equ
153. component Chapter 14 Real Time Screen Design Visible Checkbox Check to make component visible Width Horizontal size in pixels overridden by Max Min Width values if any PLACING GAUGES ON THE PALETTE The Gauges tab features several bar gauges an angular gauge and a strip chart The gauges can be assigned to DataPoints or analog I O values or variables The Strip Chart can display mul tiple datapoints on the same chart Note that the gauges and strip chart only display during Run mode Click on the Gauge Tab 5 SCADA 3000 RT Builder olx File Edit Forms Help Data Group Graphic DataPoint Elec Rotate Contain Valve Gauge Audvid Dynamic Strip Gauge LGauge Pro a d Eaval Figure 24 Gauge Tab You have five gauge options The AGauge places a dial gauge on the palette The LGauge places a rectangular gauge that can be oriented either horizontally or vertically The ProgressBar places a bar graph on the palette that can be used to show fills and is designed to be linked to I Os and stretched and resized to fit over other graphics such as containers and bitmaps The Strip places a strip chart on the palette allowing you to run a comparative chart of up to 8 I O points GaugeLevel can be placed over or beside any other bitmap image tanks wells and linked to an I O to indicate changes in levels New_1 Run PEER Figure 25 AGauge example Setting Up Gauges To use any of the gauges s
154. count and click the Edit button Type in the User Name select the Access Level by clicking the down arrow and choosing one of the options from the list Then enter a password in the New Password and the Re Type boxes Click OK Deleting User Accounts User accounts can only be deleted by an Administrator To delete user accounts log into the SCADA 3000 and click on the System button from the toolbar or select Programming and then System from the main menu Click on the User Accounts button Select the user account to be deleted and click on the Delete button The software will ask if you are sure you want to delete the account Click Yes to delete the account Click OK Changing Passwords A user s password may be changed with any level of security access once he or she has been logged into the unit To change your password click on the System button from the toolbar on Chapter 9 Communicating with SCADA 3000 the main unit programming form or select Programming gt System from the main menu Click on the Change Password button The password change form will appear as shown below Note that a user with an Administrator account may change the password for any user by selecting User Accounts from the system form and editing the user account information This can be useful when personnel forget their password Change Password Figure 11 Change Password form Radio Vs Phone Communication The SCADA 3000 software offers you the most f
155. ction Toolbars There are five tabbed categories which contain the toolbars for all of the ladder instructions The Tabs are Rung Input Output Timer Counter Compare and Math See Figure 2 To place an instruction on a rung choose the Tab containing it then click the appropriate button and hold it as you drag it to the position where you want to place it on a rung The yellow box will turn green indicating that you can drop the instruction release the mouse button Continue building your program by adding more rungs and inserting instructions as required Branching Branches allow you to create parallel instructions You may have more than one branch per rung and even have multiple parallel branches To place a branch choose the Rung tab click and hold the BRA button and drag it to the rung where you want the branch placed Drop the branch and move or insert the instructions within the branch as required The yellow boxes will indicate where instructions or branches may be inserted See the figure below Step 1 Add the branch to the rung Ladder Program Al E XIC DTE Address Address Figure 3 Adding a Branch Step 2 Insert instructions on the branch SCADA 3000 User s Manual 15 20 Ladder Program A x XIC DTE Address Address xIC Address END Figure 4 Adding Instructions Entering Data Points Titles and Comments Every instruction will have one or more Data Point addresses associ
156. ctions defined Read Write Reset Power and Write Record These functions allow you to retrieve assign certain values and incorporate them into your C program Most parameters within the SCADA 3000 are accessible via the UAF Universal Address Format The Read and Write functions always include an associated UAF A function can be a statement by itself or it can be used to retrieve a value and return it SCADA 3000 User s Manual READ FUNCTION Used to read a value from the SCADA 3000 as described by its UAF Summary float read uaf t g e int t UAF source type input output timer counter bit ladder variable gas flow alarm diagnostic int g UAF group number 0 1023 int e UAF element number 0 255 Description The read uaf function returns the value of any UAF register that is specified by the three parameters The value of the specified UAF will always be returned by this function as a float even if the real UAF register is an integer or bit Note that there is no run time error checking on this function If a user requests an invalid register location the function will not generate an error but will just return an invalid result RETURN VALUE The read uaf function returns the value of the specified UAF register Example float tank high main if read_uaf input 0 0 gt 100 0 If input 0 on main board is greater than 100 tank high 1 then set the tank high variable equal to one WRITE FUNCTION
157. ctuate but must remain within a specified range If your signal is a digital value open closed 1 or 0 then choose the alarm type that reflects the normal condition of your source For example if your source is a contact closure on an input and it is normally closed opens upon alarm then choose Normally Closed Bit 1 Normally Open triggers an alarm if the circuit closes Normally Closed triggers an alarm if the circuit opens Low High Limits If your source is analog you must program low and high limits to determine when an alarm condition exists Low default is 0 0 high is 100 0 Chapter 11 Programming for Phone Applications Recognition Time This is the time required for an out of tolerance condition to qualify as an alarm event The input must remain in that required state according to chosen type continu ously for this entire period of time in order to become an alarm The default is 3 seconds The programmable range is from 0 minutes and 0 seconds to 1000 minutes and 40 seconds Reset Time This is the time allowed for an acknowledged alarm s fault condition to be cor rected before the unit resets reactivates the alarm and begins the dialout process all over again Default of 0 hours and 0 minutes means that the alarm reset feature is disabled The program mable range is from 0 hours and 0 minutes to 1000 hours and 40 minutes Example The alarm reset time is set to 3 hours At 1 a m an alarm occurs on input 7 The unit call
158. d Alarm detected after reset time expired Alarm number Voice report given Dialing report destination Destination number Alarm cleared Alarm number No dial tone Alarm low detected Alarm number Alarm high detected Alarm number Invalid hardware configuration for dial out Fault condition exists Fault type Control Switch Enabled Control Switch Disabled Monitor Switch Enabled Monitor Switch Disabled Anonymous Login Appendix D Thermistor Curve Data Appendix D 10k THERMISTOR CURVE DATA oon BP BIE e na ele mjin ww wle e amp ula o y o SCADA 3000 User s Manual D 2 Appendix E Communication Ports Appendix E COMMUNICATIONS PORTS RS232 COM PORTS SCADA 3000 has two RS232 ports one configured as DCE 9 pin female COM 1 and the other as D TE 9 pin male COM 2 COM 1 is designed to connect directly to a personal com puter for local communications programming COM 2 is used to communicate with SCADA 3000 via a radio modem optional The radio modem would connect to COM 2 directly with the appropriate cable The baud rate and communication type radio or standard for each port is selectable via jumpers located under the top cover see Figures below The default Baud rates and communication types are listed below COM 1 Default Setting 38 400 bps Standard COM 2 Default Setting 38 400 bps Standard BAUD RATE JUMPER SETTINGS bps 1 2 3 1200 off off off 57 600 off on on COM 1 only
159. d graphic alLeft Stretches the component along the left edge of the palette alNone No realignment is applied Note this will not correct any other previously applied alignment alRight Stretches the component along the right edge of the palette al Top Stretches the component across the top of the palette Alignment taCenter taLeftfustify taRigbtTustify Aligns the text in the dynamic area Autosize Checkbox Caption Type in any custom caption to go with the dynamic element Color Color of the component Datapoint Assigns the container to an I O point within a SCADA unit Datapoint Enter the datapoint UAF or click in the Datapoint box above and then click the button at the end of the box to display the Datapoint selection form SCADA Select the SCADA unit from which the datapoint information is coming DynComponent DynLabel Component to which Datapoint is mapped DynInputComponent DynAlert DynComp1 DynAlert1 DynInputProperty DynAlert default none PropName Type a name to identify the input property Prop Type dpFloat dpInteger dpString PropValue default 0 DynOutputComponent DynAlert DynComp1 DynAlertl DynOutputProperty DynAlert default none PropName type a name to identify the output property Prop Type dpFloat dpInteger dpString PropValue default 0 Font Sets the default font for labels and text Click in the font box then click the small button at the end of the box to se
160. d 10 38 Numbers of this size can be represented using exponential notation In exponential notation the significant digits of a number are raised to a power of ten The basic form comprises a signed series of digits includ ing a decimal point followed by the letter E and then by a signed exponent to indicate the power of ten being used Chapter 16 C Programming Examples 1 987 1 987E3 120 000 000 1 2E8 000000314 3 14E 7 0 00000000005 5 0E 11 IF Used to make decisions Example main if read_uaf input 0 0 gt 100 write uaf output 0 0 0n ELSE Used with IF to execute a statement when the IF condition is false Example main if read_uaf input 0 0 gt 100 write uaf output 0 0 0n else write uaf output 0 0 0ff FOR Used to execute a statement or statements multiple times Contains a start condition a stop condition and a control statement The following example starts a counter at one checks that it is less than nine and executes the output statement Then it adds one to the counter and checks that it is still less than nine When the counter equals nine the FOR loop is finished The output statement in this program turns outputs 0 through 8 off on the main board float count main for count 0 count 9 count count 1 write uaf output 0 count off DO Used to execute a list of statements while a condition is true The statements are always executed a
161. d member for example a stud of the support structure Mount SCADA 3000 in an upright position so that you can easily read the display and connect wires to the terminal strips There must be a power outlet and if you are using telephone communications a telephone jack nearby The dimensions of the full enclosure are 12 2 x 9 4 x 2 0 See Figure 1 on the following page SCADA 3000 User s Manual 0 625 1 375 Pa poo O 11 62 11 12 12 2 0 37514 1 75 gt Figure 1 Mounting Dimensions 32 Chapter 3 Hardware Installation MOUNTING THE SCADA 3000 POWER SUPPLY FGD 3100 The Power Supply for the SCADA 3000 may be mounted either flat or sideways utilizing the mounting holes provided Mounting hardware for the power supply 6 32 screws nuts and washers has been included in the nuts and bolts hardware package See the Figure below for dimensions B 6 32 UNC 2B i Thread Overall Size 6 00 x 3 27 x 1 60 i Universal Weight 1 21 Ibs i Mounting M4 x 0 7 6H i Insert Thread i 0 17 DIA i THRU Figure 2 Power Supply Mounting Dimensions side and front mount MOUNTING THE BACKUP BATTERY You may use either a 5 2 AH battery FGD 3200 or 18 0 AH battery FGD 3210 with the SCADA 3000 Whe
162. d programming language that is similar to other structured languages like Pascal The structure of C is like asking a question or posing a problem and then going through the simple steps of information gathering and action to solve the problem For example if your alarm clock is ringing and you want it to stop ringing you must hit the OFF button to turn it off otherwise nothing will happen If you want the SCADA 3000 to turn off the alarm clock you must first tell it how to recognize that it is ringing then give it the command to turn it off when it recognizes that it is ringing otherwise do nothing To give SCADA 3000 this information you must translate English commands into C com mands SCADA 30005 built in compiler then translates the C commands into SCADA 3000 s language The C language structure is fairly simple Each program must have a beginning and an end Each individual statement within the program must open provide its information and then close Think of it as writing sentences without the proper sentence structure and punctuation you will get syntax errors The reader SCADA 3000 will not be able to receive the message or understand what to do The SCADA 3000 C interpreter comprises the following elements STRUCTURE To write a valid C program regardless of length you must follow its simple structural elements KEYWORDS These are short words or symbols that define variables or execute specific actions within a C progra
163. d to as user assign able messages Messages to be used for alarm purposes should be programmed under the Alarms form Messages used for status purposes only should be programmed under the Voice Setup form Note User recorded messages can serve both as Status and Alarm messages For example if you recorded the words Gas Flow Pipeline number one as a message this would work to identify that input both for status and alarm situations Depending upon your needs the SCADA 3000 Voice option allows you to split the recordable memory into either 32 or 64 messages In 32 message mode you have14 seconds to program an Identification ID message and 7 seconds for each user assignable message In 64 message mode you get 7 seconds to program an Identification ID message and 3 7 seconds for each user assignable message Voice messages may be recorded remotely by calling in to the SCADA 3000 with a telephone or directly by plugging a telephone into the VOICE PORT jack on the bottom of the unit RECORDING AND PROGRAMMING MESSAGES You can begin recording status and alarm messages at any time However we recommend that you first fill out a list of messages print that list and then use it as a reference guide for record ing In this way you won t have to grapple with playing through a list of 64 messages later in order to find which one represents a particular Data Point From the Programming menu select Voice The Voice Setup form will appear
164. d uaf input 0 0 gt 100 0 if input 0 is greater than 100 if minutes last minute is it a new minute write rec then write a datalog record last minuteszminutes reset minute check End of program ARRAYS Arrays allow you to store a lot of related information in a convenient organized fashion An array lets you use one line of programming to create a series of variables These variables share the same basic name and are distinguished from one another by a numerical tag Example float count 10 This means that an array named count has 10 members or elements with each element having its own value starting with 0 and ending with 9 The first element is count 0 the second element is count 1 and so on up to count 9 The type float means that the actual numerical value of each element is a float Example count 2 2 45 count 4 55000 count 9 200000 SAMPLE PROGRAM This program calculates a one hour average temperature The array named numbers sets up a series of variables from 0 to 60 to hold a value for input 0 for each minute in an hour The 60 values are totaled then averaged The average can then viewed from the C amp Ladder Variables form stored in the datalogger or displayed on the Real time screen By using an array the program becomes substantially more concise The program is first listed then a section by section explanation on how the program w
165. dMode bmOpaque or bm Transparent Color Background color visible only if you choose bmOpaque above Constraints Limits the maximum and minimum size of the element on the palette MaxHeight Sets the maximum height 0 disables this property MaxWidth Sets the maximum width 0 disables this property MinHeight Sets the minimum height 0 disables this property MinWidtb Sets the minimum width 0 disables this property Datapoint Assigns the component to an I O point within a SCADA unit Datapoint Enter the datapoint UAF or click in the Datapoint box above and then click the button at the end of the box to display the Datapoint selection form SCADA Select the SCADA unit from which the datapoint information is coming Font Sets the default font for labels and text Click in the font box then click the small button at the end of the box to select a font Charset Specifies the character set of the font Color Sets the color of the text Height Sets the height of the font object in pixels If you wish to use a specific point size you should set the size property Pitch Can be set to one of three values fp Default fpFixed or fb Variable Using Chapter 14 RealTime Screen Design fpDefault as the pitch value will cause the default pitch style to be used with the font The fpFixed and fpVariable values can be used to explicitly set the pitch a value of fpFixed causes each character in the font to have the same width monospa
166. dauanssnedsesatevewsdavessaucaeatve 5 Chapter 5 INPUT WIRING amp CONFIGURATION csccsscssscssssesssesssesnees 5 1 General Wiring Considerations ut a5 pik ht Ua atota pet EN OE A ec REEE E TERMINAL BOE sata ii idol 1 INPUT COMPIGURAT COIN ais asa errada 2 Correct Jumper Positioning A E TS I 2 Normally Open Normally Closed DI CONE sete ree bete e pa c eie A ro teg edet 2 LOK Deusto a ta dtt a to ttes iua A tuti cC lr AN 3 Analog Voltage Output Transducers JO VOC Sata etr m c ba s bei n de ebd tad 4 ADO ACUI loop TEORISOUCBTS cn uide rs oet a hte noh net te en Chapter 6 OUTPUT WIRING ccsscssssssssssscssscssscssecssccesscssscssecssnssonees 6 1 NOTESON CORRECT USE Seccatid e deo ue Ni aed eld EE Pee oet Chapter 7 I O EXPANSION MODULES s ccsscssscsssssssssssssssscsssceseceanees 7 1 ADDING EXPANSION MODULES seien AE 1 Cabling I NCE Pec NOD ES c Power SUPP A Pd RETO eT ee Se Oe ee Re PUT etme RAND HE 2 COMMUNICATIONS BUS WIRING 551r dion fria ads 2 Bus Terimitidllolt arh a Vete en Ray e gcc den oder e e d D n e ener RO QUE 3 Module Tygesaiis dete tort RU BPCO NO NO a b Goat eile s V pibe uut M obici ccepit 4 y e MN TTE 4 OE NOR Se E EE EE Taek RERO RATER RUPES URP Rr UU HON TOP AHORRO tage 4 Chapter 8 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION amp SETUP e ceeeeee eere 8 1 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS soo taepecs das edo tra tab E DI ed dd is
167. de teas secessu cts E D Ape S id TS E EN 21 Compiling Verifying and Uploading ic t ade 21 Running and Stopping Ladder Execution s ot ter e eti e Phi ebbe uitia oio e e eate teda 22 Ladder Prodraifioislisl Senden otia feet tete aos de tC N tte Pie 23 Ladder Run A oen au tata fce au at t Cen uber RC erc I T die 23 Printing eoan ea UM 23 VIEWING AND FORCING LADDER VARIABLES COUNTERS TIMERS 8 BITS 23 Ladder Variables csi iaa 24 Remote Variable Programming via Touch Tone telephone 24 Ladder Timers eir AS 24 ladder Counters iss a tire S ie pda ORA adn 25 ladder A eiat et icin i Bata oed inlets tn opas sts s MIN RO 25 Ladder Program PELO mde a aset ster eso uuu ee i ecd are M DEM 26 POI Me rite A OR BOR ANS aS a Anti er Nt hah ARs E IR RET 26 LADDER PROGRAM EXAMPLES 5 22 eine ht Sa Fh eate toa A 27 xiii SCADA 3000 User s Manual Chapter 16 PROGRAMMING IN C cessere eren eere eene n eene etn etna 16 1 SPeciticahi ons Sonet ER O fu MARO cA enit eme iets es ufi 1 ABOUT THE C LANGUAGE eoa e ws cael ced eaten de rh nr oc b sin Nutt Livia ds SUCRE 205 itid Dentes aia 2 KEW ORD S es oe Re nn E ee ROR dado ef d d inte 4 IB Io EET 4 PREDEFINED VARIABLE Satanas bu axe oue apri deris pats vun deti Ed tui puo 6 MONTH DAY YEAR HOURS MINUTES amp SECONDS seras iv tbe teensy 7 FUNCTION UBRARY ducite ino ERU Tende fossae acto ci ds 7 ARRAYS MR THEE yan 10 SAMPLE PROGRAM sto 10 ERROR HANDING iria o ao
168. default 0 Title Description of the component Top Sets the position of the component as measured from the top of the palette Transparent Checkbox Check if you want the linked file to be transparent Visible Checkbox Check to make the element visible Width Width of the Dynamic Component Word Wrap Label Checkbox Check to have text wrap automatically in the label space REAL TIME OUTPUT CONTROL Outputs can be controlled from the real time screen by placing components on the palette and assigning them to Output datapoints To control the Output right click on the component and the Force Datapoint form will appear This form allows you to force an output on or off and also to unforce an output The Force Datapoint form is shown below 2 Force Datapoint mi xi UAF 0 0 0 Pump 3 Curent 00 Nov INN Figure 28 Force Datapoint form The Force Datapoint form shows the datapoint UAF the label associated with that UAF and the present value To turn a digital output ON type 1 in the New value field and click the Force button To turn a digital output OFF type 0 in the New value field and click the Force button To unforce an output click the Unforce button Click Cancel to exit the form without making any changes Only components which allow a datapoint to be assigned can be used to control an output SCADA 3000 User s Manual SAVING THE REAL TIME SCREEN To save the Real time screen select Fil
169. deliver a text message to an alphanumeric pager Modem This instructs SCADA 3000 to call a modem attached to a computer running SCADA 3000 software in Alarm Receive mode INTERCALL DELAY The intercall delay is the amount of time SCADA 3000 will wait after completing a call before calling the next destination Typically you would want this to be a very short amount of time however if a destination is a pager you may want to set this to 5 10 minutes to allow time to call back after receiving the page SEND REPORT SCADA 3000 can be programmed to automatically send reports to selected destinations Check this box to include this destination when sending reports Note Reports may only be sent to Fax or E mail destinations See Reports later in this chapter SCADA 3000 User s Manual VOICE PROGRAMMING The SCADA 3000 voice option provides the ability to record customized status and alarm messages for playback during status reports and alarm calls to voice phone numbers The option includes a 90 second pre recorded vocabulary referred to as canned messages and a 270 second user recordable memory Voice messages can be used to identify alarm conditions report input output values report the results of calculations stored as a variables or report any parameter accessible through the UAF format Inputs Outputs Timers Counters Bits Ladder Variables C Variables Gas Flow and Diagnostics Such custom messages are referre
170. dialing out to a phone number programmed as E mail SCADA 3000 DOES NOT speak a voice message It is expecting the call to be answered by the Phonetics E mail server system Once a connection is established the SCADA 3000 E mails the alarm message then hangs up ALARM ACKNOWLEDGMENT Alarm Acknowledgment Voice Dialout Repeated below is the same example of what SCADA 3000 might say during a typical voice dialout Hello this is ID number Custom ID message SCADA 3000 User s Manual Alarm Channel 1 is too high It is now 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit Hello this is ID number Custom ID message Alarm Channel 1 is too high It is now 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit Hello this is ID number Custom ID message Alarm Channel 1 is too high It is now 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit Enter acknowledgment code SCADA 3000 will now wait 5 seconds for the Touch Tone acknowledgment code to be entered After the last digit of the acknowledgment code has been received SCADA 3000 will respond by saying Alarm Acknowledged by last number dialed The alarm has been acknowledged and the unit will hang up Once the alarm has been acknowledged the dialout process stops If the Touch Tone acknowledgment code is not received the SCADA 3000 will offer you a second chance to enter it responding with beep error Enter acknowledgment code If the acknowledgement code is still not received then th
171. dio modem A null modem adapter is not required Set the serial port baud rate and flow control jumper as de scribed in Appendix D These must be set to match your radio modem The COM2 serial port may be configured with flow control enabled or disabled Flow control is enabled when the SCADA 3000 User s Manual COM port configuration jumper is set to the Radio position In our experience most radio modems do not require flow control as a result the COM2 configuration jumper may be left in the STD standard position When flow control is not used the radio modem will simply continue to send data until a short period of silence occurs Note Be sure to set each units modbus ID to a unique number BEFORE powering up all of the units on your network FLOW CONTROL COM port flow control is enabled in the SCADA 3000 when the configuration jumper See Appendix D is installed in the Radio position When flow control is enabled the unit will wait until Carry Detect is raised before receiving data The unit will not transmit data until the Carry Detect has been dropped When the unit wishes to transmit data it will raise the RTS request to send line and wait for the CTS clear to send line to respond Once this occurs the unit will send its data and then drop the RTS line The RTS hold time hold after data sent may be adjusted by using the SCADA 3000 Register Map Inspector utility from the Diagnostics menu of the SCADA 3000 programming softw
172. e Why can t I find my webpage Chances are you re just typing the wrong address or you re not entering the correct upper and lower case letters in your Username or web page Filename Typically your webpage will be located at some subdirectory of the main ISP s address which will be based on your Internet Account Username For example if you had an internet account with Voicenet and your Username was JSmith your webpage would be located at www voicenet com JSmith _unitname html Note that the unitname and Username are case sensitive You can see what the web page filename will be by viewing the local copy settings on the web status programming screen How do I find out what Internet settings to use You can typically find this information in one of the following places 1 In the original internet account information provided by your ISP 2 On your ISP5 website in the Tech Help FAQ or Support section or 3 Call or email your ISP for the required information Why can t I FTP a web page to my America Online account America Online requires proprietary software to upload files to their server Can I program my SCADA 3000 through the web page No You can only view information on the web page Can I acknowledge alarms through the webpage No You can only view alarm and input information on the web page How long does it take to poll for web status and deliver FTP the web page If your Internet access is via dialup then
173. e C Variables Counters preset amp value Ladder Variables C Variables Gas Flow values enable and flow rate only Diagnostics Alarms COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS Comparison instructions are used to test two values to condition the logical continuity of a rung Note that all values used in comparison instructions will be floating point numbers There is no output destination if the statement is true then rung status is continued EQU EQUAL This instruction will compare the value of Source A to Source B to see if they are equal If they are equal then the rung is evaluated as true otherwise the rung is false Source A must be an address Source B can either be a program constant integer only or an address The EQU instruction executes in 15us and requires 44 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may be used with EQU instructions Inputs Outputs Timers preset amp value Counters preset amp value Ladder variables SCADA 3000 User s Manual C variables Gas flow values enable and flow rate only Diagnostics Alarms NEQ NOT EQUAL This instruction will compare the value of Source A to Source B to see if they are NOT equal If they are NOT equal then the rung is evaluated as true otherwise the rung is false Source A must be an address Source B can either be a program constant integer only or an address The NEQ instruction executes in 15us and requires 44 bytes Following is a list of t
174. e computer s telephone number on all alarm messages This way personnel responding to alarm calls will be able to dial back to the computer which will allow them to acknowledge alarms Voice Messages Step Three is to program voice messages Click on the Voice Programming button from the toolbar or select Programming then Voice from the main menu The following screen will appear SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Voice Setup GE x Settings Custom Voice General Voice Settings Number of Custom Phrases C 32 Z IV Recite ID Phone Number v Use Password for Incoming Call v Recite Custom ID Message v Use Password for Local Speak Canned with Custom ID Message Y OK A Dese Figure 5 Voice Setup Screen This screen can be used to select certain options when a voice alarm call takes place The options are Should the ID phone number be recited Should the custom ID message be recited Should canned messages be recited with custom messages Select the options you want by placing a check mark in each box Next you must record voice messages At the bottom of the screen above is a button labeled ID Message Click this button to bring up the ID Message recording screen see below Wave Recorder Al x 12_ChestnutStreetPlant voice 64 wav a m Description Custom ID Message Last Recorded Thursday July 20 2000 at 3 35 42PM Figure 6 Wave Recorder screen To record the ID Mes
175. e then Save from the RT Builder main menu Enter a file name for your screen and click OK The screen layout with all of its components labels and graphics will be saved LOADING A REAL TIME SCREEN FOR EDITING To edit a previously saved Real time screen select File and then Load from the RT Builder main menu Select the real time screen file name you wish to edit then click OK RUNNING THE REAL TIME SCREEN 14 32 Running the Real time screen will make the SCADA 3000 software log in to each unit specified on the screen and begin updating the values of the components on the screen The update rate will depend on how many SCADA units the software must log into what type of communication is used radio telephone serial port and the number of components on the screen SCADA units that must be contacted via telephone will be updated one at a time based on the connect time parameters programmed for those units When connecting to units via radio be sure that your radio network has already been thoroughly tested and found to be satisfactory Don t use the realtime screen as your first attempt at radio communications To start the Real time screen click on the R T button from the Sensaphone Control Center form or select Real Time from the main menu and choose Run Next select the file name of the real time screen you wish to run and click OK Note that you can maximize the Real time screen by double clicking on the bar across the top of
176. e Main Menu and choose Print Note that where the print dialog shows the number of pages this actually indicates the number of rungs to be printed You can print all or a part of your ladder program On regular letter size paper the program prints 8 rungs per page Viewing and Forcing Ladder Variables Counters Timers amp Bits The real time values for the Ladder Variables Counters Timers and Bits can be displayed using the Ladder amp C Variables form From the main menu click Programming then Variables or click on the Ladder amp C variables button from the toolbar Next select the Ladder Variables Tab The following form will appear 15 23 SCADA 3000 User s Manual 15 24 N SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Variables Figure 8 Ladder Variables form Ladder Variables The Ladder Logic program can use up to 128 floating point variables This form will display the values of those variables Use the Up Down arrows to flip through the pages to access the variables you wish to view To change the value of a variable double click on the value you wish to change Enter the new value in the pop up form and click OK Remote Variable Programming via Touch Tone telephone When you call into the SCADA 3000 and enter Voice Mode a menu is spoken To record message press 1 To play message press 2 etc The menu option includes To program ladder variable 127 press 9 If you press 9 the unit wil
177. e SCADA 3000 will respond by saying beep error goodbye The alarm has not been acknowledged SCADA 3000 will hang up and wait for a callback acknowledgment This waiting period is called the intercall delay time During this time you may call the unit back from a Touch Tone phone Wait for the unit to beep Then hit any key on the phone and the unit will give a voice report Once you receive the complete report enter the code to acknowledge the alarm NOTTE An alarm cannot be acknowledged using a pulse rotary telephone Alarm Acknowledgment Pager Dialout SCADA 3000 will dial out to your pager service and leave a number on the display of your pager See Programming Section The unit will then hang up without speaking a voice message and wait for callback acknowledgment This waiting period is called the intercall delay time During this time you may call the unit back from a Touch Tone phone to receive a report of the alarm condition and acknowledge the alarm by entering the acknowledgment code NOTE An alarm cannot be acknowledged using a pulse rotary telephone Below is an example of what SCADA 3000 will say when you call it back to acknowledge a typical alarm Hello this is ID number Custom ID message Alarm Channel 1 is too high It is now 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit Hello this is ID number Custom ID message Alarm Channel 1 is too high It is now 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit
178. e Transfer Protocol Listed below are several parameters which are required for FTP to access and load your web page to the designated web server Contact your internet service provider to determine the proper settings Host Name location of your web site Remote Directory folder within the web site where the pages will upload Username your account information necessary to access the web server Password your account information necessary to access the web server Click on the Web Status tab to bring up the following screen Chapter 20 Internet Web Status Main Web Status By Default Web Status Reports are saved locally as AM FILES SCADA 3000 WebStatus lt unit directory name html r Default FTP Delivery Settings Iv Deliver to FTP host mywebsite com Retries 13 Remote Dir public_html p wml Usemame fismith Darrian r Default Logo Settings Top Left Logo CAPROGRAM FILES SCADA 3000 WebStatu Links to oOo Bottom Logo C Program Files SCADA 3000 WebStatus se Links to hitp www sensaphone com x cms x Figure 3 Global Web StatusTab Check the Deliver to FTP host box to enable the delivery settings The host address should be the ISP address of your site Retries is the number of times the software will attempt to upload new page data Remote Dir is the folder or directory within your site where the web page is to be placed wml Che
179. e maximum height 0 disables this property MaxWidth Sets the maximum width 0 disables this property MinHeight Sets the minimum height 0 disables this property MinWidth Sets the minimum width 0 disables this property Height Sets the height of the shape Hint Text shown on mouseover Left Sets the position of the shape as measured from the left side of the palette OffColor Select the color of the shape when Off OnColor Select the color of the shape when On OnShape Select from Circle Ellipse Rectangle RoundRectangle RoundSquare Square Pen Color Select the color of the line Mode pmBlack pmCopy pmMask pmMaskNotPen pmMaskPenNot Merge pmMergeNotPen pmMergePenNot pmNop pmNot pmNotCopy pmNotMask pmNotMerge pmNotXor pmW bite pmXor Style Select from solid or various types of dotted line to represent the shape border Width Select the width of the shape border Show Hint Check if you want the mouseover hint to appear State This is the On Off Enabled Disabled Datapoint state ThresholdType Selects the method of determining when to change from the OffShape and color to the OnShape and color Equal NotEqual GreaterThan LessThan Greater TbanorEqual LessThanorEqual ThresholdValue Sets the value that the DataPoint is compared against to determine to switch from Off to On Top Sets the position of the shape as measured from the top of the palette Visible Check to make the shape visible
180. e other to Control The firmware is stored in a format called a Hex file When upgrading the firmware with new Hex files it is recommended that you upgrade both Flash memory chips Warning Be sure to save all of you programming and to download any infor mation in the data logger and event log The memory in the SCADA 3000 will be completely reset after performing the upgrade The first step to upgrading the firmware is to retrieve the Hex files The files are available three ways 1 Download the Hex files from the internet using the Sensaphone Software Internet Upgrade Program see Appendix F 2 Have them E mailed from our tech support personnel Contact support sensaphone com 3 Have the files mailed to you on a floppy disk Call 610 558 2700 Copy the two Hex files to your hard drive in the SCADA 3000 folder C Program Files SCADA 3000 Firmware Once you have the files and have saved the data in your SCADA 3000 you may upgrade the firmware via an RS232 connection or via a modem connection Upgrading via RS232 Go online with the unit From the Diagnostics menu select Flash Upgrade The following form will appear SCADA 3000 DAVE Test Unit Flash Upgrade 5 Lommunications HW Figure 1 Flash Upgrade form SCADA 3000 User s Manual F 2 Instructions 1 Click on the Se ect HEX file button 2 Open the SCADA 3000 firmware folder 3 The two HEX files should appear Click on the Control HEX file and click
181. e programs cannot be started 3 Monitor Enable Disable Switch Manual override switch to disable or stop the unit from monitoring for alarms thereby preventing alarm dialout The software can be used to enable and disable monitoring only if this switch is in the Enable position If the switch is set to the Disable position then monitoring cannot be enabled via software control 4 RS232 DCE Port COM1 Programming port for connection to an IBM or compatible computer Defaults to 38 4 Kbps See Appendix D for details 5 RS232 DTE Port COM 2 Multi use communications port for use with a radio modem or other optional device Defaults to 38 4 Kbps See Appendix D for details 6 MAIN POWER FUSE amp 24V SUPPLY FUSE 4A 250VAC main power fuse and one 0 5A 250VAC 24V supply fuse 7 POWER TERMINAL STRIP 15V IN Main power input AUX PWR Output power for I O expansion modules EG Earth ground BAT External 12V battery input 24V OUT 24V power source for powering accessories or transducers SCADA 3000 User s Manual 8 EG Header Jumper to connect disconnect circuit board ground to earth ground 9 OUTPUT Terminal Strip Eight latching relay outputs rated to 125 VAC 2A 10 OUTPUT LEDs LEDs to indicate the ON OFF status of each output relay 0 7 11 LCD Display 80 character back lit programmable display for showing data points system status and alarms 12 Keypad Buttons Four keypad buttons that work in combination with t
182. e reload time determines how often the PID Algorithm is executed For example if the reload time is set to 0 25 seconds every quarter second the PID algorithm will run SCADA 3000 User s Manual Target Set Point This is the value that the PID algorithm is trying to maintain The units of measure for the Target Set Point will be the same as for the Input UAF For example if the Input UAF is measuring pressure in PSI then the Target Set Point must also be in PSI e Dead Zone This is the amount of variation that can be tolerated around the Target Set Point For example if the you were trying to maintain a pressure of 75 PSI 10 you would enter a value of 10 for the Dead Zone This will permit the pressure to vary between 65 and 85 PSI without effecting any correction Note that entering a value of 0 for the Dead Zone will cause the output to change frequently which may be undesirable with certain types of equipment NOTE The PID Tuning factors below Kp Ki Kd must all be either constants or UAF locations and never a mix of the two e Kp factor This is the proportional tuning factor used in the PID algorithm It may be either a constant or a UAF value e Ki factor This is the integral tuning factor used in the PID algorithm It may be either a constant or a UAF value e Kd factor This is the derivative tuning factor used in the PID algorithm It may be either a constant or a UAF value Use Output Limits Clicking thi
183. e shunt to the correct position Why does SCADA 3000 call again with the same alarm after just acknowledged it Alarm Recognition time may be set too short If an alarm is acknowledged then clears and quickly re trips the SCADA 3000 must wait the Alarm Recognition time before calling again Lengthen the Alarm Recognition time to avoid rapid callbacks for the same alarm The Alarm Reset Time is too short Alarm Reset Time is the time allowed for an acknowl edged alarm s fault condition to be corrected before the unit reactivates the alarm and begins the dialout process all over again Why won t the SCADA 3000 main unit communicate with expansion I O modules Every SCADA 3000 expansion I O module except the annunciator module has a built in communications bus diagnostic feature If the module s yellow PULSE LED is blinking communications to that module are working normally If a modules PULSE LED is off that module is no longer communicating with the SCADA 3000 main unit A loss of communication is usually due to one of the following The communications bus is not properly terminated Termination is required at the extreme ends of the communications network to minimize signal errors Check that the SCADA 3000 main unit and all expansion modules have their bus termination jumpers in the correct positions See Chapter 7 I O Expansion Modules for more information on communications Bus Termi nation The communicatio
184. e time required to update the outputs Chapter 15 ladder Logic Programming Ladder Program Statistics The statistics of the ladder program can be displayed after the program is successfully compiled or checked for syntax by enabling the Display Usage option in the program menu This feature is useful to keep track of which Ladder Variables and Bits have been used A summary of all instructions addresses and instruction types is also provided A sample report is shown below SCADA 3000 Ladder Program statistics Figure 7 Ladder Statistics form Ladder Run Viewer The Ladder Run Viewer allows you to see your Ladder program execute on the screen in real time In this mode inputs and outputs will highlight as they become active and all addresses representing numerical values will display those values Status bits associated with timer and counter instructions will highlight as they become active To enable this mode compile and upload your ladder program then start it from the main unit programming form as discussed above Next click the red Run Program button on the Ladder Editor screen and then the green Realtime Status button The symbols of your ladder program will now highlight when they are active Math and comparison instructions will display the actual values In this mode you cannot edit your program Io exit the realtime view mode first click the green button and then the red button Printing To print select File in th
185. ect your method of accessing the internet by clicking on the dropdown arrow Choose either RAS dialup or Local always on Chapter 22 PC Alarm Dialout RAS Dialup If you connect to the internet using a dial up modem then select Dialup RAS from the Type menu Select the service provider you want to use from the PhoneEntry pulldown menu Most users will only have one service provider set up through Microsoft Dialup Networking MDN and so will only have one choice in the pulldown menu Note You must have your MDN internet account Username and Password saved in order for the PC Alarm Dialout program to automatically log in Providers which use proprietary software such as America Online cannot be used Local Always On LAN etc If your internet access is available all of the time continuously then choose Local Always on LAN etc for your access type Telephone Voice Volume Setting The Wav Audio settings allow you to set the audio level when the computer makes a voice telephone call Typically this setting should be around 1 or 2 depending on your soundcard and modem Use the up down arrows to increase or decrease the audio level SCADA 3000 PROGRAMMING In order for the SCADA 3000 to use the PC Alarm Dialout feature you must configure each unit on the network as described in this section For each SCADA 3000 unit you must do five things 1 Enable PC Alarm Dialout 2 Program the ID number 3 Program voice messages
186. ed within the Dialout Settings group The following screen will appear Chestnut Street Plant Advanced Dial i Eg PC Dialout When enabled all Alarm Dialouts will be made by the PC To function properly this unit must be online at all times PC Handles all Alarm Dialout Functions Voice Modem and Sound Card required for Voice Destinations Intended for Radio Networks Alarm Dialing Priority This will cause the unit to disconnect any PC connections so it can make alarm phone calls Log Off and Dial Alarm Destinations Immediately Email Delivery Setting Dials Default Phone Number Custom Phone Number fi 999 555 1234 Figure 3 Advanced Dialout form Located at the bottom of the screen is the selection box to dial a custom phone number for sending e mail Click in the box and enter the telephone number of your computer modem which will be receiving the e mail calls from the SCADA 3000 Click OK SCADA 3000 Users Manual Chapter 22 PC Alarm Dialout Chapter 22 PC ALARM DIALOUT PC Alarm Dialout is a feature which allows your computer to make alarm calls voice fax pager email when your SCADA 3000 units do not have access to a telephone line The feature is intended to be used when you have several SCADA 3000 units connected via a radio network or serial port When an alarm occurs on one of the units the PC will make the alarm calls and receive the acknowledgement code
187. ement of a user defined type start Initial value of counter end Final value of counter step Amount counter is changed each time through the loop If not specified step defaults to one statements One or more statements between For and Next that are executed the specified number of times Do Loop Statement Repeats a block of statements while a condition is True or until a condition becomes True Do While Until condition statements Exit Do statements Loop Chapter 23 Distributed Control Using Visual Basic Script Or you can use this syntax Do statements Exit Do statements Loop While Until condition Arguments condition Numeric or string expression that is True or False If condition is Null condition is treated as False statements One or more statements that are repeated while or until condition is True OPERATORS Symbols used to execute mathematical operations and determine whether a particular condition exists Adds two values Subtracts two values Multiplies two values Divides two values and returns a floating point result Divides two values and provides an integer result Mod Finds the remainder of a division 5 Raises a number to the power of an exponent Or Checks if one condition or another exists And Checks if one condition and another exists ASSIGNMENT Symbol used to assign a numeric value assigns a new value to a variable COMPARATORS Symbols used
188. en choose Setup The following form will appear Comm Port Setup i D ES Comm 1 Comm2 Comm3 Comm 4 Comm5 M Enable Port v Full Duplex Buffering Type Phone Modem Port Baud Rate 115200 Modbus Protocol Settings Packet Retries 7 Retry Delay 500 Packet Timeout 500 Buffer Size 256 Figure 2 Comm Port Setup form SCADA 3000 User s Manual 9 2 You can configure all four communication ports in one session if you prefer For each port you re enabling click in the Enable Port box A description of the COMM port settings is provided below Type Select the type of communication you will be using to communicate with the SCADA 3000 either serial port phone modem or radio modem Modem Setup Button Click on this button to bring up the modem setup form shown below Modem Setup Select a Modem Select or Enter New Zoom 56K y x Setup String AT amp Fw2 M M Settings Dial Time Out 90 seconds DialReties 3 lt Inter Call Delay o lt seconds HW Flow Control v X Cancel Figure 3 Modem Setup form On this form select the modem type and the necessary setup string for that modem Change Dial Time Out the Inter Call Delay and Dial Retries if you want settings different from the defaults Baud Rate Set the baud rate for the selected port If your communication type is modem set the baud rate to the fastest rate your modem will support If you
189. ent Log The event log can be printed by performing a query and clicking the Print button at the top of the screen You can also export the Event Log to a comma delimited text file Simply click the Export button after performing a query and enter a filename Comma delimited text files can typically be imported into most spreadsheets or databases As a second option the Event Log can also be copied to the Windows clipboard This allows you to simply paste the copied infor mation into other programs that support Windows Cut Copy amp Paste functions POLLING The SCADA 3000 Software can be programmed to connect with your SCADA 3000 units one at a time on a predetermined time schedule to retrieve the Data Log and Event Log The downloaded information will be stored in a database in the computer for viewing at a later time The concept is similar to setting an alarm clock to download a unit s Data Logger and Event Log Polling is a useful feature for users who need to save more data than the SCADA 3000 is capable of holding By polling on an automated periodic basis it is possible to log large amounts of data to your computer without overwriting data in the SCADA 3000 It is also a time saver since it can be programmed to perform the data collection in the middle of the night when your com puter is typically doing nothing As an added benefit telephone rates are typically reduced during these hours Once the data has been downloaded you can c
190. enter 35th Floor Liberty Place Program status Chestnut Street Plant No program has been uploaded park Place Trump Plaza Description X Cancel wv Ok Figure 1 Ladder Program Mode Unit status No Unit selected This will allow the program to intelligently allow you to select data points and check for invalid T O addresses based on the programming in the selected unit Click File from the main menu and select New Program The following form will appear SCADA 3000 Ladder lt Unit Chestnut Street Plant Connected gt Wi Figure 2 Ladder Editor This is the Ladder editor screen from which you can build your ladder program Several func tions are available from this form including e Ladder program construction Ladder Program Save and load e Ladder program compiling e Ladder Program Upload and Download Chapter 15 ladder Logic Programming e Ladder rules check e Ladder Real Time execution viewer Adding Rungs Once you open the Ladder editor you can begin editing a New program A new program screen will only display an End rung No symbols can appear on the end rung To insert a new rung click and hold the left mouse button on the NR New Rung button from the rung tab and drag it to the yellow box on the left side of the window form The box will turn green indicating that you can drop the New Rung in that location You may add as many rungs as needed to your ladder program Instru
191. er The message number must be assigned on the voice or alarm forms for this feature to work 4 Erase Enter message number followed by the pound key The unit will beep to indicate that the message was erased Chapter 11 Programming for Phone Applications 5 Status The unit will play a full call in status report followed by a beep when the report is over The main menu will be recited after each programming option To end your programming session simply hang up Remote Voice Programming Voice messages may be recorded or played back remotely by calling in to the unit You must be off line with the unit in order to record your voice messages When SCADA 3000 answers an incoming call the unit will beep Immediately after the beep press any touch tone key to enter voice mode If you don t press a key within a few seconds the unit will try to negotiate a modem connection If the modem connection fails the unit will begin to recite a status report Press any key to cancel the status report and enter the voice programming menu If you checked Use Password for Incoming Call the unit will say Enter Password and you must enter it in the Voice Password to access the Voice Programming menu The default Voice Password is 555 If you wait until the end of the status report enter a touch tone to access voice programming Listed below is the voice menu you will hear To record message press 1 To play message pr
192. er instructions You may initiate these functions by right clicking on the intruction or by selecting the instruction and then using the Cut Copy Paste buttons on the toolbar The Cut function will remove the instruction and store it so that you can Paste it elsewhere in your program It will retain the addresses and presets associated with the instruction The Copy function will store a copy of the selected instruction so that you can Paste it elsewhere in your program It will retain the addresses and presets associated with the instruction The Paste function will insert the instruction in memory at the location specified by the mouse You must point the mouse to a valid hot spot on a rung and then right click Hot spots are located at the beginning of rungs between instructions and after the last instruction on a rung A valid hot spot will display a small black box When the box is displayed select Paste from the pop up menu or click on the Paste button from the toolbar Saving and Loading files To save a Ladder Program click on File then Save or click on the Save button from the toolbar Enter a filename and click OK The program with all of its titles comments and addresses will be saved To Load a previously saved ladder program click Program then Load or click on the Open file button from the toolbar Select the program file name you wish to load and click OK Deleting Rungs and Instructions To delete rungs right click
193. eral 10K thermistor standards available on the market Make sure you select one that matches the thermistor table in Appendix C e 10K deg C This sets the input to read temperature in degrees Celsius from a 10K ther mistor There are several 10K thermistor standards available on the market Make sure you select one that matches the thermistor table in Appendix C UNITS You can select the units of measure for your input by clicking on the down arrow in the units box for each input When you select one of the choices from the list SCADA 3000 will speak the units during status and alarm reports For contact Closure input types there are dual units of measure to represent the open closed status of the input For these input types the first word is associated with an Open contact the second with a Closed contact For example if the selected units of measure is Stopped Running when the contact is Open SCADA 3000 will indicate Stopped and when the contact is closed it will indicate Running You may also specify your own custom units by selecting Custom at the end of the list This can be any word up to 16 characters The units will be displayed on the screen however they will Chapter 10 Generic Programming not be spoken during a status or alarm report For contact closure inputs you can specify a word to represent the Open condition and one for the Closed condition by placing a slash between the words For example Co d Hot would indicate Cold
194. erify which files need to be upgraded click the Retrieve button to download the files and separately click the Install button to complete the upgrade Automatically Download after Verification Clicking on the Start button will verify and download automatically but will not install Automatically Download and Install In this mode clicking on the one Start button verifies downloads and installs Auto Close after Install will close the upgrade program once the update has been installed Auto Launch will open your SCADA software immediately after closing Note If you check the Automatically Download and Install the Auto Close after Install and the Auto Launch buttons your upgrade will be installed automatically the install program will close and your SCADA program with updated software will launch C PROGRAM FILESNSCADA 30 x C PROGRAM FILESSSCADA 30 M Figure 3 Options Files tab Appendix G Software Internet Upgrade File Tab Click in the boxes to select the type of files you want automatically upgraded Selecting fewer file types will speed the download process over slow connections Program Files are all required files Help Files consist of any of the Winhelp files accompanying your software Other Misc Files and Documentation include manuals specs and so forth These will also include bitmap graphics to assist you in building Real Time screens Supporting Files are Firmware upgrades Sample Files are
195. es or guaranteeing that there will not be damage to your person or poperty if you use this Product The warrantors shall not be liable under any cicumstances for damage to your person or property or some other person or that persons property by reason of the sale of this product or its failure to operate in the manner in which it is designed The warantors liability if any shall be limited to the original cost of the Product The warrantors assume no liability for installation of the Product and or interruptions of the service due to strikes riots floods fire and or any cause beyond Selles control 4 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING PERFORMANCE OF WARRANTY In the event that the Product does not confom to this warranty the Product should be shipped or delivered freight prepaid to a warantor with evidence of original purchase 5 LEGAL REMEDIES This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vay from state to state to the extent allowed by law expsssly in lieu of any other express or implied waranty condition or guarantee Ef fective date 1 June 1999 Phonetics Inc 901 Tryens Road Aston PA 19014 Phone 610 558 2700 Fax 610 558 0222
196. es via FAX or e mail the PC Alarm Dialout program sends a text message A sample follows 22 7 SCADA 3000 Users Manual SCADA3000 Alarm Message Date 10 1 00 Time 8 33 19 AM To John Smith 777 2283 From Water Plant 610 555 1234 Alarm Id 0003 Alarm Message Water level too high 425 inches To acknowledge the alarm you must call the computer back and enter the alarm ID number and the acknowledgement code See voice sample above 22 8 Chapter 23 Distributed Control Using Visual Basic Script Chapter 23 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL USING VISUAL BASIC SCRIPT The SCADA 3000 software allows you to run a control program on the Real time screen which has the capability of reading and writing to inputs outputs of all SCADA 3000 units which are actively used on the Real time screen All I O points used in the distributed control program must be referenced on the Real time screen The control program can be written in Visual Basic script Delphi script or Java script This chapter will discuss how to write a control program using Visual Basic script The procedure for writing and running a distributed control program is identical for using the other languages A distributed control program is typically used when multiple units are connected via a radio network and they must share information or be controlled from one another In this scenario all of the SCADA units are online all of the time and I O values are continuously upda
197. ess 2 To test message usage press 3 To erase message press 4 To hear status report press 5 To program ladder variable 127 press 9 Using your touch tone keypad enter the number that corresponds to the function you want to perform Listed below are the messages that will follow depending on your selection 1 Record Enter message number followed by the pound key The unit will then beep to indicate that the beginning of the recording It will beep again when recording is finished 2 Play Enter message number followed by the pound key The unit will play the mes sage then beep when the message is over 3 Test Enter message number followed by the pound key The unit will play the mes sage in context adding on the appropriate status or alarm information It will beep when the message is over The message number must be assigned on the voice or alarm forms for this feature to work 4 Erase Enter message number followed by the pound key The unit will beep to indi cate that the message was erased 5 Status The unit will play a full call in status report followed by a beep when the report is over 9 Ladder If you press 9 the unit will say Variable 127 is now at ___ enter number followed by the pound key You can enter a single digit between 0 and 9 using your touch tone telephone The numerical value you enter will be copied into ladder variable 127 This allows y
198. essage when an I O point meets certain conditions The audio message must be a Windows Wave WAV file which can be created with a sound card microphone and the Windows Sound Recorder program located under Programs Accessories Multimedia The Wave file can be set to play when an I O value is Equal EQ Not Equal NE Less Than LT Less Than or Equal LE Greater Than GT or Greater Than or Equal GE To use this feature follow the steps below Note that the compo nents placed on the palette for this feature will be invisible in Run mode 1 Click the AudVid tab and place the Wavplayer component on the palette 2 On the properties menu double click in the Filename field and select the Wave file you want played You can click the Play box to hear the message play once 3 Click the DataPoint tab and place the DataPointAlert component on the palette 4 From the properties menu set the AlertInterval This is how often the Wave file will be played when the logical condition is true 5 Double click in the Datapoint field and select the I O point you wish to use to activate the Wave file 6 Click in the DynComponent field and click the down arrow Choose the Waveplayerl component 7 Click in the DynProperty field and click the down arrow Choose the Play prop erty 8 Click in the Threshold Type field and select the logical threshold you want to use to determine when to play the file 9 Set the ThresholdValue that will be
199. et Do not continuously apply a voltage higher than the rated maximum voltage to any output Do not switch loads that exceed the rated capacity of the output Avoid switching high current induc tive loads as these will generate significant radiated noise when switching possibly causing the microprocessor to reset Also do not run your output wiring together with your input wiring This will almost always cause errors in your input readings because of signal coupling Be sure to follow National Electric Code guidelines for proper wiring and safety when working with high voltage circuits The wiring diagram below shows a typical switching application HOT AC NEUTRAL NX Controlled POWER Device Figure 1 Output Wiring The output wiring terminals are designed to accept 14AWG to 24AWG stranded wires Select the appropriate cable based on the signal or load you will be switching Follow all NEC codes and guidelines as well as local codes required to maintain safety when working with high voltages To minimize electrical noise coupling between I O lines follow the guidelines listed below for routing your wires e Route output wiring to the unit by a separate path from the input and communi cation cables Donotrun output wiring in the same conduit with input and communications wiring e Segregate I O wiring by signal type Bundle wiring with similar electrical characteristics together e Allow at least two inches between the unit and
200. etry Delay 500 Packet Timeout 500 Buffer Size 255 Figure 1 Comm Port Setup form Select the CommPort tab corresponding to the serial port you will be using to connect your radio modem You must have Full Duplex Buffering disabled Type Select Radio Modem Port Baud Rate set the baud rate to match the communications rate of your radio modem Enable Port Click to enable Alarm Dialout Enables a host PC to perform an alarm dialout when the host computer on the radio network is connected to a phone line Adjust the modbus communications protocol settings as required Higher settings may be required for slower networks Click the button beside the Type setting to bring up the following form Radio Modem Setup Figure 2 Radio Modem Setup form These settings are used to program the transmit and receive settings between the host computer and its radio modem If your radio modem does not use flow control disable both the Transmit and Receive Flow control boxes shown above If your radio modem does use flow control you will need to check Enable for both Transmit and Receive flow control and adjust the timing parameters to match the characteristics of your radio modem The following timing diagrams show the logical sequence of the flow control signals SCADA 3000 User s Manual DCD RIS RIS i Hold Time Data Out Figure 3 Transmit Data Logic Diagram DCD Data In o SJUUL Figure 4 Receive Da
201. ette where you want it to appear The RT Builder toolbar contains 11 tabs Data Grouping Graphics DataPoint Electrical Rotating Container Valves Gauges AudVid DynComponents Once you choose New two forms will appear on your screen The first of these is your Palette This is the platform on which you actually paste in and assemble the graphical elements of your real time screen In editing mode this is defined by a grid which disappears in run mode Sizing the Palette You can adjust the size of the palette in design or run mode by dragging the edge of the form to the desired height width and position alternatively you can specify the size of the palette in the palette properties menu To maximize the palette screen double click on the bar at the top of the palette SCADA 3000 User s Manual New_1 Design Figure 2 Palette The second form is the Property Editor Property editor Figure 3 Property Editor Each element of the design process has properties that can be customized to suit your applica tion The properties will differ depending on the element selected for example the palette a container a bitmap a dynamic component Beside some properties listed in the properties editor you will see a white box with a sign This box indicates the existence of sub properties associated with the particular property Click on the white box to expose the sub properties list Property editor m
202. f calls has been reached SAMPLE ALARM DIALOUT SEQUENCE Voice When dialing out to a destination programmed as voice the software dials the number and immediately starts announcing SCADA 3000 alarm exists It will continue repeating this message until the call is answered Once the call is answered the software recites the user recorded identification message for the SCADA 3000 unit with the alarm then the message identifying the specific alarm that exists Below is an example of what the software might say during a typical voice dialout SCADA 3000 alarm exists Hello this is ID number Custom ID message Alarm Channel 1 Custom alarm message is too high When the alarm occurred it was 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit Hello this is ID number Custom ID message Alarm Channel 1 Custom Alarm Message is too high When the alarm occurred it was 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit Enter acknowledgment code Enter acknowledgment code Alarm ID 0001 Goodbye In this example the number of Voice Message Repetitions was set to two 22 6 Chapter 22 PC Alarm Dialout Note If the call reaches an answering machine the message will be recorded but SCADA 3000 will be talking over your outgoing message so you will probably lose part of the first alarm message repetition The message will continue and give an alarm ID code The alarm ID code is needed if you have to call the computer b
203. f the palette akLeft Anchors the element a fixed distance from the left side of the palette akRight Anchors the element a fixed distance from the right side of the palette ak Top Anchors the element a fixed distance from the top of the palette BackGndMode bmOpaque or bm Iransparent Color Background color visible only if you choose bmOpaque above Constraints Limits the maximum and minimum size of the container on the palette MaxHeight Sets the maximum height 0 disables this property MaxWidth Sets the maximum width 0 disables this property MinHeight Sets the minimum height 0 disables this property MinWidth Sets the minimum width 0 disables this property Datapoint Assigns the container to an I O point within a SCADA unit Datapoint Enter the datapoint UAF or click in the Datapoint box above and then click the button at the end of the box to display the Datapoint selection form SCADA Select the SCADA unit from which the datapoint information is coming Display Percent tank vessel Displays percent full based on Max and Min values Display Value tank vessel Displays actual datapoint value Fill Color Color of container when filled Fill Style Solid or pattern fills Font Sets the default font for labels and text Click in the font box then click the small button at the end of the box to select a font Charset Specifies the character set of the font Color Sets the color of the text Height Sets the
204. fault Height Vertical size in pixels over ridden if you chose a Max Min Height Hint Text shown on mouseover Incremental Display Image Checkbox Layout Label t Bottom tlCenter tI Top Locates the label text to the top bottom or center of the box Left X coordinate of left edge of graphic or label on screen Pen Shape Color Selects the border color of the shape Mode pmBlack pmCopy pmMask pmMaskNotPen pmMaskPenNot Merge Chapter 14 RealTime Screen Design pmMergeNotPen pmMergePenNot pmNop pmNot pmNotCopy pmNotMask pmNotMerge pmNotXor pmWhite pmXor Style Solid or Dashed lines Width Selects the width of the shape border Picture Image Select a bitmap graphic to appear on the palette Shape Bevel bsBottomLine bsBox bsFrame bsLeftLine bsRightLine bsSpacer bs TopLine Shape Shape stCircle stEllipse stRectangle stRoundRectangle stRoundSquare stSquare Show Hint Check to show text on mouseover Stretch Image Check to be able to resize graphic Style Bevel bsLowered a lowered bevel bsRaised a raised bevel Top Y coordinate from top edge of graphic element on screen Transparent Check to make the background of a bitmap image invisible Visible Check to make the element visible Width Horizontal size in pixels over ridden by Max Min Width values if any Word Wrap label Check to make text wrap around to the next line within a label text box PLACING
205. few pages back but adjust the value for the Battery Charge Current since the solar panel will charge the battery and not the SCADA 3000 charge circuit 4 5 SCADA 3000 User s Manual 46 Chapter 5 Input Wiring Chapter 5 INPUT WIRING amp CONFIGURATION The SCADA 3000 is compatible with a wide variety of electrical signal sources including contacts 10K thermistors analog voltage outputs and 4 20mA current sources Each type of signal requires the configuration jumpers located behind the input terminal strip to be installed in the proper position for each type of signal Follow the instructions below to properly wire and configure the inputs for each type of electrical signal Note Needlenose pliers will be required to move the jumpers Warning The inputs are designed to work with low voltage signals from 0 5V DO NOT connect differential voltages greater than 5V to the inputs DO NOT connect 120VAC to the inputs In the 4 20mA jumper position and when no jumper is installed the inputs are differential and will work with signals that are 12V away from power supply ground This allows the use of multiple 4 20mA circuits on one loop See circuit schematics for more information General Wiring Considerations Most dry contact sensors can be connected to the SCADA 3000 using inexpensive 2 conductor twisted pair cable as small as 24 AWG For thermistor 0 5V and 4 20mA sensors use the wire chart below as a reference for selecting t
206. fic program must be inserted between the comments labeled Begin User Program and End User Program Begin User Program End User Program Note All SCADA 3000 Distributed Control Programs must include some pre program and post program instructions These have been pre written for you and Chapter 23 Distributed Control Using Visual Basic Script are included in the distributed control template program template vbs located in the SCADA 3000 gt Samples gt Scripts folder KEYWORDS The following is a partial list of valid components of the Visual Basic language that can be used within the SCADA 3000 Distributed Control program Dim If Then Else For Next Do Loop DEFINITIONS Dim Statement Declares variables and allocates storage space Usage Dim varname subscripts varname subscripts Arguments varname Name of the variable follows standard variable naming conventions subscripts Dimensions of an array variable up to 60 multiple dimensions may be declared The subscripts argument uses the following syntax upperbound upperbound The lower bound of an array is always zero variable name definitions A named storage location that can contain data that can be modified during program execution Each variable has a name that uniquely identifies it within its level of scope Variable names Must begin with an alphabetic character Can t contain an embedded period or type declaration charac
207. fication For each alarm you must select which of the 64 dialout destinations to contact SCADA 3000 User s Manual H 4 Max Calling Rounds might be set to zero in which case the SCADA 3000 will make no attempt to call You should increase the calling rounds to a number greater than zero The default setting is 100 The MON switch on the SCADA 3000 unit is in the Disable position I keep getting a busy signal when I call my SCADA 3000 The SCADA 3000 may be trying to deliver an alarm message or a report and the destination intercall delay times are very short The unit waits the programmed intercall time after contact ing a destination before it dials the next number in the sequence If this period is too short you ll have only a short time to call in before the SCADA 3000 begins dialing the next destina tion Extend the length of the intercall time for each destination Why am getting a temperature reading of 100 degrees F 75 degrees C You ll get this reading if a temperature sensor has become disconnected or has broken wires Examine the wires to the temperature sensor and connect or replace the wiring Why am getting a temperature reading of 300 degrees F 150 degrees C The temperature sensor wires may have shorted or are touching Examine the temperature sensor wiring and correct or replace the wiring A shunt for setting the input type may not be installed in the TMP DRY position Check and move th
208. flow button from the toolbar or select Programming gt Gas Flow from the main menu The following form will appear Figure 1 Gas Flow Form This form has three tabbed screens labeled Current Status General Setup and Channel Setup The Current Status and Channel Setup tabs provide four buttons to select information from each of the four meter runs To begin your programming start with General Setup by clicking on the General Setup tab The following screen will appear Plant Flow Rate Setup Figure 2 General Setup tab Enter the information for your gas flow equipment in the spaces provided Some brief defini tions and typical values are provided below Standard Pressure 14 73 PSIA typical Standard Temperature 60 deg F typical Chapter 18 Gas Flow Measurement Contract Base Pressure PSIA Absolute static pressure of a gas at base conditions Contract Base Temperature degrees F Absolute temperature of a gas at base conditions Flow Start Time Enter the Time of Day at which you want to start a new day s flow calculations For example if you enter 0 the daily calculations will start at midnight Flow Start Time is set to a 24 hour clock Thus if you enter 23 flow calculations will begin at 11PM each day Once you have configured the General Setup select the Channel Setup tab The following form will appear SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Flow Rate Setup Figure 3 Channel Setup tab Thi
209. flowing minutes last full hour Average Temperature deg F Average gas temperature over the last full hour Daily Data Today s Volume MCF Total volume of gas flow so far today updated on the hour Yesterday s Volume MCF Total volume of gas flow for the previous day BTUs Yesterday MBTUS Total number of BTUs for the previous day Note The day starts based on the Flow Start Time entered on the General Setup tab 18 5 SCADA 3000 User s Manual Monthly Volume This Month MCF Total volume of gas flow so far this month updated daily Volume Last Month MCF Total volume of gas flow for the previous month BTUs Last Month MBTUs Total BTUs for the previous month Chapter 19 System Diagnostics Chapter 19 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS MAIN BOARD DIAGNOSTICS The SCADA 3000 includes circuitry to monitor numerous internal system parameters to make sure that the unit is functioning properly Some circuits are tested on power up while others are monitored on a continuous basis Whenever a monitored function goes beyond its specified limits the Fault light is lit and a description of the problem is logged in the SCADA 30005 Event Logger Faults can also be viewed on the LCD display ON the Keypad select MENU gt DATA POINTS gt DIAGNOSTICS gt SYSTEM FAULTS Realtime diagnostic information can be viewed by selecting Diagnostics from the main menu and then clicking on Processors or Motherboard These will display system parameters
210. for an Open contact and Hot for a closed contact See below SCADA Custom Units Pe X UAF 1 0 7 F 140 Name Chamber New Label Cold Hot x ces Figure 5 Custom Units TABLES AND CALIBRATION To program the custom table values and calibration click the Table and Cal button The follow ing screen will appear SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant 1 0 Points lux Motherboard 8 Univ Inputs 0 7 UAF 170 Name Table Low Table High Calibration 1 0 0 levelWelt o0 f20000 te a oo 1 0 1 Leve wet2 ooo poo os 1 0 2 iow 000 ono fron ros Ww x pem fu 1 0 6 Pump2Run me no Fed po om sw P E Next Page Page 1 of 18 VA Figure 6 I O table form You can set up custom tables for 0 5 volt and 4 20 mA input types so that the values are read in engineering units For example say you have a 4 20 mA transducer connected to a 400 inch tank and the transducer puts out 4 mA when the tank is empty and 20 mA when the tank is full If you enter a table low value of 0 and a table high value of 400 the reading displayed by the SCADA 3000 will be in inches indicating the amount of material in the tank The calibration factor is a multiplier used to correct errors in your system When set to 1 000 the calibration factor has no effect on the reading To compensate for an input that is reading high set the calibration just below 1 0 to a number like 0 98 To compensate for a
211. formation here by clicking on the Change button and also check to have the SCADA 3000 remember your password For detailed instructions see the sections on setting up user accounts and changing passwords in Chapter 9 UNIVERSAL ADDRESS FORMAT UAF Overview The Universal Address Format UAF is the generic method of referencing almost any param eter inside the SCADA 3000 It is used to configure the Local Display the Data Logger the Voice Status Report the Gas Flow equations the PID loops and for accessing information in both the Ladder program and the C Program In most cases you can simply choose the UAF 10 5 SCADA 3000 User s Manual from a menu This section will help you understand how UAFs are defined and provide ex amples on how to specify them The Universal Address breaks down a memory location into three parameters that between them specify where a particular value is stored The parameters that make up the UAF are called the SOURCE TYPE GROUP and ELEMENT The SOURCE TYPE refers to the category or type of parameter and is represented by a letter in the UAE Note that the Main Board has a fixed Module Address of 0 and that the I O Expan sion modules have programmable addresses from 1 to 15 Listed below is a chart that shows how UAFs are constructed tai vara 0927 wee Nen 0 ec varie 0905 C vaie nme o EXCITA COTE JO HOW TO SPECIFY AND APPLY UAFS Input An Input would be any physical input channel on either
212. g Next use the buttons to the far right of the screen to record each voice message PROGRAMMING DESTINATIONS Step Four is to program destinations Destination programming is identical to the method used for normal operation for destination types except Numeric Pagers The following differences apply Since the PC Alarm Dialout program can process alarms from multiple SCADA 3000 units at once a unique Alarm ID number is added to every PC generated alarm message The Alarm ID number is automatically added to all Voice Fax E mail and Alphanumeric pager calls The only exception is Numeric Pager calls Typically you can program a numeric pager destination with only the pager number In this case no additional codes need to be added However in instances where the pager service disconnects quickly or if you must navigate through a voice menu with touch tones you will need to add additional codes To have the Alarm ID number appear on a numeric pager insert the letter D into the telephone number An example is shown below Example 7772233PP6105551234D Description of each segment of the beeper number above 7772233 pager telephone number P 2 second pause 6105551234 computer telephone number to appear on pager D Alarm ID number 4 digits touch tone 22 5 SCADA 3000 Users Manual On the Numeric pager this would appear as 6105551234 0001 which translates to a call from telephone number 610 555 1234 with
213. gbt Anchors the element a fixed distance from the right side of the palette akTop Anchors the element a fixed distance from the top of the palette 14 23 SCADA 3000 User s Manual 14 24 BackGndMode bmOpaque or bm Transparent Color Background color visible only if you choose bmOpaque above Constraints Limits the maximum and minimum size of the container on the palette MaxHeight Sets the maximum height 0 disables this property MaxWidth Sets the maximum width 0 disables this property MinHeight Sets the minimum height 0 disables this property MinWidth Sets the minimum width 0 disables this property Datapoint Assigns the container to an I O point within a SCADA unit Datapoint Enter the datapoint UAF or click in the Datapoint box above and then click the button at the end of the box to display the Datapoint selection form SCADA Select the SCADA unit from which the datapoint information is coming Fill Color Meter The color of the progress bar as it fills up Font Sets the default font for labels and text Click in the font box then click the small button at the end of the box to select a font Charset Specifies the character set of the font Color Sets the color of the text Height Sets the height of the font object in pixels If you wish to use a specific point size you should set the size property Pitch Can be set to one of three values fpDefault fpFixed or fpVariable Using fpDefault as
214. hange the directory name The installation program will give you three installation choices Typical Compact or Custom For new installations choose Typical Setup Type Lx Click the type of Setup you prefer then click Next Typical Program will be installed with the most common ii options Recommended for most users Compact Program will be installed with minimum required options C Custom You may choose the options you want to install Recommended for advanced users Destination Directory C Program Files SCADA 3000 Browse lt Back Cancel Figure 1 Installation Choices form SCADA 3000 User s Manual 8 2 PROCEDURE USING CD ROM 1 Start Windows 2 Insert SCADA 3000 CD ROM 3 Select Start Run and type in D NSetup exe and click OK Note If your CD ROM is installed on a drive letter other than D substitute the appro priate letter 4 Follow the prompts until the installation is finished PROCEDURE USING DISKS 1 Start windows 2 Insert SCADA 3000 Disk 1 3 Select Start gt Run and type in A Setup exe and click OK 4 Follow the prompts inserting each disk as prompted until the installation is finished 5 Insert the disk labeled SCADA 3000 Database Disk 1 6 Select Start gt Run and type in A Setup exe and click OK 7 Follow the prompts inserting each disk as prompted until the installation is finished UPDATES VIA INTERNET You can update your SCA
215. he Main Unit Element Description Month 1 12 from the internal clock Day 1 31 from the internal clock Year 1999 2xxx from the internal clock Hours 0 23 from the internal clock Minutes 0 59 from the internal clock Seconds 0 59 from the internal clock Reference Voltage for Inputs 5V Reference Voltage for audio 2 5V Lithium battery voltage 3V External 12V Battery Voltage 13 8V Main Power Supply Voltage 15V Internal 15V Power Supply 15V NO OO N A uN A v Nd KF C Rea n Ra c SCADA 3000 User s Manual 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Internal 24V Power Supply 24V SCADA 3000 circuit board temperature in deg C Total Current Consumption in Amps Communication processor flash memory version Control processor flash memory version PCB revision Communication processor status Control processor status Watchdog counter Communication processor reset count Control processor reset count Control Switch Position Day of Week Communication Flash Memory Boot Version Control Flash Memory Boot Version Expansion Module Diagnostics Element Description 0 Module type 1 Module firmware version 2 Module firmware Month 3 Module firmware Day 4 Module firmware Year 5 Module processor stack usage 6 Module communications total packet time outs Chapter 10 Generic Programming I O PROGRAMMING The I O Input Output programming forms allow you to configure your inputs and outputs s
216. he appropriate wire gauge Note that if the sensor is located far from the unit or if you are running cable in an electrically noisy environment you should seriously consider using twisted pair shielded cable This will shield the signal from electrical interference thereby preventing false readings and or damage to the unit If you are using shielded cable connect the shield to the EG pin on the unit To minimize electrical noise coupling between I O lines follow the guidelines listed below for routing your wires e Route the power supply and communications cables to the unit by a separate path from wiring to I O devices Where paths must cross their intersection should be perpendicular e Do not run signal or communications wiring and power in the same conduit e Segregate I O wiring by signal type Bundle wiring with similar electrical characteristics together e Allow at least two inches between the unit and I O wiring ducts Wiring Minimum Distance Wire Gauge 700 24 AWG 1500 22 AWG 2500 20 AWG TERMINAL BLOCKS The terminal blocks for wiring the inputs and outputs are removable They should only be removed or attached when power to the SCADA 3000 is OFF If for instance you had to return your SCADA 3000 for service you could remove the terminal blocks in order to maintain your SCADA 3000 User s Manual current wiring configuration To remove terminal blocks use your thumb or forefinger to push the screw section of the
217. he data points that may be used with NEQ instructions Inputs Outputs Timers preset amp value Counters preset amp value Ladder variables C variables Gas flow values enable and flow rate only Diagnostics Alarms LES LESS THAN This instruction will test to see if Source A is less than Source B If Source A is less than Source B then the rung is evaluated as true otherwise the rung is false Source A must be an address Source B can either be a program constant integer only or an address The LES instruction executes in 15us and requires 44 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may be used with LES instructions Inputs Outputs Timers preset amp value Counters preset amp value Ladder variables Chapter 15 Ladder logic Programming C variables Gas flow values enable and flow rate only Diagnostics Alarms LEQ LESS THAN OR EQUAL This instruction will test to see if Source A is less than or equal to Source B If Source A is less than or equal to Source B then the rung is evaluated as true otherwise the rung is false Source A must be an address Source B can either be a program constant integer only or an address The LEQ instruction executes in 15us and requires 44 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may be used with LEQ instructions Inputs Outputs Timers preset amp value Counters preset amp value Ladder variables C variables Gas flow values enable and flow
218. he display to access information and program the display 13 Status LEDs ALARM When flashing this LED indicates that an unacknowledged alarm exists When on steady it indicates that an alarm exists but has been acknowledged FAULT This LED indicates a problem with the SCADA 3000 or one of the I O modules The problem can be identified by viewing the system diagnostics and unit event log CNTRL Control Program Enabled Indicates that the control program is enabled MON Monitoring Enabled Indicates that alarm monitoring is enabled If an alarm occurs the SCADA 3000 will initiate its alarm dialout sequence BATTERY OK When on steadily this LED indicates that the external battery is fully charged When blinking it indicates that the battery is low When off it indicates that the battery is either not connected or very low PHONE Status This LED indicates if the SCADA 3000 is currently using the phone line 14 Input Terminal Strip These terminals are for connecting input sensors and transducers The upper row is the positive input and the lower row is the negative input The inputs are differential for certain jumper configurations so be sure to wire them in direct vertical pairs eg The positive input wire directly above the negative input wire 15 Input Configuration Jumpers These jumpers are used to condition the input for different types of sensors Use needlenose pliers to move them to the appropriate position See Chap
219. he pump See below 23 3 SCADA 3000 User s Manual 234 sample Run Figure 6 RT Screen A distributed control program is running which will turn on the pump if the level falls below 10 feet The pump will be turned off when the level reaches 35 feet A listing is shown below TL aC E O CC CC A Begin User Program ie 2 Se eS OS A Se SS In the following program DataPointValuel is the tanklevel and DataPointValue2 is the Pump On Off status The program will turn on the pump if the level drops below 10 feet The pump will stay on until the level is above 35 feet A static label is used to display the On Off status of the pump on the Realtime screen dim tanklevel pumpcontrol tanklevel DataPointValuel Value if tanklevel lt 10 then pumpcontrol 1 end if if tanklevel gt 35 then pumpcontrol 0 end if DataPointValue2 Value pumpcontrol if DataPointValue2 Value 0 then Label5 Caption Off else Label5 Caption On end if PEE gg gor gg gg gg gg gr TET End User Program LET LA EERE ETE Syntax Checking Declare variables Assign datapoint component value from realtime screen to tanklevel variable Perform logic T T T Assign pumpcontrol value to datapoint component on realtime screen Check if pump is on or off and print status on realtime screen Once you have finished writing your Distributed Control program you must check it for syntax errors Simply click
220. he real time screen the software will periodically connect to each unit Use the ConnectOnTime and ConnectOffTime slots to specify how long your modem should connect to the selected unit s ConnectOffTime is the intercall time from when the selected unit disconnects until the next unit connects The parameters of each are specified in minutes Note If you are connecting to only one unit via modem and want the connection to be continuous select Local as the connect type Radio Means that you are communicating with your units via radio modem In this scenario the computer will poll the selected I O points from each unit on a continu ous basis When the Real time screen runs it will connect to all units connected via serial port first followed by units on a radio network and lastly units connected via modem The order of calls for modem units is based on the order in which they were added to the realtime screen during the initial design stage New_1 Design Figure 6 Palette with connected units PLACING OBJECTS ON THE PALETTE A variety of standard objects can be accessed with the tabbed categories Electrical Rotating Containers Valves and Gauges To place objects on the Palette select one of the tabs and click on an object For example from the Container Tab click on the ContainerVessel object Now click on the palette The Vessel should appear on the palette as shown below New_1 Design Figure 7 Vessel
221. he source with respect to the source s alarm programming There are four possible messages Okay The alarm source is within the programmed limits High Low The source of the alarm is an analog signal it presently is above high or below low the limit Not Okay The source of the alarm is a digital signal closure or bit and is presently in a fault condition state 1 O Point Value This parameter is the actual value of the alarm source as programmed on the alarm setup form ALARM SETUP The Alarm Setup screen is where you configure alarms Each alarm channel has a program mable source of information that is used to detect an alarm condition This source of informa tion can be any piece of data that has a physical address defined by the UAF Universal Address Format This includes inputs outputs variables and other types of data Assign a correspond ing name for each alarm channel Be sure Alarm Enabled is checked SCADA 3000 User s Manual SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Alarms Jof x Alarm Status Alarm Setup Notification Alarm Name O High Level Well 1 Alam Enabled Iv Alarm Type Limit y UAF 4 0 Source UAF 1 0 5 Minutes Seconds Low Limit 0 00 Recog Time 3 e Hours Minutes MERECE 100 Reset Time po p 4 Y OK 4 Next Alarm Page 1 of 64 Figure 12 Alarm Setup A description of each programming parameter on this screen is listed below Alarm Enabled This box can be used
222. hich provide additional options that are described below Graph If you click on the graph button all of the points in the query will be displayed as a line graph You can use the arrows on the bottom and side of the graph to adjust the position of the graph The graph may be printed by clicking the Print button at the top of the screen You may also copy the graph to the windows clipboard by clicking the Copy button This allows you to paste the graph into other applications The Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons let you view the data with more or less detail The Reset button restores the original view of the graph When finished click the Close button to return to the Datalog form Export The Export button allows you to save the data in the grid to a comma delimited file This data format can then be imported into other applications Copy The Copy button will copy the data in the grid to the Windows Clipboard This makes it easy to import the data into other applications such as MS Excel or Lotus 123 because all you have to do is Paste it from the Clipboard Delete The delete button will delete ALL of the datalog samples for the data points regardless of the time period selected for the query SCADA 3000 User s Manual Print The print button will print all data in the grid New Query The new query button closes the current grid and allows you to build a new query Close Click the close button when you are finished viewing the
223. his type is the timer number from 0 63 The ELEMENT specifies an individual function for the selected timer There are 5 functions associated with each timer Element Function Number Description Range of Values 0 Timer Enabled 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 1 Timer Running 0 or 1 0 disabled 1 enabled 2 Timer Done 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 3 Preset Value 0 to 32 767 4 Timer Value 0 to 32 767 SCADA 3000 User s Manual Examples T 0 0 indicates if Timer 0 is enabled or disabled T 12 4 references the current timer value of timer number 12 The timer value and status bits can be viewed or changed from the Timer Status form To view the timer values click on the Ladder and C Variables button from the Toolbar on the Main Programming form Select the Timers tab In addition to viewing the state of the timer values you can also force changes by double clicking on the timer value you want to change A Change form will appear to let you enter a new value for the timer Use the Up Down arrows to flip through the pages to access the timers you wish to view CTU Count Up Counter This instruction counts false to true rung transitions starting with a COUNT value of 0 Rung transitions can be caused by events occurring in the program internal logic or by external field devices When rung conditions for a CTU instruction have made a false to true transition the COUNT value is incremented by one provided that the rung containing the CT
224. hoose to view it using the Data Log or Event Log View options or export the data to another application for data process ing or archiving purposes SETTING UP A POLLING SCHEDULE To set up a polling schedule click on the Polling button from the toolbar of the Control Center screen The following form will appear SCADA 3000 User s Manual it Polling Schedule g and Datalox Figure 25 Polling Schedule form Click on the Add Poll button to add a unit to the polling schedule The Edit Poll screen will appear as shown below Select Unit Chestnut Street Plant Y First Poll Date Thursday June 08 2000 Time 9 00 004M Interval Select Custom y Hour Minutes gt J Download Event Log Download DataLog Reset Y Update Web Status D Custom b o Figure 26 Edit Poll form Select a unit by clicking the Down arrow in the unit selection box If security is enabled in the selected unit enter a username and password to use during the poll The user must have either Programming or Administrator access to reset the Data Logger Choose a date and time for the first poll Next select a polling interval which will determine how often the software will con nect with the selected unit The polling interval options are poll once daily weekly monthly and custom The options are explained below Poll Once The software will connect with the selected unit at the time and date s
225. hree choices for framing grouping components on your palette SCADA 3000 User s Manual S SCADA 3000 RT Builder lolx File Edit Forms Help Data Group Graphic DataPoint Elec Rotate Contain Valve Gauge Audvid Dynamic X Group Panel Page Box Control Figure 12 Group Tab GroupBox creates a frame within which you can place any graphic components from the other tabs These will remain within the box and will move when the box itself is dragged around the screen The group box has a text identifier with which you can name it Panel is similar to a group box but without the identifier It s a frame into which you can fit various graphic components The appearance of the panel can be changed from the Propery Editor including a variety of bevels Page Control is most useful if you have multiple sites or devices conditions that exceed what comfortably fits on one screen If you Right Click on a Page Control object and choose New Page from the popup menu you can create and add multiple tabs which can be resized to create multiple full palette screens Each one can have its own graphical components and display properties For example if you monitor multiple pumping stations you can assign the compo nents of each a separate tabbed page name each page to identify it and even include a summary page for a graph comparing them Grouping Properties Active Page PageControl only Select the active page Align T
226. hrough one of the RS232 ports Programmable range 1 20 rings Default setting 1 ring Carrier Wait Time The Carrier Wait Time is the amount of time SCADA 3000 will wait for a modem connection when it receives an incoming call NOTE Do not set this parameter too short otherwise a modem connection may never be established Programmable range 0 to 90 seconds Default setting 60 seconds Online Timeout The online timeout will force the SCADA 3000 to disconnect from an on line session if no data requests have been made for the programmed time period Each time data is requested the online timeout will reset If the time period is set to 0 the online timeout feature becomes disabled This feature prevents the unit from staying connected in the event of a loss in commu nications Programmable range 0 255 minutes Default 4 minutes Voice Call Security Asterisks indicate that Voice Password and Acknowledgment Codes are entered Default values for each are 555 The voice password must be enabled on the voice programming screen The voice password prevents unauthorized access into voice programming mode For information on changing and programming passwords and codes see Chapter 9 Communicating with the SCADA 3000 Current User Information This area of the System Form reflects the current user information including name access level how long the user has been logged on and number of logins You can change User in
227. i Figure 4 Sub properties Two levels of properties can be displayed for all elements basic and advanced The advanced properties provide additional capabilities that some users may require To display advanced properties go to the File menu and click on Advanced Properties Chapter 14 Real Time Screen Design A description of how each of the properties affects each element of the realtime screen is pro vided throughout the sections following Palette Properties To edit the palette properties select the palette as the object to be edited by clicking on an empty area of the grid In the first box of the property editor form the word frmRTForm TfrmRTForm will appear The properties listed on the form will only affect the palette A description of the basic and advanced palette properties is listed below Basic Properties Color Sets the color of the palette Height Sets the total height of the palette Left Sets the screen position of the palette as measured from the left side of the monitor Title Text that appears at the top of the palette Top Sets the screen position of the palette as measured from the top side of the monitor Width Sets the total width of the palette Advanced Properties Font Sets the default font for labels and text Click in the font box and then click the small button at the end of the box to select a font Color Sets the color of the text Height Sets the height of the font
228. iagnostics View Alarm Fault Error Updating 3 EE EE EES Ges folia EN Figure 1a Main Programming form showing Register Verification As soon as a connection is established the software will begin Register Verification This procedure is required to insure data integrity among multiple users of the unit During this SCADA 3000 User s Manual process the software retrieves the programming from the unit The Register Verification status bar shows the download progress and can be hidden or displayed at the user s discretion by clicking on View from the main menu and selecting Show Register Verification Note Register Verification will complete faster if you close the Unit Status window To close the Unit Status window select View from the main menu then click on Unit Status The numbers on the I O Module Programming buttons refer to the Module addresses 1 15 When an I O expansion module is detected the lower buttons will change to indicate that a module has been detected at the corresponding address Two letters will appear on each button to identify the type of module as follows UI Universal Input PC Pulse Count TC Thermocouple RO Relay Output AO Analog Output AN Annunciator All expansion modules are detected automatically If you have a module connected and it does not show up on this form check the wiring to the module Once the Main Programming form appears you may begin selecting and programming from it Register
229. ics reads Module Type revision Month Day Year Stack Timeouts There are four additional spaces at the end for future modifications to diagnostic programming for the I O modules Comm Port Baud Rate The baud rate of each of the unit s serial ports can be displayed from the keypad as well To display the baud rate press MENU then select Data Points and press ENTER Press the down arrow key until you reach Diagnostics then press ENTER Select Module 0 and press ENTER then press the down arrow key until you reach Com1 and Com2 baud rate Press ENTER Diagnosing Faults If the fault LED is ON you can find out why by pressing MENU then selecting DATA POINTS by using the arrow keys Press ENTER Press the down arrow key until you reach the last entry SYSTEM FAULTS and press ENTER Any system faults will be displayed ALARMS The second selectable item on the main menu is Alarms Use the down arrow to move the cursor to the left of Alarms and press the ENTER keypad button A list appears of the 0 63 possible alarm points and the current alarm status for each You can scroll through the alarm list with the up and down arrow keys and press ENTER to view any specific alarm point s current value or to execute the Add Remove or Freeze functions The first three lines of the display are The alarm Name the alarm UAF and the alarm Status An ex ample appears below Alarm 46 A 46 0 No alarm exists The fourth line cycle
230. iew the Event Log now click the View Events button or click OK if you would prefer not to view them at this time VIEWING THE EVENT LOGGER To view the Event Log click the View Events button after downloading or click on Status then View Event Log from the main menu of the unit programming form You may also view events by selecting History then View Events from the Sensaphone Control Center form The Event Log query form will appear To begin click on Events then select one or more units that you Chapter 11 Programming for Phone Applications would like to query To select multiple units hold the Control key down and click on the units to include in the query When you have finished selecting units click the Next button Choose the specific events to appear in the query You may select them from the list or click one of the pre defined query buttons below the list box When finished click the Next button Choose the way the events are ordered by selecting one of the four options in the Query Order block You can view the events in chronological order by newest to oldest Descending oldest to newest Ascending alphabetically by event description or by unit name Finally enter the time period that contains the events you wish to view and click Query Deleting Events from the Event Log Database Perform a query as described above and click the Delete button to remove the queried events Printing Exporting and Copying the Ev
231. iling Starting 16 13 Error Handling 16 12 15 Function Library 16 7 11 Keywords 16 4 6 Language amp Structure 16 1 6 Predefined Variables 16 6 Sample Program 16 10 Structure 16 2 6 Synchronous vs Asynchronous 16 15 Viewing the Variables 16 16 Carrier Wait Time 10 5 Communicating with SCADA 3000 2 2 9 12 6 Creating New Units 2 2 9 3 Communications Programming 9 1 Radio vs Phone 9 7 RS232 Ports 9 7 8 E 1 2 Pin Description amp Data Direction E 1 2 Running the Software 9 1 D Datalogging 11 23 24 Capacity 11 24 Downloading the Data Logger 11 26 Order of Data Points Logged 11 25 Resetting 11 26 Selecting Data Points to Log 11 24 Start Time 11 25 Stopping the Data Logger 11 26 Time Interval 11 25 Viewing the Data 11 26 Graph 11 27 Destinations Programming 11 Alarm Call Mode 11 4 5 Disabled 11 4 Inform 11 4 5 Until Acknowledged 11 4 Alphanumeric Pagers 11 1 3 Call Zones 11 3 Destination 11 1 Dial Type 11 5 E Mail 11 2 Intercall Delay 11 5 Index 1 SCADA 3000 User s Manual Name 11 1 Numeric Pagers 11 1 Send Report 11 5 Special Dialing Codes 11 2 Diagnostics 19 Main Board 19 1 Module Communications 19 2 Distributed Control Using Visual Basic 23 About Visual Basic 23 6 Definitions 23 7 9 Dim Statement 23 7 Do Loop Statement 23 8 For Next Statement 23 8 If Then Else Statement 23 7 Keywords 23 7 Operators 23 9 10 Assignment 23 9 Comparators 23 9
232. ill be minimal and the variation will decrease as this error is added to the original The deriva tive term will add its share to the controller output then based on the derivative of this oscillat ing error signal the back and forth between uncorrected and overcorrected states The propor tional term will rise and fall as the error diminishes toward a steadier state If the lag time is brief however and the process reacts quickly to the controller s efforts then the integral term plays less of a role in the controller s output as the errors will be too short lived for it to work Instead the derivative term will be larger due to the rapid changes Each term will share some importance in any controller s output how much is determined by the behavior of the process being controlled Determining the best mix for your application is the essence of tuning For a slow process the K4 constant might need to be large in order to accelerate the controller s reaction to a setpoint change But that same KZ setting for a fast acting process might cause wild fluctuation and potential damage Kp Ki and Kd tuning is not an exact science Experienced control engineers develop an intuitive sense of how to mix these factors They ve most likely achieved this through repeated trial and error You can do the same Tweak your parameters and then watch how the controller handles the next error If it eliminates the error expeditiously then leave your setti
233. ill hang up Once the alarm has been acknowledged the dialout process stops If the Touch Tone acknowledgment code is not received SCADA 3000 will respond by saying beep error goodbye The alarm has not been acknowledged SCADA 3000 will hang up and wait for a callback acknowledgment This waiting period is called the intercall delay time During this time you may call the unit back from a Touch Tone phone Wait for the unit to beep Then hit any key on the phone and the unit will give a voice report Once you receive the complete report enter the code to acknowledge the alarm NOTE An alarm cannot be acknowledged using a pulse rotary telephone SCADA 3000 User s Manual TIP When SCADA 3000 is programmed to make calls to alphanumeric pagers make sure the intercall delay time is long enough to give the person carrying the pager some time to get to a phone to call the unit back Alarm Acknowledgment Modem Dialout SCADA 3000 will dial to a PC running the SCADA 3000 software in Receive Alarm mode and deliver an alarm message that will be logged by the software SCADA 3000 will transmit the alarm information to the PC hang up and wait for a callback acknowledgment This waiting period is called the intercall delay time During this time you may call the unit back from a Touch Tone phone and enter the code to acknowledge the alarm NOTE An alarm cannot be acknowledged using a pulse rotary telephone A
234. imply assign the gauge to a SCADA unit and DataPoint in the prop erties menu Next enter Min and Max values for the range and enter a title The remaining properties can be used to tailor the gauge to your application or preferences Setting Up the Strip Chart Place the strip chart on the palette and adjust its size accordingly Expand the DataPoint proper ties and assign up to 8 datapoints to the strip chart Enter names to describe the datapoints by 14 25 SCADA 3000 User s Manual 14 26 expanding the DataNames property Next change the number of data points property NumDataPoints to match the number of datapoints you have entered above Edit the title to describe your strip chart You can further customize the look of the strip chart by editing the other strip chart properties based upon your preferences Properties Align ProgressBar GaugeLevel Stretches the bar to align with the top bottom left right or client part fills all of the palette Anchors ProgressBar GaugeLevel akBottom Anchors the element a fixed distance from the bottom of the palette akLeft Anchors the element a fixed distance from the left side of the palette akRight Anchors the element a fixed distance from the right side of the palette akTop Anchors the element a fixed distance from the top of the palette BackGnd Color Choose the color of the gauge background Sets the frame color of the strip chart BackGndMode GaugeLevel Choose ei
235. ing figure shows how to connect a dry contact sensor 5 2 Chapter 5 Input Wiring L Hu HH Hu oa HH mi oa oa oa BE B EB Jumper oa HH oa oa BE po in TMP DRY Universal Input Module a a position 096300000 Dry Contact Sensor Figure 3 Wiring a Dry Contact Sensor The shunt set to the TMP DRY position is reflected in the following circuit diagram Protection Network Figure 4 TMP DRY Circuit 10K Thermistors The SCADA 3000 is compatible with 10K thermistors that match the curve data listed in the tables in Appendix C The monitoring temperature range of the 10K thermistor is 80 to 300 F 62 to 149 C Thermistors can be connected directly to the input terminals without regard for polarity Choose an input and connect the wires to the corresponding screw terminals for that input The configuration jumper should be set to the TMP DRY position The figure below shows how to connect a thermistor sensor 5 3 SCADA 3000 User s Manual I 420mA E E r of O HH EUER L4 o ole ofo a Temp Dry TMP DRY i 1 position SCADA 3000 CPU Thermistor Figure 5 Wiring a Thermistor Analog Voltage Output Transducers 0 5 VDC The SCADA 3000 is compatible with transducers that produce an analog output of 0 to SVDC Analog voltage output devices can be connected directly to the input terminals but be sure to follow the polarity markings on the unit Choose an input and connect the wires to the
236. ing schedule of a particular unit simply click on the next scheduled poll from the Schedule tab and then click the Edit Poll button Make your changes then click OK The Polling Schedule form always shows the current polling schedule and updates its information after each poll SCADA 3000 User s Manual Chapter 12 Programming for Radio Applications Chapter 12 PROGRAMMING FOR RADIO APPLICATIONS INTRODUCTION Wireless communication with one or more SCADA 3000s may be accomplished via radio modems In this scenario one radio modem would be connected to the host computer and additional radio modems would be connected to each SCADA 3000 on the network The transmit frequency of the host PC radio modem must match the receive frequency of the radio modem at each SCADA 3000 Similarly the receive frequency of the host PC radio modem must match the transmit frequency of the radio modem at each SCADA 3000 The host computer can be used to program an individual unit or to poll each unit on the network to update a real time screen Each unit on the network must have a unique modbus ID The host computer will request information from a unit based on its modbus ID As a result all of the SCADA 3000 units will hear the request for information but only the unit with a matching modbus ID will actually respond SELECTING RADIO MODEMS There are numerous manufacturers of radio modems but they all differ slightly A listing is provided at
237. ipment that is attached to your power supply and telephone lines especially if you live in a lightning prone area Surge protection is available through Phonetics Call for details POWER SUPPLY FUSE The main unit includes a 4A Fuse to protect the unit and power supply from short circuits and or product malfunction If no lights come on when you depress the power switch it is possible that the fuse is blown You can verify a blown fuse by removing it and testing for continuity To remove the fuse simply pull it straight out of its socket A spare fuse has been included for convenience but be sure to correct the problem before trying another fuse Replacement fuse Wickman 3721400041 Any of the following could cause the fuse to blow too much current being drawn due to the number of modules connected e voltage at the power input terminals too high 16V Max internal circuit malfunction ESTIMATING POWER CONSUMPTION Determining the power consumption of the system is required to make sure you have enough power available from your power supply in addition to determining the proper size battery for your application Listed below is the typical power consumed by the main unit and each module in the SCADA 3000 family when powered from 15 VDC Calculating Power Consumption for the SCADA 3000 Quantity x Current Ea Total amps Main RTU power ox 0 215 Amps Modem option MES 0 085 Amps Real Voice option x 0 008 Amps Unive
238. is 0 7B vi SCADA Table of Contents Contents Important Safety Instructions sssccsscssscssscsssssssccssscssccssesssacsssscsssceseseseees iii TIC ig A a te SEEE TIN ds RR RE E iii RRA o a EET iv Telephone Consumer Protection Acs cic ibi dpt chit suis cdi cidade ci picaro se Po iie v General Requirements for all Automatic Dialers sss eee v Canadian Department of Communications Statement oo petra ee ee v Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION ccsscssscsssssssscssscssscssscescssecesssssscssassonees 1 1 Flexible COMU cant eiii titi siete ul torio mo cdi AMS 1 Built in Alarm No coastal 1 Powerful I O Expansion Possibilities sooo eaaet ease e a N t tr Builtim Dafaloggaihid itio An 1 Powerful Programming Tecture Sco deucisaee iet tt A aaa 1 CP Programming iO EN EA d use Sa Ua set eU a Rae aaa c brc baa PIDO CIO M D M 2 CI e 2 Complete Warranty and Technical SUppOrt aus iti tror dee epe retire ei ree eH iios twist 2 WHO SHOULD USE THIS MANUAL ssssssssseeeeeenereenn nennen nennen eren 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A au Ais inis aee tat Cd oe ule Gul cbeae eE ERO TAE la pnt Bode 2 About I Os arid Modules orbe three idad 5 Related Poblicallons atinado 5 TECHNICAL SUPPORT t 5 Chapter 2 QUICK START GUIDE csccssscssssssscessscseccseccssscessssseseseseensees 2 1 Configuring C ommriceilohis essit a oec ee Pate dd Sa Create New DT suo eso route A A 2 Communicating with the A O spent m rdie
239. is true and reset when rung becomes false and the TIMER VALUE is greater than or equal to the PRESET value The timer address can only reference one of the 64 internal timers T 0 through 1 63 Right click on the instruction and choose Select Timer A list of the 64 timers will be displayed Select one and click OK Set the Preset by right clicking on the instruction and choosing Set Preset Enter the preset value and click OK The instruction executes in 4 5us and requires 84 bytes NOTE The RESET RES instruction cannot be used with the T OF instruction The GROUP for this type is the timer number from 0 63 The ELEMENT specifies an individual function for the selected timer There are 5 functions associated with each timer Element Function Number Description Range of Values 0 Timer Enabled 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled Chapter 15 ladder Logic Programming 1 Timer Running 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 2 Timer Done 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 3 Preset Value 0 to 32 767 4 Timer Value 0 to 32 767 Examples T 0 0 indicates if Timer 0 is enabled or disabled T 12 4 references the current timer value of timer number 12 The timer value and status bits can be viewed or changed from the Timer Status form To view the timer values click on the Ladder and C Variables button from the Toolbar on the Main Programming form Select the Timers tab In addition to viewing the state of the timer values you can also force changes
240. isplay to its normal scrolling routine Use the Up Down arrows to select between ADD REMOVE and DISPLAY FROZEN To Add or Remove press the ENTER key while the corresponding message is shown To freeze the display simply press the arrows until the message DISPLAY FROZEN is shown Do not press ENTER The display will stay on this screen as long as the message DISPLAY FROZEN is shown To return to the main menu press the MENU key several times until it is shown USING THE KEYPAD The keypad consists of four buttons labeled from left to right UP DOWN MENU and ENTER To navigate the SCADA program you press MENU for the main choices listed above and then use the ENTER and UP and DOWN keys to navigate through each program option in the main menu and all embedded menus When the cursor is at the item you want press ENTER The options operate as follows DATA POINTS Press MENU to see the list The cursor gt will appear automatically to the left of the first item in the list DATA POINTS Press ENTER to view the options for Data Points You will then see the following list of options INPUTS OUTPUTS TIMERS COUNTERS BITS LADDER VARIABLES C PROGRAM VARIABLE GAS FLOW and DIAGNOSTICS Inputs Press ENTER for the first selection under Data Points Inputs Then use the arrow keys to navigate up and down the list of inputs to see those below the number displayed on the screen These are numbered as MODULE A
241. ite Main Power Status Checking this box will result in the canned vocabulary an nouncing if the main power is ON or OFF Recite Main Power Supply Consumption Checking this box will result in the canned vocabulary announcing the present current consumption in Amps Recite Ladder Program Status Checking this box will result in the canned vocabulary announcing the ladder program status either running or not running 11 7 SCADA 3000 User s Manual Recite C Program Status Checking this box will result in the canned vocabulary an nouncing the C Program status either running or not running Sample Status report custom messages in parentheses Hello this is 610 5 55 1234 This is the emergency notification system for the Chestnut Street Water Plant in Little Town Pennsylvania Alarm channel 20 pipeline number 1 inflow pressure is too high it is now 64 psi Input 3 on module 0 tank number 3 overflow valve is OPEN Input 7 on module 2 outflow water temperature is now at 85 21 degrees Fahrenheit Relay output 1 on module 4 backup power generator is OFF Battery voltage is now at 13 72 volts Okay Main power is ON Power supply consumption is now at 0 45 amps Ladder program is running C Program is not running Enter Password only if you press a touch tone button Goodbye Customizing Your Status Report Your status report can i
242. its the maximum and minimum size of the label graphic MaxHeight Sets the maximum height 0 disables this property MaxWidth Sets the maximum width 0 disables this property MinHeight Sets the minimum height 0 disables this property MinWidth Sets the minimum width 0 disables this property Font Sets the default font for labels and text Click in the font box then click the small button at the end of the box to select a font Charset Specifies the character set of the font Color Sets the color of the text Height Sets the height of the font object in pixels If you wish to use a specific point size you should set the size property Pitch Can be set to one of three values fpDefault fpFixed or fpVariable Using fpDefault as the pitch value will cause the default pitch style to be used with the font The fpFixed and fp Variable values can be used to explicitly set the pitch a value of fpFixed causes each character in the font to have the same width monospacing while a value of fp Variable allows different characters within a font to have unique widths Size Sets the point size of a font object If you need to ensure that the font fits within a specified area you can manipulate the Height and Pitch properties Style Sets the default style of the font or text fsBold Sets the default to boldface fsltalic Sets the default to italic fsStrikeout Forces a line through the font fsUnderline Underlines the text as de
243. l program The method you choose will depend on your application how many units you have and other factors which may be specific to your application The three methods are described below Method 1 Your distributed control program performs all control logic No logic programs run on the SCADA units themselves Advantages e This allows for centralized control and there is only one control program to create and maintain Disadvantages e You will need all I O points required for running your logic program to be on the realtime screen e Ifthe PC crashes or the program must be halted then all control stops Method 2 Your distributed control program only passes I O information from one unit to another All control logic is performed in the SCADA units themselves using a C or Ladder program Infor mation can easily be read from unit A and written into the C or ladder variables of unit B Advantages e Control is performed locally at the SCADA unit If the PC running the distrib uted control program crashes or if the program must be halted local control will continue to function e This minimizes the number of I O points on your realtime screen Chapter 23 Distributed Control Using Visual Basic Script Disadvantages e You will need to have separate control programs running for each SCADA unit which may be more complicated to write and maintain Method 3 A combination of Methods 1 amp 2 where both the distributed control pr
244. l say Variable 127 is now at ___ enter number followed by the pound key You can enter a single digit between 0 and 9 using your touch tone telephone The numerical value you enter will be copied into ladder variable 127 This allows you to remotely initiate a control sequence within your ladder program simply by adding statements that check the value of ladder variable 127 Once the desired logic has executed you can reset ladder variable 127 Ladder Timers The Ladder Logic environment has 64 timers which can be used as necessary in your Ladder program The Ladder Timers form will display the parameter values for each timer 16 at a time Use the Up Down arrows to flip through the pages to access the Timer values you wish to view To change the value of a timer double click on the value you wish to change Enter the new value in the pop up form and click OK Chapter 15 Ladder Logic Programming SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Variables Figure 9 Ladder Timers form Ladder Counters The Ladder Logic environment has 64 counters which can be used as necessary in your Ladder program The Ladder Counters form will display the parameter values for each counter 16 at a time Use the Up Down arrows to flip through the pages to access the Counter values you wish to view To change the value of a counter double click on the value you wish to change Enter the new value in the pop up form and click OK SCADA 3000
245. larm Acknowledgment Maximum Calling Rounds The SCADA 3000 will dial all of the destinations repeatedly until the alarm is acknowledged If the unit reaches the maximum number of calling rounds without being acknowledged it will stop the dialout and acknowledge itself When this occurs a message is recorded in the Event Log ALARM DIALING PRIORITY This feature will make alarm dailout the priority if an online session exists As a result when the option is enabled the unit will drop the online session and begin dialing out when an alarm occurs This feature is useful if you have a computer online with the unit 24 hours a day 7 days a week but if an alarm occurs you want the alarm phone calls to take priority To enable this feature click on the System button from the toolbar or select Programming then System from the main menu Next click the Advanced button within the Dialout Settings group The following form will appear Click in the Alarm Dialing Priority box to enable this option VIEWING CURRENT ALARMS You can view all current alarms from one or more units that are online by clicking the Alarms button from the Sensaphone Control Center toolbar or by clicking History then View Alarms from the main menu You can also acknowledge alarms from this screen A sample is shown below Alarms Current Alarms Alarm History Logging Audible Unit Name Alarm Name State Status Sort By y Y Auto Event Download Figure 1
246. lation The SCADA 3000 operating system will automatically detect its presence once installed Connector pins bottom Standoff screw hole Figure 5 Modem card The FGD 3400 modem card offers Data modem throughput up to 115 2 kbps 33 6 kbps and V 34 eV 32 bis V 32 V 22 bis V 22A B V 23 and V 21 Bell 212A and 103 V 42 LAPM MNP 2 4 and MNP 10 error correction V 42 bis and MNP 5 data compression MNP 10EC enhanced cellular performance Error correction and data compression ECC performed in the modem using 32k bytes of external RAM to increase data throughput typically by a factor of four Fax modem Group 3 send rates up to 14400 bps V 33 V 17 V 29 V 27 ter and V 21 channel 2 eSupports T 30 protocol Installation of the Modem Card 1 Turn off the SCADA 3000 unit 2 While wearing a grounding wrist strap remove the four screws on the top cover and slowly remove it being careful to manually unplug the ribbon connection from the keypad in the center Note Pulling the cover off quickly can damage the LCD ribbon or connector 3 The modem card connector is below and to the right of the LCD window There are two standoff screw mounting holes in the lower righthand quadrant of the main board one for the upper right corner of the card and one for the lower left corner of the card See Figure 6 JS SCADA 3000 User s Manual Modem board va connector LCD ribbon connector
247. le GaugeLevel Solid or patterned fill Height Sets the height of the gauge Hint Text message that appears when the cursor rests over an object Hub Color select a color for the hub of the gauge Chapter 14 Real Time Screen Design Left Sets the position of the gauge as measured from the left side of the palette Legend Value Strip chart Shows the value of the datapoint in the legend Max Buffer Size Sets the total size of the holding array buffer for the data 100 100 datapoints MaxValue ProgressBar GaugeLevel Upper datapoint value limit or maximum display value MinValue ProgressBar GaugeLevel Lower datapoint value limit or minimum display value Needle Color choose a color for the display needle Needle Style Needle or pointer style options NumDataPoints Strip chart Enter the number of datapoints to be charted Orientation ProgressBar pbHorizontal pb Vertical RefreshRate Strip chart Adjusts how often the legend values update in seconds Scale Start Angle in degrees on a circle Default 225 is approximately 8 o clock on the dial Scale Stop Angle in degrees on a circle Default 135 is approximately 4 o clock on the dial Show Hint ProgressBar GaugeLevel Checkbox check to show the hint on mouseover Smooth ProgressBar Checkbox check to smooth the bar animation StayOn Top GaugeLevel Forces the gauge to stay on top of other images when they overlap Step ProgressBar Tic
248. lect a font Charset Specifies the character set of the font Color Sets the color of the text Height Sets the height of the font object in pixels If you wish to use a specific point size you should set the size property Pitch Can be set to one of three values fpDefault fpFixed or fpVariable Using fpDefault as the pitch value will cause the default pitch style to be used with the font The fpFixed and fpVariable values can be used to explicitly set the pitch a value of fpFixed causes each character in the font to have the same width monospacing while a value of fpVariable allows different characters within a font to have unique widths Chapter 14 Real Time Screen Design Size Sets the point size of a font object If you need to ensure that the font fits within a specified area you can manipulate the Height and Pitch properties Style Sets the default style of the font or text fsBold Sets the default to boldface fsltalic Sets the default to italic fsStrikeout Forces a line through the font fsUnderline Underlines the text as default Height Vertical size in pixels overridden if you chose a Max Min Height Hint Type in the text that will appear upon mouseover Layout Left Sets the position of the component as measured from the left side of the palette Show Hint Checkbox Enables the hint message to display on mouseover Threshold Type DynAlert t EQ ttGE ttGT ttLE ttLT ttNE Threshold Value DynAlert
249. lette alTop Stretches the component across the top of the palette Alignment Aligns the text in the box center left justified right justified Anchors Sets one or more sides of the graphic label as a positional anchor with respect to the edges of the palette akBottom Anchors the element a fixed distance from the bottom of the palette akLeft Anchors the element a fixed distance from the left side of the palette akRight Anchors the element a fixed distance from the right side of the palette akTop Anchors the element a fixed distance from the top of the palette Autosize Automatically sizes the background box to the size of the text Caption Value Name or text assigned to graphic Color Sets the background color of the text box Constraints Limits the maximum and minimum size of the label graphic MaxHeight Sets the maximum height 0 disables this property MaxWidth Sets the maximum width 0 disables this property MinHeight Sets the minimum height 0 disables this property MinWidth Sets the minimum width 0 disables this property Datapoint Assigns the component to an I O point within a SCADA unit Reveal the sub properties by clicking the white box next to the word Datapoint Select a SCADA unit first then select the datapoint Chapter 14 Real Time Screen Design Datapoint Enter the datapoint UAF or click in the Datapoint box above and then click the button at the end of the box to display the Datapoint
250. lexibility when it comes to communicating with your SCADA 3000 RTUs You can set up communication by data radio or phone line or a combination of both The software allows you to configure up to four serial ports which can be used for data radio and or multiple phone modems Traditional SCADA devices generally communicate by radio Radio allows the PC to be in constant communication with all connected RTUs all of the time Real time information is available on a continuous basis In this mode the SCADA 3000 software will perform alarming and data logging from the PC When SCADA 3000 RTUs are connected via phone line the software can dial up each unit to retrieve and display information on an as needed basis In this mode alarming and data logging are performed from the RTU itself CPU RADIO Figure 12 Radio vs Phone communication RS232 Communication Ports 1 amp 2 The SCADA 3000 has two RS232 communication ports one configured as DCE 9 pin female COM 1 and the other as DTE 9 pin male COM 2 COM 2 is used to communicate with SCADA 3000 via a radio modem optional The radio modem would connect to COM 2 9 7 SCADA 3000 User s Manual directly with the appropriate cable COM 1 is designed to connect directly to a personal com puter for local communications programming The baud rate and communication type radio or standard for each port is selectable via jumpers located under the top cover see Appendix D The default Ba
251. ll take two input values perform the specified arithmetic function and output the result to the specified address location ADD Addition The ADD instruction adds the values stored in the two referenced memory locations labeled as Source A and Source B when rung conditions are true The result is stored in the destination memory location The operand values can be fixed constants values contained in I O or vari ables stored in any memory location The ADD instruction executes in 15s and requires 68 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may be used with ADD instructions Chapter 15 ladder Logic Programming Valid Sources Valid Destinations Inputs Outputs Outputs Ladder variables Timers preset amp value C Variables Counters preset amp value Ladder variables C variables Gas flow values enable and flow rate only Diagnostics Alarms SUB Subtraction The SUB instruction subtracts the value stored in the memory location referenced by Source B from the value stored in the memory location referenced by Source A when rung conditions are true The result is stored in the destination memory location The operand values can be fixed constants values contained in I O or variables stored in any memory location The SUB instruction executes in 15us and requires 58 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may be used with SUB instructions Valid Sources Valid Destinations Inputs Outpu
252. log Download Download Progres NMEEENENENMMEMEMMME 100 Completed 180 Data Points Added Start 1 2 1999 11 10 56 AM End 1 2 1999 11 11 25 4M 1 Abort Figure 22 Datalog Download status VIEWING THE DATA To view Data Logger data click on the View Data button on the lower left part of the Data Log form or from the Download form Select one or more SCADA 3000 unit s whose data you want to view To select more than one unit drag the mouse over the list or hold the control key down while you click each unit you want to highlight When finished click the Next button A list of Chapter 1 1 Programming for Phone Applications all available points from the units you selected will be displayed Choose the data points you want to view by dragging the mouse over the list or hold the control key down while you click each item you want to highlight Click the Next button Enter the range of dates and times to perform your query and click on the Query button The figure below shows the procedure just described SCADA 3000 DataLogger Select Uafs Plant 1 0 3 Motherboard Input 3 Chestnut Street Plant 10 4 prenne a Chestnut Street Plant 10 5 Motherboard Input Tom to finan Figure 23 DataLogger Data form After you click the Query button the data which matches your request will be displayed on a grid Use the up down arrows to scroll through the data in the grid At the top of the form are seven buttons w
253. m They include operators assignment compara tors and comments PREDEFINED VARIABLES These are variables that have specific predefined values that are automatically updated and cannot be changed by the user FUNCTIONS These are word commands that perform a predefined function within a C program SCADA 3000 User s Manual ARRAYS This is a more advanced programming type that significantly shortens and simplifies long programs ERROR HANDLING When a program is compiled it is scanned for language related errors An error message including the type of error is displayed EDITING TOOL The SCADA 3000 Windows Software provides an editing utility that allows you to write compile upload download run and start C pro y ams us TUNE y This chapter provides basic instruction in the C language and gives all the commands that are valid for use with SCADA 3000 Sample programs are included If you have questions or problems please contact our technical support department at 610 558 2700 or via email at support sensaphone com STRUCTURE Listed below are some examples that will help demonstrate the C language structure Refer to the following pages for explanation of the keywords functions and commands used within the sample programs 1 All programs must begin with the main function It must be followed by an open brace and closed with an end brace Main 2 A statement is a line of programming code All stateme
254. m being executed continuously and allows the alarm to proceed if the switch were to become shorted 15 29 SCADA 3000 User s Manual Figure 16 OSR instruction 15 30 Chapter 16 C Programming Chapter 16 PROGRAMMING IN C C is a computer programming language that has become increasingly popular in industrial automation for writing sophisticated control programs Integrated within SCADA 3000 is a C language interpreter This interpreter allows you to write and compile a program written in the C language to perform intelligent input output control and mathematical functions Note that the C interpreter in the SCADA 3000 is a slimmed down version of C and that all functions normally associated with ANSI C will not be available Listed within this chapter are explana tions on functions that are available along with examples on how to make use of them Specifications The maximum size of the C program is 32K of text and or 16K of compiled text Up to 1024 variables may be defined and each variable name can be up to 15 characters The SCADA 3000 also has six predefined variables for date and time reference The C program can be set to run synchronously or asynchronously with the ladder program In synchronous mode the C pro gram will run continuously or if the ladder program is running synchronized with the ladder program In asynchronous mode the C program will run on an independent time schedule ABOUT THE C LANGUAGE C is a structure
255. m default However you can optionally set up the software to customize the FTP location for each SCADA 3000 unit on an individual basis Click the Custom Chapter 20 Internet Web Status option and you can set up a separate FTP location so that only the web page for the selected SCADA unit will be uploaded to this location Instant Web Page To create a web page immediately click the Create Now button This will make the SCADA 3000 software poll the unit for I O and Alarm information create the web page and FTP the files to your ISP Be sure to have all of your web page programming completed before clicking this button SETTING UP A POLLING SCHEDULE FOR WEB STATUS From the Main Menu of the Sensaphone Control Center screen select Polling and then Schedule The current polling schedule will appear Click the Add Poll button to create a new polling entry The following screen will appear eit Edit Poll All x Select Unit Chestnut Street Plant First Poll Logon if Security is Enabled Date Thursday June 08 2000 v User Name Time 9 00 004M lt Password Interval Actions Select Custom Download Event Log Days Hours Minutes DownloadDataLog Reset Custom o G o v Update Web Status vo Figure 7 Edit Poll form Setting up a polling schedule is detailed in Chapter 11 For the purposes of this section we will briefly cover the main points Select a
256. med into the unit for it to function properly The time should reflect the actual time where the unit is geographically installed eg PST CST EST A button labeled Set to PC is located next to the time box Clicking this button will set the date and time to the present values on your computer Auto Daylight Savings This instructs SCADA 3000 to automatically correct the time twice a year for daylight savings Programmable settings On Off Default setting On SCADA 3000 User s Manual DIALOUT SETTINGS Dialing Method The Dialing Method parameter lets you program whether SCADA 3000 will dial out in Pulse or Tone The default setting is Tone Dialing Prefix The Dialing prefix box on the System Settings form is for email prefixes only If for instance the SCADA 3000 is on an office phone system where it had to dial a 9 to get an outside line entering a 9 here will force the SCADA 3000 to dial 9 before dialing the email server phone number To enter a specific prefix for dialout types other than email go instead to the Dialout Destina tion screen see Destinations section later in this chapter and enter the prefix with the phone number in the Destination column following the instructions under Special Dialing Codes You must enter each prefix manually for each individual phone number that requires one Maximum Calling Rounds The maximum number of times SCADA 3000 will dial through the list of desti
257. mission to an Inform destination was successful that destination will not be contacted again for that alarm SCADA 3000 will only make additional attempts to contact an Alarm Call Mode Inform destination if that destination hasn t successfully received its transmission for example due to a no answer busy signal no carrier response If a transmission fails to reach a destination after the last calling round is completed the failure is recorded in the Event Log Calls to Inform destinations are useful for providing records of alarm events Example The SCADA 3000 used in the above example is monitoring the heating system in a school The first three destinations are set as Alarm Call Mode Until Acknowledged and programmed to call maintenance personnel In addition destination 4 is programmed to call the school s fax machine and is set as Alarm Call Mode Inform SCADA 3000 will call the maintenance personnel as described Chapter 11 Programming for Phone Applications above so that they can fix the boiler and will also send a fax to the school office informing them of the problem Important Destinations programmed as Alarm Call Mode Inform cannot acknowledge alarms DIAL TYPE This is used to specify the type of call SCADA 3000 will make to a particular destination The available dialout types are Fax Voice E mail Pager Alpha Pager and Modem Fax This instructs SCADA 3000 to
258. monitored within the SCADA 3000 Main Unit The two screens shown below SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Pr EES Communication Processor ROM Version 3 57 Monitoring Enabled Boot Version 3 00 Reset Count 5 Status Idle Online COM 1 Control Processor ROM Version 2 12 Control Enabled Boot Version 1 00 Reset Count 5 Reset Status 34 Hardware Reset Full Factory Reset Figure 1 Processors Diagnostics In the event of abnormal behavior several RESET options can be performed on the unit s microprocessors Within the Control processor group box is a Reset button which will issue a hardware reset to the control processor when clicked This reset will not destroy programming At the bottom of the Processor s Diagnostic screen are two additional reset options The button labeled Hardware Reset will reset both the Communications and Control processor This type of reset will not destroy programming however it will drop your connection if done while online using the modem The Full Factory Reset will destroy all programming and restore the unit to factory default settings new out of box Do not click this button unless you are absolutely sure you have all programming backed up including SCADA 3000 unit programming Ladder program C Program DataLogger downloaded and the Event log downloaded SCADA 3000 User s Manual SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Motherboard Informat Figure 2
259. mponent on screen Multiline PageControl only Allows multiple levels of tabbed pages Ragged Right PageControl only Sizes tab to text width when tabwidth is set to 0 Show Hint Check to activate hint feature Style PageControl only Allows tabs to appear as buttons flat buttons or tabs 0 TabWidth PageControl only Sets the tab width Automatically adjusts when set to 0 TabHeight PageControl only Adjusts the tab height Automatically adjusts to text when set to Top Y coordinate from top edge of component on screen Visible Check to make box visible Width Horizontal size of box panel in pixels over ridden by Max Min Width values if any SCADA 3000 User s Manual MEX Design Figure 13 Examples of Box Page amp Panel PLACING A GRAPHIC ELEMENT ON THE PALETTE The Graphic Elements are Label Image Shape and Bevel Figure 14 Graphic Tab Label creates a static label you can use to name any object on your screen or place any other unchanging text on your palette You can alter size font and color Labels can be placed either adjacent to or on top of images Image You can select custom bitmap representations of many more shapes containers and devices than are listed on the tabs including vector drawn images Clicking on Image places an empty square on the palette surface From the Property Editor select Picture Use the pulldown menu to open an Image form Select Open the open folder button a
260. ms and Ladder programs must be saved separately See Chapters 17 and 18 for more information By saving your programming you will be able to reprogram the unit quickly in the event that the unit gets damaged and needs to be replaced It is also convenient if you have multiple units that need to be programmed similarly because you can load the same programming file into multiple units To save your programming click File and then Save Programming from the main menu while on line with a unit Enter a name for the file name and click Save To load programming into a unit go on line and from the main menu click File then Load Programming Remember that C programs and Ladder programs must be loaded separately Be sure to allow register verification to complete before loading or saving a programming file Note Voice messages cannot be saved These must be recorded into each individual unit CONNECTING To access programming information in the SCADA 3000 double click the SCADA 3000 soft ware icon to bring up the Sensaphone Control Center form Click on the RTUs button to bring up the Unit Database form Select which unit you wish to program or click on the NEW button to create a new unit see Chapter 9 for information on setting up a new unit Click on the ONLINE button The Connecting form will appear followed by the Main Programming form see figures 1 and 2a below unt SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant File Status Programming Modules D
261. much to adjust it by and for how long There are numerous articles and texts available that provide detailed analysis on how to set these parameters If you are new to setting up a PID control process you may want to research this topic further For our purposes we will cover the basic concepts of PID tuning The PID algorithm is made up of three terms that are added together to produce an output The three terms are the proportional integral and derivative terms Chapter 17 PID Programming Controller Output Proportional Integral Derivative Term Term Term The proportional term is computed by taking the difference between the current input value and the set point commonly referred to as the error and multiplying it by the Proportional tuning factor Kp The higher the value of Kp the more influence this parameter has on the controller output The integral term is computed by taking the integral of the error over a recent time interval and multiplying it by the Integral tuning factor Ki The higher the value of Ki the more influence this parameter has on the controller output The derivative term is computed by taking the derivative of the error signal and multiplying it by the Derivative tuning factor Kd The higher the value of Kd the more influence this param eter has on the controller output When the tuning factors are set correctly the system will maintain the set point without taking too long and without excessive overshoot o
262. must be an input from a Pulse Count Module Definitions MCE Thousand cubic feet MCF d Thousand cubic feet per day MBTUs Thousand BTUs British Thermal Units Chapter 18 Gas Flow Measurement PSIA Pounds per square inch absolute CALCULATED INFORMATION The SCADA 3000 will calculate and display instantaneous and accumulated data for each meter run In addition this data can be stored in the unit s datalogger by entering the UAF for the value you want logged See the Datalogging section of Chapter 11 for more information To view the calculated values click on the Current Status tab The following form will appear SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Flow Rate Setup Figure 4 Current Status tab Listed below are descriptions of the data units of measure and frequency of calculation for each parameter shown on the Current Status tab Real time Flow Rate MCF d Volumetric flow rate computed once per minute Hourly Data updated on the hour Volume MCF Total volume of gas flow over the last full hour Total BTUs MBTUs Total BTUs over the last full hour Flowing Minutes Total number of minutes of gas flow over the last full hour Gas is determined to be flowing if the differential pressure is greater than or equal to the Low Flow Cutoff see Channel Setup Average Differential Pressure in of H O Only averaged during flowing minutes last full hour Average Static Pressure PSIA Only averaged during
263. n Open relay the second to a Closed relay The units will be displayed on the screen however they will not be spoken during a status or alarm report For example Disabled Enabled would indicate Disabled for an Open Chapter 10 Generic Programming contact and Enabled for a Closed contact See following figure SCADA Custom Units ES UAF 0 0B 1 0 Name New Label Disabled Enabled X Cancel Figure 9 Custom Units Output The last column is labeled Forced Status The Forced Status gives you the ability to set the output for automatic control or manual control The three choices are Not Forced On or Off When set to Not Forced the output is controlled automatically from either the C or Ladder program The other two options On closed and Off open will manually force the output to these states When set to On or Off the outputs cannot be controlled automatically and can only be changed from the software UAF Inputs and Outputs can be referenced within the SCADA 3000 using the individual channel s physical address The physical address is referred to as the UAF or Universal Address Format The identifying UAF for each channel is listed on the left column of all screens on the I O form The UAF format is used extensively in the SCADA 3000 for reading writing referencing or assigning parameters They are required when programming Alarms Voice messages Datalogging PID control C programs Ladder programs and Gas Flow
264. n a battery is ordered it will arrive with a screw kit 3 10 32 screws 3 nuts and 3 lockwashers and appropriate battery bracket The bracket is designed to be mounted with the restraining bar either on top or on the bottom of the battery depending upon mounting environment For bracket mounting dimensions see Figures 3 and 4 3 3 SCADA 3000 User s Manual n M Enns 0 25 dia lt 2 205 lt 2 205 gt Figure 3 Bracket for 5 2 AH battery FGD 3200 18AH BATTERY 0 25 dia Figure 4 Bracket for 18AH battery FGD 3210 MODEM AND VOICE BOARDS Both the FGD 3400 Modem card and the FGD 3500 Voice Board are optional components of the Sensaphone SCADA 3000 Most people will choose to have these features factory installed when they purchase their unit However if you determine after purchasing that you wish to add either Voice or Modem function we include instructions on installing both You can also use these instructions to remove the modem card or voice board for servicing Modem Card Installation The modem card is required if you want your SCADA 3000 unit to provide real time input output information via phone line send fax alarms and reports contact alphanumeric pagers or 34 Chapter 3 Hardware Installation send E mail The modem card utilizes internationally accepted standard modulation methods and protocols It features the ease of Plug and Play instal
265. n example of what SCADA 3000 might say during a typical voice dialout Hello this is ID number Custom ID message Alarm Channel 1 is too high It is now 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit Hello this is ID number Custom ID message Alarm Channel 1 is too high It is now 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit Hello this is ID number Custom ID message Alarm Channel 1 is too high It is now 82 90 degrees Fahrenheit Enter acknowledgment code Chapter 11 Programming for Phone Applications In this example the number of Voice Message Repetitions was set to three Note If the call reaches an answering machine the message will be recorded but SCADA 3000 will be talking over your outgoing message so you will probably lose part of the first alarm message repetition Alarm Dialout Numeric Pager When dialing out to a destination programmed as Pager SCADA 3000 leaves a number usually the unit s own phone number on the display of a numeric pager IMPORTANT When dialing out to a phone number programmed as Pager SCADA 3000 DOES NOT speak a voice message It calls the pager company or service enters the number to be displayed on the pager then hangs up Alarm Dialout Alphanumeric Pager When dialing out to a destination programmed as Alpha SCADA 3000 leaves a text message up to 80 characters long on the display of an alphanumeric pager IMPORTANT When dialing out to a phone number pr
266. n input that is reading too low try entering 1 02 for the calibration factor You can continue to adjust the calibration by trial and error until the reading is accurate or you can compute the percent error directly and enter the calibration factor accordingly UAF Inputs and Outputs can be referenced within the SCADA 3000 using the individual channel s physical address The physical address is referred to as the UAF or Universal Address Format The identifying UAF for each channel is listed on the left column of all screens on the I O form The UAF format is used extensively in the SCADA 3000 for reading writing referencing or assigning parameters They are required when programming Alarms Voice messages SCADA 3000 User s Manual Datalogging PID control C programs Ladder programs and Gas Flow See Universal Address Format earlier in this chapter for more detailed information on the UAF format OUTPUTS The SCADA 3000 has 8 relay outputs on the main board which can be controlled either manu ally or automatically via C or Ladder programs Io access the Outputs programming form click on the Motherboard Outputs button from the toolbar The following form will appear SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant 1 0 Points cf x Motherboard 8 Relay Outputs 1 0 Status 1 0 Setup UAF 1 0 Name Value Min Max 0 0 0 fut Running 0 0 1 Pump Running 0 0 2 Pump 43 Stopped 0 0 3 f lam Hom of 0 0 4 Eme
267. n of each is described below The UAF Dynamic Component allows you to change a property of another component to the value of a datapoint To use this option select the datapoint to be used as the source and then select the component and property to be changed on the properties menu The Dynamic Label Component allows you to display internal elements of the strip chart such as the maximum Ymax and minimum Ymin values of a datapoint on the strip chart See Gauges Tab for adding a strip chart To use this feature select the Strip Chart from the DynComponent list and then select the element to be displayed from the DynProperty list DynAlert allows you to monitor the property value of one component source and to change the property of another component destination when the source value is logically compared to a threshold equal to less than greater than etc and is found to be true SCADA 3000 RT Builder olx File Edit Forms Help Data Group Graphic DataPoint Elec Rotate Contain Valve Gauge AudVid Dynamic 0 1 0 1 0 1 REGS al Dynamic DynLabel Component DynAlert Figure 27 Dynamic Tab 14 29 SCADA 3000 User s Manual 14 30 Properties Alert Interval DynAlert default 1 Align To align graphic component to edges of the palette area alBottom Stretches the component across the bottom of the palette alClient Fills the palette with the component Useful for adding a backgroun
268. n the number will increase For example a DataPointValue component gets the name DataPointValue The part of the name increases by one each time a new point is added to the screen The Component Name can be viewed on the property form when the component is selected I O points are referenced in the script program using a combi nation of the Component Name and the Component Property The properties of a component are those listed on the property form The format for referencing I O points or components in your script program is ComponentName ComponentProperty As an example if you were going to reference the numerical value of an Input on your Real time screen you would use the DataPointValue component The property you would read or write would be the value property So the complete tagname would be DataPointValuel value You use the tagnames to read and write to I O in your Distributed Control program Sample Application Suppose you have two SCADA 3000 units one at Location A the other at Location B At location A there is a water tank with a level transducer connected to the SCADA 3000 At Location B there is a pump which is connected to an output on the SCADA 3000 When the pump is turned on at Location B water will be pumped into the tank at Location A A host computer is set up so that it is continuously online with both SCADA 3000 units A Real time screen is created which displays the level in the tank and the On Off status of t
269. nates having sixty lines of programming to 16 1 SCADA 3000 User s Manual get a total of all the minute readings The x serves to automatically read in the next value for each element in the array For example The value of x is 6 meaning it is minute 6 incremented in step 4 The value of input 0 for minute 6 will be read into the array and added to the total of the other 5 minutes The value of input 0 at minute 6 is 70 Therfore numbers 6 70 If the previous total was say 351 then total 351 70 The new total is 421 total 421 6 When x reaches 60 the FOR loop is finished and the average is calculated average total 60 ERROR HANDLING When a program is compiled it is scanned for language related errors When an error is en countered the ERROR is displayed followed by the line number The line number may not be the exact line that contains the error Sometimes an error is detected a line or two after the actual mistake If an error occurs while compiling the compiler aborts It is possible to pass the compiler with no errors but receive an error when the program is running A run time error occurs when the syntax of a built in function is incorrect When a run time error occurs the program will not run correctly Listed below are the possible compiling errors Description Syntax Semicolon expected Unbalanced braces Parentheses expected While expected Quote expected Variable not found Too m
270. nations to at tempt to deliver either an alarm or a report Programmable range 0 100 calling rounds Default setting 100 calling rounds Alpha Pager Speed This is the baud rate of the data connection between SCADA 3000 and your alphanumeric pager service Programmable settings 300 1200 2400 Default setting 1200 Voice Repetitions The number of times SCADA 3000 repeats the alarm message during a dial out alarm call Programmable range 0 10 Default setting 2 Advanced Button Clicking on this button brings up the Adavanced Dialout form The form handles three user settings PC Dialout is for use on SCADA 3000 units connected to radio networks Checking this box allows the connected PC to handle the Alarm Dialout calling You must have both a speaker phone modem and sound card installed in your PC for you to use the PC alarm dialout feature Alarm Dialing Priority When checked this allows the SCADA 3000 unit to override any current PC communications in order to make phone calls when an alarm is triggered Email Delivery Settings The radio buttons here let you choose between the default phone number or a different number for Emails See Chapter 21 Email Server Option for more informa tion Chapter 10 Generic Programming CALL RECEPTION SETTINGS Rings Until Answer This is the number of times SCADA 3000 will let the phone ring before it answers an incoming call Note that the unit will not answer a call if someone is on line t
271. nclude information from almost any parameter stored in the SCADA 3000 Besides the general items selected on the Voice Settings form you can also include information on Inputs Outputs Timers Counters Bits Ladder Variables C Variables and Gas Flow You decide which items are reported by selecting them from a master list of all available data points These items may be reported using the canned message descriptions or you may assign a custom message to each item Return to the Voice Setup form This time choose the Status UAES tab SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Voice Setup 1 0 0 Level Well 1 1 0 1 Level Well 2 1 0 2 Inflow D 0 CH 1 0 9 MOD 0 CH 9 1 0 10 MOD 0 CH10 1 0 11 MOD 0 CH11 1 0 12 MOD 0 CH12 Figure 3 Voice Status UAFs Tab The box on the left contains a list of all Available data points in a particular category Use the pop up menu above it to select the category of data point list you want to see Chapter 11 Programming for Phone Applications Available UAFs Inputs y 10 1 Motherboa Inputs EET Outputs 10 7 Motherboa C Variables 0 8 MotherboalGas Flow 0 9 Motherboard Input 9 Figure 4 Status UAFs pop up menu In each category highlight the data point s you want to use and then click on the top 33 button in the middle column to move your choices to the Selected data points list on the right If you make a mistake you can highlight the data point you don t wan
272. nd color visible only if you choose bmOpaque above Constraints Limits the maximum and minimum size of the element on the palette MaxHeight Sets the maximum height 0 disables this property MaxWidth Sets the maximum width 0 disables this property MinHeight Sets the minimum height 0 disables this property MinWidth Sets the minimum width 0 disables this property Datapoint Assigns the element to an I O point within a SCADA unit Datapoint Enter the datapoint UAF or click in the Datapoint box above and then click the button at the end of the box to display the Datapoint selection form SCADA Select the SCADA unit from which the datapoint information is coming Font Sets the default font for labels and text Click in the font box then click the small button at the end of the box to select a font Charset Specifies the character set of the font Color Sets the color of the text Height Sets the height of the font object in pixels If you wish to use a specific point size you should set the size property Pitch Can be set to one of three values fpDefault fpFixed or fpVariable Using fpDefault as the pitch value will cause the default pitch style to be used with the font The fpFixed and fp Variable values can be used to explicitly set the pitch a value of fpFixed causes each character in the font to have the same width monospacing while a value of fp Variable allows different characters within a font to have unique
273. nd locate your real time bitmap collection Choose an image you want to place on the palette See the figure below New_1 Design Figure 15 Bitmap tank graphic placed on palette Note You can add your own graphics to those supplied The images should be saved as 8 bit uncompressed BMPs Select Stretch from the Property Editor to make the graphic fit into the space on your palette You can pull distort and shrink the bitmap to make it fit as you like Choose Transparent if you want to make the plain white background invisible 14 10 Chapter 14 RealTime Screen Design New_1 Design Figure 16 Bitmap graphic linked to I O Progress Bar and AGauge You can make bitmap images more animated by adding Dynamic Labels and GaugeLevel ob jects Dynamic labels are numerical labels that represent I O values and update continuously GaugeLevel objects are dynamic bar gauges that can be placed on top of images to indicate high low levels The example below shows a bitmap image of a well with a dynamic label showing the level in feet a patterned ContainerFill and static labels New_1 Run Chestnut Street Plant Figure 17 Bitmap Well with GaugeLevel The third button on the Graphics tab Shape places a simple geometrical shape on your palette On the Propery Editor select the Shape box to change to a different shape The default shape is a rectangle Bevel the last button creates a beveled shape You use Shape and S
274. ne using a WHILE loop main if read_uaf input 0 1 0 write uaf output 0 3 0n while read uaf input 0 1 20 write uaf output 0 3 0ff In this program when input 1 closes output 3 will be turned on The program will hold output 3 on as long as input 1 is closed Unfortunately this program will get stuck in the WHILE loop waiting for input 1 to open Critical actions may be missed because the program was forced to wait Listed below is the same program written using a straight through approach Only IF statements SCADA 3000 User s Manual main if read_uaf input 0 1 0 write uaf output 0 3 0n if read_uaf input 0 1 1 write uaf output 0 3 off In this case when input 1 closes output 3 will be turned on and then continue with the rest of the program If input 1 opens output 3 will be turned off This program cannot get held up in a WHILE loop Please note that these examples are greatly simplified for this discussion and are only intended to demonstrate the dangers that are possible when using WHILE loops C PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES Example 1 Checking for alarms The following lines of code will check to see if Alarm 9 exists If read uaf alarm 9 0 0 an alarm exists on alarm channel 9 else no alarm on channel 9 Example 2 Checking for low level alarms The following lines of code will check to see if a low level
275. ng as the name does not begin with a number In addition to letters and numbers the underscore character may also be used in a variable name but it cannot be the first character of the variable name You cannot have spaces in the middle of a variable name The following are valid variable names float average float outside temp float condition1 float contact12 The following are not valid variable names float 3temp float average result per day float inside room float timer 4 The SCADA 3000 C language has other tools available to construct your C program One of the most important tools is the if statement The if statement is used to make a decision whether or not to execute a sequence of statements Example The following program will turn on output 0 only if x is greater than 100 which in this case is true When the condition in the if statement is true the program continues through the statements inside the if braces If the condition was not true the program skips the block of statements float x main x 120 if x gt 100 write uaf output 0 0 on The else statement can be used with the if statement and gives instructions on what to do e when the if statement is false Example In the following program if x is greater than 100 then output 0 on the main board will be turned on If x is not greater than 100 then output 0 on the main board will be turned off
276. ng from 0 Rung transi tions can be caused by events occurring in the program internal logic or by external field devices When rung conditions for a CTD instruction have made a false to true transition the COUNT value is deccremented by one provided that the rung contain ing the CTD instruction is evaluated between these transitions The ability of the counter to detect false to true transitions depends on the speed frequency of the incoming signal see ladder timing specifications The COUNT value is retained when the rung conditions again become false The COUNT can only be set to zero using the RES RESET instruction that has the same address as the counter The counter underflows at 32768 but will continue counting from 32767 if not reset The counter bits are updated as follows ENABLED Set when rung is true and reset when rung is false Also reset from a RES RESET ladder instruction DONE Set when the COUNT is greater than or equal to the PRESET value Reset when COUNT is less than PRESET UNDERFLOW Set when the COUNT decrements below 32768 Resets when the COUNT is incremented greater than or equal to 432768 with a CTU instruction or by the RES RESET instruction The CTD address identifies the register where the COUNT value is stored The counter address can only reference one of the 64 internal counters N 0 through N 63 Right click on the instruction and choose Select Counter A list of the 64 counters will be displayed
277. ng phone calls to units you must set up a polling schedule for each unit and enable the master polling control from the polling setup Appendix H Troubleshooting form See the Polling Section of the Phone Programming chapter for instructions My SCADA 3000 unit got damaged and had to be replaced Can I use the original unit s saved programming to quickly program the replacement unit Yes To quickly program the replacement SCADA 3000 do the following 1 First make sure all the correct hardware connections and settings have been made This includes wiring up inputs including jumper shunt settings outputs communication bus power supply backup battery etc 2 Click the RTU button on the Sensaphone Control Center toolbar The UNIT DATA BASE form will appear 3 Choose the original SCADA 3000 unit from the text box 4 Click Online 5 Once a connection has been established the SCADA 3000 Unit Name Error form pops up Since you are loading saved programming into a new unit select Use Name in Database This copies the unit name from the saved file to the new SCADA 3000 unit 6 From the SCADA 3000 RTU form NOT the Sensaphone Control Center form select File gt Load Programming Select the programming file you wish to load into the replace ment SCADA 3000 unit then click the Open button All of the programming informa tion saved in the s3k file will be transferred to the SCADA 3000 unit 7 Set the
278. ngs alone If it s either too conservative or too aggressive then adjust one or more of the tuning constants to compen sate and watch how it handles the next error and so forth This is not easy as changing one tuning constant will likely affect one or both of the others as the rate and degree of error and compensation change Chapter 18 Gas Flow Measurement Chapter 18 GAS FLOW MEASUREMENT The SCADA 3000 has the capability of measuring natural gas flow Calculations for up to four meter runs can be performed simultaneously The SCADA 3000 supports two methods of gas flow measurement orifice plate and positive displacement turbine meter Note that gas flow measurement using positive displacement requires a Pulse Count Module FGD 3020 The computations used when measuring gas flow with an orifice plate are in accordance with A G A Report No 3 The computations used when measuring with a turbine meter follow A G A Report No 7 Both calculations incorporate A G A Report No 8 Supercompressibility compensation The A G A standards and respective revisions to which the SCADA 3000 is designed are listed below A G A Report No 3 Third Edition August 1992 A G A Report No 7 First Revision November 1984 A G A Report No 8 Second Edition 1992 CAUTION The SCADA 3000 is NOT approved or classified as an intrinsically safe device The SCADA 3000 should never be installed in hazardous locations The use of intrinsically safe
279. ning and Stopping Ladder Execution in Chapter 15 SCADA 3000 User s Manual VIEWING THE C VARIABLES From the Main Programming form choose Programming gt Variables or click on the Ladder and C Variables Button This will bring up the following form EE SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Variables Figure 5 Variables Form This form will show the real time values for 16 C variables at a time Each variable UAF along with the variable name will be displayed Use the Up Down arrows to flip through the pages to access the variables you wish to view Forcing a Value You can force C variable values for debugging purposes or to change the value of a constant To change the value just double click on the value you wish to change The following form will appear float lead on Current Value 12 00 NewVaue 5 e Figure 6 Value Form Type in the new value in the box and click OK The variable will immediately become the new value From the C Variables screen you can view all of your programmed variables in real time DIFFERENCES BETWEEN STANDARD C AND SCADA 3000 C For those of you who are familiar with C programming note that there are some differences between standard C and SCADA 30005 C compiler The following items will be helpful to be aware of 1 In SCADA 3000 every IE ELSE FOR DO and WHILE must have a set of brackets after it Chapter 16 C Programming 2 Condition clauses
280. ns bus is not properly wired The communications bus wiring requires a 4 conductor cable Two conductors are used for the A amp B pair and the other two are used for the Y amp Z pair Make sure the wiring is reversed between the expansion modules and the main unit but remains straight through between the modules See Chapter 7 I O Expansion Modules for Appendix H Troubleshooting more information on communications Bus Termination There is an Expansion Module bus address conflict Up to 15 I O expansion modules may be connected to the SCADA 3000 main unit to provide additional inputs and or outputs Each module must be configured with its own unique address using the BUS ADDRESS jumpers See the user s manual supplement supplied with the I O expansion module for information on setting BUS addresses There may be a loose or open connection in the communications bus wiring All 4 wires must be connected to an expansion module for the SCADA 3000 main unit to communicate with it Check for an open bus connection by using a DC voltmeter and checking the voltage between the Y and Z terminals on the SCADA 3000 MAIN UNIT If all the bus connections are com plete you will see about 2 4 Volts DC If you see 4 5 Volts DC there is an open bus connection somewhere Why won t my Ladder Logic program run The CTRL switch on the SCADA 3000 unit is in the Disable position Why won t my C program run The CTRL switch on the SCADA 3000 unit is in
281. nt 22 6 Computer Requirements 22 1 Programming Destinations 22 5 6 Sample Alarm Dialout Sequence 22 6 Alphanumeric Pager 22 7 Fax amp Email 22 7 Numeric Pager 22 7 Voice 22 6 7 SCADA 3000 Programming for 22 3 5 Voice Messages 22 4 5 Software Setup 22 1 3 Email Settings 22 2 3 Modem Commands 22 2 Telephone Voice Volume 22 3 Phone Line Applications Programming for 11 Destinations 11 1 5 PID Programming 17 1 4 PID Algorithm 17 2 4 Tuning 17 3 4 Polling 11 29 see also Internet Web Status Polling Changing the Schedule 11 31 Setting Up a Schedule 11 29 31 R Radio Modem Applications 12 Communicating with SCADAs 12 6 Configuring SCADA 3000 for 12 1 2 Flow Control 12 2 Host Computer Setup 12 2 5 Selecting Radio Modems 12 1 Troubleshooting 12 6 7 Real Time Output Control 14 31 Real Time Screen Design 14 AudVid Tab 14 27 29 Contain Tab 14 21 23 Datapoint Tab 14 13 17 Properties for Datapoint Alert 14 16 Properties for DataPointShape 14 16 Properties for Labels Values 14 14 15 Dynamic Tab 14 29 31 Editing 14 1 3 Electrical Tab 14 17 19 Index 3 SCADA 3000 User s Manual Gauge Tab 14 25 27 Setting Up Gauges 14 25 Setting up Strip Charts 14 25 Graphic Tab 14 10 13 Group Tab 14 7 10 Loading for Editing 14 32 Palette 14 1 7 Advanced Properties 14 5 7 Basic Properties 14 3 5 Placing Objects on 14 4 7 Right click tools 14 6 7 Sizing 14 1 Rotate Tab 14 19 21 Running 14 32
282. nts are placed inside the braces and end with a semicolon For example main write uaf output 0 0 0n This program will turn on output relay 0 on the main board 3 In the C language numbers are stored in what are called variables A variable must be defined before the main function SCADA 3000 allows you to have up to 1024 variables intx main x 12 In this program we defined a variable called x and set its value equal to 12 Here x is defined as an integer SCADA 3000 s language can define variables as characters char integers int or floating point numbers float A character can hold a value from 128 to 127 and an integer can hold a value from 32 768 to 32 767 Both characters and integers must be whole numbers A floating point number is one that can have a fractional part i e numbers after the decimal point Floating point numbers can be very large or very small generally between 107 and 10 Generally speaking there is no advantage to using variables as int or char types within the SCADA 3000 and examples from this point on will use only variables of the type float The following program will set x equal to the value of input 0 on the main board float x main x read_uaf input 0 0 Chapter 16 C Programming In many of the examples in the chapter we use x and y as variable names The variable names can be up to 15 characters long Numbers can also be used as lo
283. nual a Click to check Enable Port for each Comm Port you are setting up b Select the Type of communication you will be using to communicate with the SCADA 3000 Serial Port Phone Modem or Radio Modem c Select appropriate baud rate for the modem or SCADA 3000 connected to the port The SCADA 3000 DCE serial port defaults to 38400 bps d Click OK when yov ve finished configuring the ports to close this form Create New Unit 1 From Contol Center form Click on the RTUs button or select File RTUs The Unit Data base form appears Unit Database Al x Unit Information Select Unit Connects on Comm 2 Chestnut Street Plant m Phone Number 610 558 6677 Last Login 2 2 1999 11 03 16 AM OIN X Delete More Info m UA Online t mamme Y Close Figure 3 Unit Database form 2 Click on New Create New Unit olx Unit Information Select Comm Poit C Comm 1 Local Unit Description Chestnut Street Plant f Comm 2 disabled Phone Number 610 668 6677 Comm 3 Phone Modem Comm 4 disabled Slave ID fi C Comm 5 disabled C Any Phone Modem XK Enea Figure 4 New Unit form 3 Type in the name you want to assign the new unit 4 Iype in the phone number or if on a radio network set the Slave ID Note If you are on a Phone communication network and have only one unit per Comm port the slave IDs can all be set to 1 witho
284. nutes the recognition time will start over from 0 the next time the pump turns on Variable Alarm A calculation within a C program computes the average volume of material traveling through a pipe This variable is referenced as the input source for an alarm The calculation must result in a value that exceeds the programmed alarm limits for the programmed recognition time before an alarm will occur When an alarm is detected three things happen 1 If any of the dialout destinations are pro grammed and enabled the unit will begin dialing 2 A record of the alarm will be entered into the event log 3 The alarm status will be set to reflect the type of alarm 1 for a general alarm 2 for a low level alarm 3 for a high level alarm See Chapter 10 for more detailed information regarding UAFs To program alarm information click on Programming gt Alarms or click on the Alarms button on the toolbar The alarm status form will appear SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Alarms mif x Alarm Status Alarm Setup Notification Alarm Name 0 High Level Well 1 State No Alarm UAF 4 0 Status Okay 10 0 Level Well1 300 00 Inches Y DK 4 Next Alarm Page 1 of 64 Figure 11 Alarm Status Alarm programming includes three screens Status Setup and Notification The Status screen shows the current state of any already programmed alarms To check on them use the arrow buttons in the lower left to move through the list
285. o that they accurately describe the signals you will be measuring and controlling Individual Input and Output names can be programmed in addition to units of measure Custom tables may be configured for linear 0 5 volt and 4 20 mA transducers Outputs can be forced On or Off as needed in both manual mode or automatically via Ladder or C program To program I O information either click the Programming menu and choose I O Points Or you can click on one of the three Main Unit I O Programming buttons the first two for inputs and the latter for Outputs aaa The following form will appear ESCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant 170 Points Bika Motherboard 8 Univ Inputs 0 7 1 0 Setup Table and Cal UAF 1 0 Name Min Max 1 0 0 flevelWelt 96 00 Inches 0 00 100 00 El 1 0 1 flevelWel2 144 00 Inches 0 00 144 00 a 1 0 2 iow 35 00 GPM 34 99 100 00 1 0 3 Oulow 30 00 GPM 29 99 100 00 El 1 0 4 water Temperature 61 00 Deg F 60 99 100 00 a 1 0 5 Pump 1 Runtime 45788 00 Seconds 0 00 457800 1 0 6 Pump2Runtime 32694 00 Seconds 0 00 sm 1 0 7 Fuellevel 32 00 Gallons 0 00 100 00 el 7 4 Next Page Page 1 of 18 Wak Figure 3 I O Points form The first page is the programming form for inputs 0 through 7 on the main unit corresponding to the first of the three Main Unit I O buttons Using the arrows in the bottom left corner of the form you can move to the next page s
286. o align panel page to edges of the palette area alBottom Stretches the panel across the bottom of the palette alClient Fills the palette with the panel alLeft Stretches the panel along the left edge of the palette alNone No realignment is applied Note this will not correct any other previously applied alignment alRight Stretches the panel along the right edge of the palette alTop Stretches the panel across the top of the palette Alignment Panel only Sets the justification of the text caption Anchors Sets one or more sides of the box as a positional anchor with respect to the edges of the palette akBottom Anchors the box a fixed distance from the bottom of the palette akLeft Anchors the box a fixed distance from the left side of the palette akRight Anchors the box a fixed distance from the right side of the palette ak Iop Anchors the box a fixed distance from the top of the palette AutoSize Panel only Check to fit the containing box to the elements it contains Bevel Inner Panel only Adjusts the appearance of the inner bevel Bevel Outer Panel only Adjusts the appearance of the outer bevel Chapter 14 Real Time Screen Design Caption Name for the box panel or page Color Color of the group container Panel only A custom list of colors for button surfaces Constraints Limits the maximum and minimum size of the box MaxHeight Sets the maximum height of the box 0 disables this property Max
287. o current alarm conditions none will show Online Options When the SCADA 3000 is online you can have a web page generated and uploaded according to the polling schedule you ve set up see Setting up a Polling Schedule for Web Status or you can select a time interval of your choosing by enabling the Every x minutes option When this option is selected a new web page is created and uploaded based on the time interval Local Web Pages amp Web Page Filenames Whenever a new web page is created the software will save a copy locally on your hard drive in addition to the one that is uploaded You can optionally change where the local copy is saved so that it can reside on a network server or Intranet server lo change where the local copy is saved click the Custom option and then click the Customize button to assign the web page a file location and name of your choice Note that the filename you use will also be assigned to the file uploaded via FTP WML web pages will be appended with the prefix wap For example if the filename was specified as Chestnut html the wml filename would be wapChestnut wml FTP Delivery Options Web pages for the selected SCADA 3000 can be sent via FTP to the default location or option ally they can be sent to another location Typically you will have all of your web pages hosted on the same internet server When you program your FTP settings from the Sensaphone Control Center you set up a syste
288. ogram checks the open closed status of the contact connected to the input If the contact is closed then the instruction is evaluated as true When the address represents a bit value of an instruction the program checks to see if the bit is ON If the bit is on then the instruction is evaluated as true The instruction executes in 2 8us and requires 24 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may be used with XIC instructions Inputs when configured as a contact closure Relay outputs Timer Status bits Done Running Enable Counter Status bits Done Count up enable Count down enable Overflow Underflow Ladder bits C variables when used as bit values 0 or 1 Gas Flow enable only XIO Instruction Examine if Open 10 1 8 1 This instruction is used to determine if a contact has opened or to check if a bit is OFE When the address represents a discrete input the program checks the open closed status of the contact connected to the input If the contact is open then the instruction is evaluated as true When the address represents a bit value of an instruction the program checks to see if the bit is OFF If the bit is OFE then the instruction is evaluated as true The instruction executes in 2 8us and requires 24 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may be used with XIO instructions Inputs when configured as a contact closure Relay outputs Timer Status bits Done Running Enable C
289. ogram runs control logic and each SCADA unit also runs its own specific control program Advantages e Sophisticated control can be attained along with localized control e Ifthe PC crashes or the distributed control program must be halted localized control can still be performed Disadvantages Multiple control programs must be written for both the host PC and each individual SCADA unit e Program maintenance could be difficult SAMPLE PROGRAM The following program illustrates simple passing of I O values from one SCADA unit to an other ESPA GORUEROGE ROBORE ROAD TOEAX BS Begin User Program PR te A O Pe Pa eT A A Vd Fo Bk Sample program which assumes that a Tank is located at site A anda Pump is located at site B The program passes the tanklevel from unit A to unit B where it is stored in a ladder variable This allows unit B to control the pump The On Off status of the pump is then sent back to unit A where it is also stored in a ladder variable Definitions DataPointValuel is the TankLevel at unit A i DataPointValue2 is the Pump Status at unit B DataPointValue3 is a Ladder Variable in unit A i DataPointValue4 is a Ladder Varaiable in unit B DataPointValue4 Value DataPointValuel Value Assigns DataPointValuel to DataPointValue4 DataPointValue3 Value DataPointValue2 Value Assigns DataPointValue2 to DataPointValue3 1 End User Program 23 11 SCADA 3000 Users Manual
290. ogrammed as Alpha SCADA 3000 DOES NOT speak a voice message It calls the pager company or service transmits the information to be displayed on the pager then hangs up Alarm Dialout Modem When dialing out to a destination programmed as Modem SCADA 3000 waits for the phone to be answered by a modem establishes a data connection then transmits its alarm message IMPORTANT When dialing out to a phone number programmed as Modem SCADA 3000 DOES NOT speak a voice message It is expecting the call to be answered by a PC running SCADA 3000 Windows software Once a connection is established the SCADA 3000 transmits the alarm information then hangs up Alarm Dialout Fax When dialing out to a destination programmed as Fax SCADA 3000 waits for the phone to be answered by a fax machine establishes a connection then faxes its alarm message IMPORTANT When dialing out to a phone number programmed as Fax SCADA 3000 DOES NOT speak a voice message It is expecting the call to be answered by a fax machine Once a connection is established the SCADA 3000 faxes the alarm information then hangs up Alarm Dialout E mail When dialing out to a destination programmed as E mail SCADA 3000 is pre programmed to call the toll free 800 number of the Phonetics E mail server system Once connected the unit delivers its alarm message to the E mail address programmed in the destination field IMPORTANT When
291. oller will depend on how the process responds to that controller s corrective efforts Processes that react instantaneously and predictably need no control feedback at all If you turn on a wall switch your ceiling light comes on A set amount of electricity arrives to power the illumination No feedback is required However the amount of electricity available for you to draw upon must remain relatively constant throughout the day or your lights and appliances will suffer from potentially problematic surges and blackouts as power rises and falls In a perfectly tuned system compensation would be instantaneous As that isn t possible the shifts aren t precisely predictable you see occasional and hopefully very brief brownouts during the lag between the network increased need for power and the controller s response to that need In a slow process with a long lag time before the process responds to the controller efforts the proportional term will come into play to keep the output high or low until the error is elimi nated This will cause a cumulative error over time and the integral term comes into play in fact in a slowly changing process it will come to dominate The controller generates output based on the history of accumulating errors and the variable overshoots the setpoint causing an error in 17 3 SCADA 3000 User s Manual the opposite direction If that integral tuning constant is not excessive then this rebound error w
292. olling information click OK General Set Up Next click on the Setup tab of the Polling Schedule form The screen shown below will appear Polling Schedule Figure 27 Polling Setup Tab This screen contains general polling set up parameters The Polling Enabled option is generally speaking the polling on off switch If you enable it all units in the polling schedule will be called at their respective times If you disable it polling is turned off and no units will be called If you check Enable polling on application startup box polling will be enabled every time the SCADA 3000 software is run If you do not check this box polling will be disabled at startup until you enable it manually Checking this box is useful if you want your computer to restart the polling process after it has rebooted for some reason such as loss of power or operating system malfunction You may adjust the number of times the software tries to connect to a unit if it happens to fail the first time Enter the number in the Retry Attempts box The default setting is 3 You may also select how long to wait before retrying by entering the time in minutes in the Failure Delay box The default time is 5 minutes When you have finished setting these param eters click OK The Results tab on the Polling Schedule form will store general polling related information regarding polling failures attempts etc CHANGING THE POLLING SCHEDULE If you wish to change the poll
293. ommunications The SCADA 3000 may be connected to a cellular phone for applications where a telephone line is unavailable Contact Phonetics for specific details To improve modem communications over a cellular link it is highly recommended that the host computer have a modem which supports enhanced cellular protocols commonly referred to as MNP10EC Several modem manufacturers sell modems with this feature However you must verify that your modem supports MNPIOEC to be absolutely sure The SCADA 3000 modem will connect using this protocol if MNP10EC is enabled To enable the protocol in your modem you must enter the Setup String shown below on the modem setup form To access this form select Comm and then Setup from the Sensaphone Control Center Form Next select the Comm port corresponding to your modem Click the Modem Setup button next to the Type field The form below will appear Modem Setup Select a Modem Select or Enter New Mala x Setup String arsi SEC 1 H1 M1 M Settings Dial Time Out 100 seconds Dial Retries 3 Inter Call Delay 30 seconds HW Flow Control Y X Cancel Figure 4 Modem Setup form Enter the Setup String as shown above to activate the MNP10EC protocol in your modem then click OK Your modem should connect to the SCADA 3000 using this protocol when you have finished Note This setup string may have to change depending upon your modem manufac turer
294. on of your process and have your I O values display on the screen in real time Several sample screens are included to give you some ideas and to demonstrate the various features of the software Building your own real time screen requires two steps 1 Creating the screen using the real time screen designer 2 Running the screen that actually logs into the selected units on the screen and begins updating the I O points in real time EDITING To run the Real time Screen Designer click Real time on the Control Center menu bar From the pulldown menu select Editor This will bring up the Real time Screen design menu the RT Builder From its menu bar select File and then New to start designing a new screen 2 SCADA 3000 RT Builder L Of x File Edit Forms Help System DataPoint Graphic Group Contain Rotate Elec Gauge Valve Audvid Dynamic NES a New 1 Z Figure 1 RT Builder form Note The R T button on the toolbar will open Real time in Run mode only which requires you to have a real time program already designed In general you will select items from the main RT Builder tabs and click drop them onto the palette then program properties for each one Note There are two ways to place an object on the palette You can simply double click on it where it appears in the tabs and it will drop onto a default position on the palette or you can click once on an icon to select it and then click once on the pal
295. one number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges To comply with this law you must enter the following information into your SCADA 3000 Date amp Time as shown in the System Programming section of this manual Name and telephone number to identify the source of the fax transmission as shown in the System Programming section of this manual General Requirements for all Automatic Dialers When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers 1 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call 2 Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evenings Canadian Department of Communications Statement Notice The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommuni cations network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company
296. onnecting form appears briefly as your computer connects to the unit The Main Programming form appears You may now begin programming The Register Verification process will run in the background until it finishes comparing the software in the computer with that in the RTU This procedure is required to ensure data integrity among multiple users of the unit The Register Verification status bar shows the down load progress and can be hidden or displayed at the user s discretion by clicking on View Register Verification from the main menu and selecting Show Register Verification If you choose not to view Register Verification the clock showing Local Unit Time indicates if you are communicating with the RTU If the time on the clock is not moving advancing then you are not in fact connected If you view Register Verification at that point you will not see any progress in the status bar System Security The SCADA 3000 includes a programmable security option which provides 4 levels of pass word secured user access to the system Up to 64 multi level user accounts and passwords can be set up to allow personnel the appropriate level of system access The 4 levels of user ac counts are described below Account Types Description Administrator A full access account recommended for the person responsible for managing programming amp securing the system This account provides full program ming access user account password management and the
297. op edge of the container Value Realtime datapoint value Visible Checkbox Check to make component visible Width Horizontal size in pixels overridden by Max Min Width values if any PLACING VALVE COMPONENTS ON THE PALETTE There are four valve components on the tab Valve Actuator Valve Valve Butterfly and Valve Meter 3 SCADA 3000 RT Builder File Edit Forms Help Data Group Graphic DataPoint Elec Rotate Contain Valve Gauge Audvid Dynamic ADIN Meter Actuator Butterfly Valve Figure 23 Valve Tab Properties Actuator Type Actuator only atAirMotor atElecMotor atHydraulic atSolenoid Align To align graphic component to edges of the palette area alBottom Stretches the component across the bottom of the palette alClient Fills the palette with the component Useful for adding a background graphic alLeft Stretches the component along the left edge of the palette alNone No realignment is applied Nore this will not correct any other previously applied alignment alRight Stretches the component along the right edge of the palette al Top Stretches the component across the top of the palette Anchors Sets one or more sides of the element as a positional anchor with respect to the edges of the palette akBottom Anchors the element a fixed distance from the bottom of the palette akLeft Anchors the element a fixed distance from the left side of the palette akRi
298. or each instruction are one in the same The instruction executes in 5 7us and requires 176 bytes The GROUP for this type is the counter number from 0 63 The ELEMENT specifies an individual function for the selected counter There are 7 functions associated with each timer Element Function Number Description Range of Values 0 Up Counter Enabled 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 1 Down Counter Enabled 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled Chapter 15 ladder Logic Programming 2 Counter Done 0 or 1 0 disabled 1 enabled 3 Counter Overflow 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled Counter Underflow 0 or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 5 Counter Preset 32 768 to 32 767 6 Counter Value 32 768 to 32 767 Examples C 0 0 This UAF indicates if Counter 0 is enabled or disabled C 19 7 References the current value of Counter number 19 The counter value and status bits can be viewed or changed from the Counter Status form To view the counter values click on the Ladder and C Variables button from the Toolbar on the Main Programming form Select the Counters tab In addition to viewing the state of the counter values you can also force changes by double clicking on the counter value you want to change A Change form will appear to let you enter a new value for the counter Use the Up Down arrows to flip through the pages to access the counters you wish to view CTD Count Down Counter This instruction counts down false to true rung transitions starti
299. orks is provided float numbers 60 array input 0 value for each minute int x index to the array Chapter 16 C Programming float total total of the input 0 values float average total 60 int oldminute minute counter main if oldminute minutes oldminute minutes numbers minutes read uaf input 0 0 total 0 for x 0 x lt 60 x x 1 total total numbers x average total 60 The following is a step by step explanation of the program 1 if oldminute minutes oldminute minutes This checks the value of minutes to see if a minute has passed If a minute has passed the value of oldminute is reset to the value of the new minute 2 numbers minutes read uaf input 0 0 This line sets the value of the variable numbers for a particular minute to the current value of input 0 For example It is 3 minutes into the hour The value of input 0 is 72 Therefore numbers minutes read_uaf input 0 0 is equal to numbers 3 72 3 total 0 This line initializes the variable total to zero 4 for x 0 x lt 60 x x 1 This line initializes the index variable x to zero checks to see if it is less than 60 runs the next line and then increments x by one This line creates a loop that runs the following line until x reaches 60 5 total total numbers x This line of the program is very important It elimi
300. ormation form Programming Administrator Last Login This form will set up a user account for the SCADA 3000 Type in your User Name select your Access Level by clicking the down arrow and choosing Administrator and then enter a password in the New Password and Re Type boxes Click OK An administrator account has now been created To enable security click on the SCADA 3000 Uses Access Security box on the User Accounts form The next time you log in you will need to know your user name and password User Log In with Security Enabled Once the user accounts have been configured and the security option enabled users who attempt to log into the unit will be required to enter their user name and password every time As an additional option users may choose to save their password so that they need only click the OK button to log in This option can be enabled on the unit log in form shown below To disable the remember password option uncheck the Remember My Password box on the System form Unit Logon Login User Name Joseph Smith Password jano Remember My Password J X on Figure 10 Unit Log on form Setting Up User Accounts Additional user accounts can only be set up by an Administrator To set up a user account first log in then click on the System button from the toolbar or select Programming followed by System from the main menu Click on the User Accounts button Select the next available user ac
301. other parts of the programming The name will also appear on faxes and E mail transmissions whenever an alarm or report is sent to the destination If you are entering a fax destination be sure to use the name of the person who you intend to receive the fax DESTINATION The actual telephone number or E mail address SCADA 3000 dials to deliver its report or alarm message The Destination field can be up to 64 characters long for E mail addresses and 50 digits for all other Dial Types and may consist of numbers letters and special dialing codes Numeric Pagers The SCADA 3000 can send alarm messages to numeric pagers It will automatically send its telephone number and the alarm number when dialing to a numeric pager All you have to do is enter the telephone number of your pager Example 301 565 2300 Note If your pager service is answered by a voice prompted message or if your pager service allows only a few seconds to enter a number before disconnecting you will need to enter addi tional programming See the Special Dialing codes section below Alphanumeric Pagers The SCADA 3000 can dial alphanumeric pagers to send alarm messages The SCADA 3000 will send the unit description telephone number input name and the real time input value To SCADA 3000 User s Manual program an alphanumeric pager destination enter the pager service data or modem phone number followed by the letter A and then the pager ID Example 1 610 555 4593 A
302. ou to remotely initiate a control sequence within your ladder program simply by adding statements that check the value of ladder variable 127 Once the desired logic has executed you can reset ladder variable 127 The main menu will be recited after each programming option To end your programming session simply hang up Hi 11 SCADA 3000 User s Manual To Hear a Status Report To hear a status report call the unit from a touch tone telephone and press any key immediately after the beep The unit will begin speaking a status report To hear a status report on site plug a telephone into the Voice Port jack The unit will begin speaking a report the moment you lift the handset ALARM PROGRAMMING The SCADA 3000 has the capability to alarm on 64 events An alarm event can be set from an input output variable or any value that has a UAF Each alarm has a programmable recognition time which must be met before the alarm truly exists Here are some examples Input Alarm An input temperature sensor exceeds its programmed high limit continuously for 2 minutes however the recognition time is programmed to be 5 minutes An alarm will not occur until the condition has persisted for 5 minutes Output Alarm An output pump is programmed to set an alarm if it stays on for more than 30 minutes a 30 minute recognition time The alarm will not be set unless the pump has been on for 30 continuous minutes If the pump shuts off after 28 mi
303. ounter Status bits Done Count up enable Count down enable Overflow Underflow Ladder bits C variables when used as bit values 0 or 1 Gas Flow enable only SCADA 3000 User s Manual OTE Instruction Output Energize DTE 0 H H d4 HH This instruction is used to turn on an output or a bit when rung conditions are true A typical output would consist of a relay or an indicator light OTE instructions are reset when rung conditions become false or the program is stopped and restarted The OTE instruction executes in 3 1us and requires 38 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may be used with OTE instructions Relay outputs Ladder bits OTL Instruction Output Latch t This instruction is used to latch an output or a bit when rung conditions are true The output will remain latched even if rung conditions become false A latched output OTL can only be turned off using the OTU Output unlatch instruction The OTL instruction executes in 3 1us and requires 42 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may be used with OTL instructions Relay outputs Ladder bits OTU Output Unlatch This instruction is used to turn off a latched output or bit when rung conditions are true Thereafter the output or bit remains off regardless of the rung condition until it is turned on typically by an OTL instruction in another rung The instruction executes in 3 1ys and re quires 42 bytes Following is
304. oups zones to accommodate work shift schedules There are 4 Call Zones to choose from To include a destination in a Call Zone check the appropriate box To set up Call Zones click on the Edit Zones button and the following form will appear Edit Calling Zones for Chestnut Street Plant x Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday 12 AM Zone 1 E Zone 2 B Zone 3 Zone 4 A wis Cancel Figure 16 Edit Zones form The Edit Calling Zones form divides up the 7 day week into 21 blocks of time To change the start and end time for each block drag the horizontal divider bars up or down as needed To 11 3 SCADA 3000 User s Manual reassign a block of time to a different Call Zone click inside the block until it matches the color of the desired zone To change the color of a zone double click on the zone s color square at the bottom of the form Select a new color from the palette then click the OK button The Zone configuration in figure 16 creates the following time slots Zone 1 Monday Friday 7 00am through 6 00PM Zone 2 Saturday Sunday 12 00AM through 11 59PM Zone 3 Monday Friday 12 00AM through 7 00AM and 6 00PM through 11 59PM Zone 4 Undefined In this example you could assign daytime emergency personnel to Zone 1 personnel on call during night time hours Mon Fri to Zone 2 and personnel on call on the weekend to Zone 3 ALARM CALL MODE The Alarm Call Mode de
305. owing minutes for the hour Chapter 10 Generic Programming 17 the hour from 0 23 over which the most recent hourly calculation was run 18 Energy for yesterday BTUs 19 Energy for last month BTUs Example G 0 6 real time flow rate for meter run 0 Alarms The SCADA 3000 has 64 programmable Alarms The Alarm UAF will return a number from 0 3 that will identify if an alarm exists or not and also if the alarm is a High level or Low level alarm High level and Low level refer to analog signals that moved above or below the pro grammed alarm limits The Group specifies which of the 64 Alarms is referenced The Ele ment field is not used and should be set to 0 The table below shows the value that will be returned for each alarm condition Value Description 0 No Alarm 1 General Alarm digital or closure 2 Low level Alarm 3 High level Alarm Examples A 0 0 This UAF references the alarm status for Alarm 0 A 19 0 This UAF references the alarm status for Alarm 19 Diagnostics The SCADA 3000 Main Unit and expansion modules maintain a set of data for diagnostic evaluation The Group number refers to the module address of the hardware in question A Group number of 0 identifies the Main Unit and Group numbers 1 15 correspond to module addresses 1 15 The Element specifies each individual diagnostic parameter The Element parameters are different for the Main Unit and the modules Listed below are the Element numbers and descriptions for t
306. p Contents docs c_program cnt Sample Program 2 pump alt Idr SamplesNLadderN2 pump alt Idr File is Missing Sample Program 4 pump alt ldr Samples Ladder 4_pump_alt ldr File is Missing x Files 22 Files Needed 13 Total Size 2571 K Figure 1 Internet Upgrade Main Window With the default settings in place you may verify retrieve and install the software upgrade as follows If you wish to change the default settings select Options from the File pulldown menu Verify Click this button to have the Upgrader program log in to the Phonetics server and compare the software version at Phonetics with the software version on your computer The Status list will be updated to reflect whether your files are up to date or fa newer version is available If a newer version is available and you would like to upgrade now click the Retrieve button Retrieve Click this button to download the newest software versions from the Phonetics server They will be saved to a folder on your computer called NewVer Install Click this button to install the files in the new version directory SCADA 3000 User s Manual OPTIONS From the File menu select Options The following form with 4 tabs should appear Figure 2 Options Local tab Local Tab This screen provides several options which allow the upgrade program to automatically execute certain functions A description of each is listed below Manual Operation Requires the user to manually v
307. p oq Aew souoz Inoj 0 dN spoured own 7 ou JO qovo 0 Jaquinu ouoz e jdde o3 nod sore 000 VI VOS UL 29M eu JO ASNO oy 1940 spoured oum c pormnuopr Mou savy IM sporred eurn oor pue 99M 19d s ep T o1og IUIS WV00 CT 01 WdQ0 9 poued Wa00 9 0 WvQ g Z POLI WV00 8 0 WVvQO CI POLISg 9Q p no sported own 29143 ou ONLUS SIY UT Wd 0 9 Je urdoq Leur poured SUTUDAD y pue Wv g 1 urgoq Aew poued Aep ou o durexo JOY po1ojuo 9q ueo euim SUTUDAD pue SUTUIOW o qeurure 13 04d e pue Wv Q z 1e sur3oq Aep 34L 99M ou NOYSNoIY posn oq ueo wy spoued our c OUT j1 ds oq ueo Aep moy pc AL SNINIAV IDO lId ANOZ TIVO TA SCADA 3000 User s Manual snjejg ue 130149 2 M O snjejg ure180 Ig Joppe T AMO O aseyo A Joneg oio O sogesso A sns SAID O uonduinsuo A ddng 1940 q ure A SAO O snjejg JOMO q URW 19 O Sue y Sunsixq IV 9UoN Ssuue y oio SACO TONI LAOdHA SO LVLS SogessoJA WIO SND YIM SISPSSIJA pouue yeods yodoy sns ur asessopy qI WoIsND ooy O yoday sns ur Jaquiny suoyg qI N O WO d 99IOA 890 103 p JOASS qN O seo Sururooug 10 PIOMSSP q ouo u MAL esf O vp90 zeo sosed uiojsn Jo soquinyy SONILIAS TVAANAO SHOVSSHIN HDIOA INOLSOO Y LAOdHAA SOLVLS ITA 1 8 VII CUSTOM VOICE MESSAGES Status UAF Alarm Description ajala fe e ag ajala fe S ag FEIO ILS Ia initia Moio loo Status UAF Alarm Description N co Sy 8 fe F c Dl l m u
308. pP ERRORES 4 HOIST VolttebleS adortus fant duce don ocu athe de ar pe Re lot ou aesanue E lune DR Rte 4 CPogam VORIGBIE i uta des heel ee ite star cA cui x t au i la ala hag 4 Gas OW MEME EE 4 Diagnoses DME Ce CET ee SAO 4 Comm Port Baud Rote tata tos GO ai DA dvi Coh toti t dit act oci d ast 5 A 5 ATARI dd 5 ATOM EIN SONS Keypad s a saaara asne tiene RA EA a AAE COR AR I a 6 SYSTEM STATU S cocto pr GO p Mo SEEK tada 6 RETURN chic statis A n dva Sos ouster erates alo ewe eei eco d Spir MOOR o 6 Chapter 14 REAL TIME SCREEN DESIGN ssccssssssscssscssscsccessessreeses 14 1 SUMMARY Es tao oa 1 EDITING a EC 1 Sizing Mi ads o ci Le PETE soo Ma O tans de eu a obs gual 3 SELECTING SCADA UNMS deiner let Feet ue vor ao ore e ees eC un hus eres 3 PLACING OBJECTS ON THE PALETTE tieni ak ee deni ai 4 Pasie ropare CENTRE SME AUIS rt ELLE URDU ENE TORRE TU MPa MM LU I ENS CU AE ER ad 5 e oro PT D TED 6 GROUPING COMPONENTS IN A BOX PANEL OR PAGE ssssseee ee 7 CONT ODE A D TOM 8 PLACING A GRAPHIC ELEMENT ON THE PALETTE si essssersssatsseeSucguanedaundncebeoaansaech ou o reas 10 Placing Datapoint Elements on the Faleffeiss occ da A RA 13 Properties Label Volue A O EEEE EEEE Erann 14 PLACING ELECTRICAL ELEMENTS ON THE PALETTE s i sesto eot pesi Er Me eee tec 17 PLACING ROTATING ELEMENTS ON THE PALETTE 1i eerte ono cor oneris 19 PLACING CONTAINER COMPONENTS ON THE PALETTE seseeneee 21 PLACING VALV
309. pecified by the first poll information and then stop Daily The software will connect with the selected unit the first time at the time and date specified by the first poll information and then schedule the next poll for the same time the following day Weekly The software will connect with the selected unit the first time at the time and date specified by the first poll information and then schedule the next poll for the same day and time the following week Monthly The software will connect with the selected unit the first time at the time and date specified by the first poll information and then schedule the next poll for the same date and time the following month Custom The software will connect with the selected unit the first time at the time and date specified by the first poll information and then schedule the next poll by Chapter 11 Programming for Phone Applications adding the amount of time specified in the custom time field to the time of the previous poll After selecting the polling interval choose which information you would like to download the Event Log and or the Data Log You may also choose to Reset the Data Log after downloading it to minimize the time of the call during the subsequent polls Note however that this will delete information in the SCADA 3000 s Data Logger preventing another user from connecting to the unit to retrieve the Data Log information When you have finished programming the p
310. ped ance of 120Q for example Phonetics part number FGD 0051 Belden 8132 or 9842 cable and should be routed away from AC cables and power supplies Use one pair for A amp B and the other pair for Z amp Y Figure 3 below shows how to connect the cable between the main unit and the modules Note how the wiring is reversed between the modules and the main unit but between modules the wiring is straight through Module Figure 3 Communications Bus Wiring The modules may be located up to 2000 feet away from the main unit Do not run AC power lines in the same cable or conduit as the communications wiring as this can cause data errors Bus Termination Both the SCADA 3000 main unit and the final module in the chain must be terminated A termination jumper is located on each device The modules if any branching off the main connection are not terminated While the main connection between the SCADA 3000 and the most distant module can be 2000 ft the individual modules in between are wired on branches called Stub lines Stub lines can be no more than 50 ft from the main line See Figure follow ing 2000 ft Maximum length SCADA 3000 Bus Termination IN Stub Lines 50 Max length Bus Termination OUT Bus Termination OUT Figure 4 Communication Cable Wiring and Bus Termination 7 3 SCADA 3000 User s Manual 7 4 Module Types Both input and output modules can be connected
311. proce dures outlined on the previous page For Technical Support questions you may call Phonetics Technical Service Department at 610 558 2700 or by E mail at support sensaphone com Appendix L Programming Forms SPA NP Oy Tyo i i i lI 3l li liceolal iwlolvelolo 10338 1 UOBB IQIUEO YSIH AQEL MOT AQEL sun od AL SWEN WO sND spuosas sojnur q sno sdury SJOA dD ISA S19117 suoyey 51994 sayouy dD Toq Y Seq suluuny peddojs peddojg Suruuns VO HO HOMO uedo peso peso p uedQ euoN seoroqo JU 9 Sop MOI Y S9p MOT VUIOZ Y NOA S Q OWT uny onso sadAj du ST 0 DNININVYDONd SLOdNI II qro9 v s JOMSUY IIT SSurs OG UUUIOT 9 tod suonnodoy 2210A QUO paads Joseg oloumnue TO OTHER NT UOTIALIOSOG WU poods Jose o ydiy ndi I Aue Jl xijo Ig eld BY pneg es nd oeuoj pouio A PIG o COT PHY BUOYA TBLIAS adA J NOILVAADIANOS I SW304 ONIWWVYDOUd 1 xipuaddy SCADA 3000 User s Manual 3kE CI mI Al ei ml vol c uO0 JO 19N Sn E S p92 10 q PSO YSIH 9IqET MO T BL Sy AL 9UIEN WO SNZD SPUODIS SIAMUTA SINOH sdury SICA INdD ISA SINT suoyyey 51994 SUJ D Toq Y Seq Suruuny paddo s peddo1g Suruuns UO HO HOMO uedo peso peso 5 ued uoy seoroqo NU Aey SedAT mdmo 0 DNININVYDONd SLNALAO TI l 2 IV ALARMS PROGRAMMING 0 31 Dialout Enable Y N Limit High Limit Reset Recog Type N O
312. r 0 is enabled or disabled T 12 4 references the current timer value of timer number 12 The timer value and status bits can be viewed or changed from the Timer Status form To view the timer values click on the Ladder and C Variables button from the Toolbar on the Main Programming form Select the Timers tab In addition to viewing the state of the timer values you can also force changes by double clicking on the timer value you want to change A Change form will appear to let you enter a new value for the timer Use the Up Down arrows to flip through the pages to access the timers you wish to view TOF Timer Off Delay This instruction is used to turn an output ON or OFF after the rung has been false for a preset time interval The specified timer starts running when the rung status changes from true to false The timer starts at 0 and counts up to the PRESET value The TIMER VALUE will continue to increment as long as the rung remains false until it reaches the PRESET value If the rung becomes true then the timer stops and resets to 0 regardless of whether the timer has timed out The timebase for the TOF instruction is 01 seconds for example PRESET 500 is 5 seconds The timer bits are updated as follows ENABLED Set when rung is true and reset when rung becomes false RUNNING Set when rung is false and the TIMER VALUE is less than PRESET value and reset when rung is true or when DONE bit is reset DONE Set when rung
313. r 12 Programming for Radio Applications YAGI Directional Antenna YAGI Directional Antenna vaci Directional SCADA 3000 1 Antenna a Radio Modem 2 Omni onal o OAS ASS SK SS antenna SCADA 3000 3 SCADA 3000 2 SCADA 3000 Base amp Multiple a A ase Sites Station LILA AAA AAA AAA JILL IAALLAAA LAA Af f AP AV AV AY AV AV AV AV AV AV AV AY AV 44 Figure 5 Radio network SCADA 3000 User s Manual COMMUNICATING WITH YOUR SCADA 3000s The first step is to establish communications with each unit one at a time and monitor the communications statistics to ensure a low occurrence of errors To monitor the communications select Comm then Status from the Sensaphone Control Center form The following form will appear Port Status Figure 6 Port Status form Good communication exists when the number of errors is kept to a minimum To improve communications try adjusting the modbus parameters or the Radio Modem settings from the Comm Setup form Once reliable communications have been established allow register verifi cation to complete for each unit This will ensure that the information displayed on the pro gramming screens is accurate At this point you can run a Real time screen and monitor points from all of your units on one custom designed screen See Chapter 14 for more information on real time screens RADIO MODEM MANUFACTURERS Data Linc Group 2635 151st Place
314. r undershoot If the current error is large has been sustained for some time or is changing rapidly the algorithm will attempt to make a large correction by generating a large output Conversely if the feedback has matched the set point for some time the algorithm will leave the output value alone TUNING While this sums up the way you set the PID control algorithms it doesn t really express the most difficult element of PID and that is tuning Your objective is to set the Kp Ki and Kd factors so that their weighted sum produces a controller output that steers the process variable in the desired direction but in such a way as to eliminate any error Setting all three tuning constants to large numbers might seem to solve this problem by ensuring an aggressive response to changes however such a setup will at the very least cause a wild pendu lum of cause and effect and at the worst actually move the process variable further from the setpoint than before Setting the tuning constants too conservatively on the other hand might not allow enough correction to fix one error before a new one appears The properly tuned controller exists somewhere between these two extremes While it recognizes and corrects an error quickly and aggressively it doesn t overcompensate and throw the system into an unending loop of too much and too little The thing to understand is that there is no single answer except to say that the best tuning of a PID contr
315. rdinary analog touch tone telephone into the Voice Port jack When you lift the handset the unit will begin reciting a status report Note You must be off line with the unit in order to record voice messages If you ve checked the Use Password for Local box on the Voice Setup form a password will be required to access voice programming Press any key to interrupt the unit if you don t want to hear the status report It will ask you for the password The default password is 555 If you wait until the end of the status report enter a touch tone to access voice programming Listed below is the voice menu you will hear To record message press 1 To play message press 2 To test message usage press 3 To erase message press 4 To hear status report press 5 Using your touch tone keypad enter the number that corresponds to the function you want to perform Listed below are the messages that will follow depending on your selection 1 Record Enter message number followed by the pound key The unit will then beep to indicate it is recording It will beep again when recording is finished 2 Play Enter message number followed by the pound key The unit will play the mes sage then beep when the message is over 3 Test Enter message number followed by the pound key The unit will play the mes sage in context adding on the appropriate status or alarm information It will beep when the message is ov
316. re descriptions of each property of the script component Note that most of the properties listed below will never have to be changed AutoRunDelay Allows you to have the script program start automatically when the realtime screen starts Enter a number in units of seconds A value of 0 disables the feature AutoRunInterval Allows the script to restart automatically after a time period has expired Enter the time in seconds A value of 0 disables this feature EditScript Shows the filename of the associated script program Double clicking the filename will bring up the script editor EntryProc Name of the entry procedure for the script program DO NOT CHANGE ExitProc Name of the exit procedure for the script program DO NOT CHANGE FileName Path and filename of the associated script program Height Height of the script control screen Hint Text that appears when you move the cursor over the Distributed Control management screen Language Selection of development language The choices are Visual Basic script Delphi script or Java script Left Position of the left side of the script control screen ScriptState Allows you to change the state run stop idle of the script program Status Displays the current status of the script program TimeSliceTicks Time in milliseconds the script is yielded during timer calls Top Position of the top side of the script control screen Width Width of the script cont
317. relays that switch inductive loads These devices generate large electromagnetic fields that can cause the SCADA 3000 to malfunction Where this is unavoid able mount the unit and modules in a separate grounded steel enclosure This will shield the unit from harmful electrical interference The temperature range the SCADA 3000 can operate in is 32 F to 158 F 0 C to 70 C If you require SCADA 3000 to operate in a below freezing environment you must take safe and practical measures to keep the unit s temperature above 32 F or it will not operate reliably CAUTION SCADA 3000 is a sensitive electronic device Personnel and work area should be grounded before handling this device Do not install SCADA 3000 near any strong electrostatic electromagnetic magnetic or radioactive fields Do not expose it to fumes or corrosive vapors MOUNTING SCADA 3000 When you receive SCADA 3000 carefully remove it from the box On the top and bottom of the enclosure are mounting holes to attach the unit to either a panel or wall The mounting surface should be sturdy enough to support 15 Ibs The unit should be mounted using four 10 32 bolts where appropriate or four 10 tapping screws The screw kit for the SCADA 3000 includes 4 10 32 screws 4 10 32 nuts 4 10 lockwashers and 2 6 32 screws 2 6 32 nuts and 2 6 lockwashers The 6 hardware is for the power supply When mounting the unit to a wall make sure the mounting screws fully engage a soli
318. rgency Light Off 0 0 5 Generator Stopped 0 0 6 Compressor Stopped 0 0 7 Shutdown Off Jf OK Figure 7 I O Points Status screen outputs This form allows you to enter a name up to 24 characters to describe the device that the output controls It s best to be as specific as possible when naming the outputs If you click on the I O Setup tab the next page of programming will appear SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant 1 0 Points c x Motherboard 8 Relay Outputs 120 Status 1 0 Setup UAF 1 0 Name Type Units Forced Status 0 0 0 Pump Relay Output m Stopped Runnir z NotForced Z 0 0 1 Pump 2 Rely Output m Stopped Runnir z NotFoced y ELI rasca Eoo Siara E 0 0 5 Generator RelayDuput Y Stopped Runnir v NotForced gt E raso oo aros E Figure 8 I O Points Setup screen outputs On this form the output type is just for reference and is not programmable You can select Units to describe how the Output device operates when the relay output is Open or Closed The first word applies to an Open relay the second to a closed relay The default setting for units is Off On corresponding to Open relay Off and closed relay On Selections made from the list of Units will be spoken during status reports You may also specify your own custom units by selecting Custom at the end of the list This can be any two words up to 8 characters each The first word applies to a
319. rol screen 23 5 SCADA 3000 Users Manual ABOUT THE VISUAL BASIC LANGUAGE Visual Basic is a structured programming language that is similar to other structured languages like C The structure of Visual Basic works as if you ask a question or pose a problem and then go through the simple steps of information gathering and action to solve the problem For example if your alarm clock is ringing and you want it to stop ringing you must hit the OFF button to turn it off otherwise nothing will happen If you want the Distributed Control pro gram to turn off the alarm clock you must first tell it how to recognize that the alarm is ringing then give it the command to turn the alarm off when it recognizes that it is ringing otherwise do nothing To give the Distributed Control program this information you must translate English commands into Visual Basic commands The Visual Basic language structure is fairly simple Each program must have a beginning and an end Each individual statement within the program must open provide its information and then close Think of it as writing sentences without the proper sentence structure and punctuation you will get syntax errors and the computer will not be able to receive the message or under stand what to do There is much more information and detail on the Visual Basic script language in the online help The Distributed Control program comprises the following elements STRUCTURE To write a v
320. rs C VARIABLE from 0 to 1023 Press ENTER on any number to view the current value or to execute the Add Remove or Freeze functions For each address using the arrow keys you can scroll through 3 menu choices ADD TO DISPLAY REMOVE FROM DISPLAY or DISPLAY FROZEN Hit ENTER to select Gas Flow The Gas Flow menu allows you to select from a list of 20 gas flow parameters per Gas Flow Channel First select the Gas Flow Channel from the list of 0 3 Next select the Gas Flow parameter from the list of 0 19 Press ENTER for any parmeter to view the current value or to execute the Add Remove or Freeze functions Use the Up Down arrows to select between Add Remove or Freeze Diagnostics The diagnostics option offers a list of internal diagnostic information that can be added to the scrolling display Select Diagnostics and you are given a list of Modules The first is Module 0 the main unit Modules 1 15 are for additional SCADA modules you have attached to the main unit The diagnostics list for the Main Unit is much longer than the list for the I O modules For the main unit you scroll through the following list Month Day Year Hours Minutes Seconds Input Ref Chapter 13 LCD amp Keypad Programming Voice Ref 3V Battery Battery Main Power 15V Supply 24V Supply Unit Temp Current Usage Com Rom Cntl Rom Board Rev Comm Status Cntl Status Watchdog Comm Reset Cntl Reset For individual modules 1 15 the list of diagnost
321. rsal input module 0 100 Amps Pulse Count module m 0 100 Amps Thermocouple module x 0 100 Amps Relay output module x 0 080 Amps Analog output module x 0 080 Amps Annunciator module X 0 100 Amps Battery Charge Current x 0 600 Amps Number of 4 20mA transducers _____x 0 038 Amps 42 Chapter 4 Power Supply powered from the 24 V supply Add Wireless Data Radio Amps avg Total Current Amps Compute the Total Power by multiplying the Total Current by the Supply Voltage TOTAL POWER watts 15V x Total Current Watts This Watt rating is the average power that the system will consume during normal operation however during startup the power is significantly greater The 24V supply on the CPU and modules may be used to power 4 20mA transducers be sure to account for these in your calculation by entering the number of transducers connected A sample computation follows Main RTU power 00 215 Amps Modem option 1 x 0 085 Amps 00 085 Real Voice option 1 x 0 008 Amps 00 008 Universal input module 2 x 0 100 Amps 00 200 Relay output module 1 x 0 080 Amps 00 080 Battery Charge Current 1 x 0 600 Amps 00 600 Powered 4 20mA transducers 3 x 0 038 Amps 00 114 Total Current 1 302 Amps Warning The Total Current must not exceed 3 5 Amps Total Power Watts 15 x 1 302 Amps 19 53 Watts Exceeding this value will bring the system very close to the rated current of the fuse
322. rty changed the property may not revert back to its original value after the DataPointAlert returns to its Off value Properties AlertInterval Determines how often in seconds to set the target property Datapoint Assigns the component to an I O point within a SCADA unit Reveal the sub properties by clicking the white box next to the word Datapoint Select a SCADA unit first then select the datapoint Datapoint Enter the datapoint UAF or click in the Datapoint box above and then click the button at the end of the box to display the Datapoint selection form DynComponent Selects the object or element on the Palette to be modified DynProperty From the component selected above this setting selects the property to be modi fied PropName Select the name of the property to be set from the dropdown list Prop Type Select the property type to be sent integer floating point string not valid PropValue Select the numerical value of the property This must be a number All properties have numerical equivalent values i e Off 0 On 1 ThresholdType Selects the method of determining when to change from the OffShape and color to the OnShape and color Equal NotEqual GreaterThan LessThan GreaterThanorEqual LessThanor Equal ThresholdValue Sets the value that the DataPoint is compared against to determine to switch from Off to On DataPointShape is a dynamic element that can be assigned to an I O value When the I O
323. s Pipe for instance is a configurable horizontal or vertical shape that can be linked to an I O as an active pipe section changing color as conditions such as flow change When the assigned DataPoint value crosses the threshold value the pipe will change to its FillColor All of the containers include built in bar gauges to display the fill level based on the DataPoint value Set the MaxValue and MinValue properties to values that correspond to your tank 25 SCADA 3000 RT Builder olx File Edit Forms Help Data Group Graphic DataPoint Elec Rotate Contain Valve Gauge Audvid Dynamic N o 8r E Tank Boiler Pipe Vessel P Kettle Figure 22 Contain Tab Properties Align To align graphic component to edges of the palette area alBottom Stretches the component across the bottom of the palette alClient Fills the palette with the component Useful for adding a background graphic alLeft Stretches the component along the left edge of the palette alNone No realignment is applied Note this will not correct any other previously applied alignment alRight Stretches the component along the right edge of the palette al Top Stretches the component across the top of the palette Anchors Sets one or more sides of the element as a positional anchor with respect to the edges of the palette 14 21 SCADA 3000 User s Manual 14 22 akBottom Anchors the element a fixed distance from the bottom o
324. s Destination 1 and the person who answers the call acknowledges the alarm Three hours later the fault condition still exists and the alarm reactivates and begins the dialing sequence again ALARM NOTIFICATION ESCADA 3000 Water Plant Alarms Alarm Status Alarm Setup ll Notification Alarm Name B High Pressure UAF 4 0 Select Dialout Destinations V O Fax Dave Thomson at 555 6677 M 1 Voice Ed Smith at 444 9988 vi 2 Alpha Joe Henderson at 333 0088 3 Voice Jack Bruce at 444 5566 4 Fax unnamed at undefined 5 Fax unnamed at undetined B Fax unnamed at fundefined 7 Fax urmamed at undefined 8 Fax unnamed at undefined 7 S Fax unnamed at undefined 10 Fax unnamed at undefined x v Select 5 K SINISE SSS K E Next Alarm Page 1 of B4 st OK Figure 14 Alarm Notification Screen On this screen you establish which alarms call which dialout destinations and assign any custom messages you ve created into the alarm message that will be spoken Any of the 64 or 32 Voice messages you create can be assigned to any of the 64 specific alarms as well as status messages Custom Voice Message Check the box to use a custom message with the selected alarm Select Select the message number to assign to this alarm You can either type the number of the message or use the up and down arrows to scroll through the list
325. s box will prevent the control output from exceeding the programmed Min and Max parameters e Min The minimum output level that will be computed if output limiting is enabled Max The maximum output level that will be computed if output limiting is enabled Output Limiting can be used to restrict the SCADA 30005 ability to drive the process to its extremes The SCADA 3000 PID algorithm also includes Integral term limiting to prevent the Integral from getting too large when the output reaches its limits When Output Limiting is enabled and the output reaches the Min or Max value the algorithm stops calculating the integral sum until the output comes back in range Similarly when Output Limiting is not enabled the SCADA 3000 uses the output T ble Low and Table High values to determine when to stop calculating the integral sum This method of limiting the integral term is sometimes referred to as anti reset windup Note that the Control Switch must be Enabled in order for the PID algorithms to run In addition the control switch can be programmed to turn all outputs OFF including analog outputs when the switch is placed in the Disable position See the section Running and Stop ping Ladder Execution in Chapter 15 for information on setting this option PID ALGORITHM The most important and difficult part of programming a PID control process is setting the PID tuning factors These factors will determine when to adjust the output how
326. s form has four buttons which are used to set up the four individual meter runs If you are only measuring one meter run you do not have to set anything on the other Flow forms e g Flow 1 2 amp 3 Begin by setting the parameters for your meter as listed on the form The instructions below will guide you through each item Enabled Checking this box will activate gas flow calculations for this meter run Note Do not enable a meter run until all parameters are programmed and the required input signals are present Name Enter a name to describe and distinguish each meter run Up to 24 charac ters may be used Type Orifice Plate Positive Displacement Select the type of meter you will be using Orifice Plate Type Steel Monel Carbon Steel Select the type of material used in the orifice plate only used with Orifice type meters Orifice Plate Bore Diameter Enter the bore diameter of the orifice plate This figure should be available from the manufacturer s data only used for orifice meter runs 18 3 SCADA 3000 User s Manual Bore Diameter Reference Temperature Enter the reference temperature at which the bore diameter was measured This figure should be available from the orifice plate manufacturer s data Meter Tube Type Steel Monel Carbon Steel Select the type of material used in the meter tube only used with Orifice type meters Meter Tube internal diameter Enter the meter tube internal diameter This
327. s message number 64 or 32 depending on the number of Custom Phrases selected Speak Canned with Custom Checking this box will result in the canned vocabulary announcing the input and module number with each custom message Examples of what the unit will say with and without canned messages a with canned speech Input 3 on module 10 well number 1 water level is too high it is now 600 inches b without canned speech Well number 1 water level is too high it is now 600 inches Items Included in the Status Report Recite Alarms There are three choices for having alarm information included in the status report The choices and a description of each are listed below No This setting programs the unit to leave out alarm status information during a status report All This setting will announce the status of all alarms programmed and enabled on the Alarm Programming screen Existing This setting will only announce alarms that currently exist whether acknowledged or not This includes any value that currently exceeds its specified high or low limits and has met its programmed recognition time Recite Status Messages Checking this box will result in the programmed status UAF messages see Voice Status Message Programming being announced during a status report Recite Battery Voltage Checking this box will result in the battery voltage being an nounced during a status report Full charge is between 13 5 and 13 8 Volts Rec
328. s that have been selected for Chapter 11 Programming for Phone Applications datalogging In this process you will be choosing items from the list on the left and copying them to the list on the right In the drop down box next to the heading Available UAFs choose the type of value you wish to add to the datalogger by clicking on the down arrow The choices are Inputs Outputs Timers Counters Bits Ladder Variables C Variables Gas Flow Alarms and Diagnostics When you pick a category a list of all possible points in that category will appear Click on the item you wish to add to the Data Log and then click on the first of the three buttons between the two list boxes it has an arrow pointing towards the right This will copy the highlighted item to the list of Selected Data Points on the right e g those to be Datalogged Continue this process by highlighting each data point to be datalogged and copying it to the list of Selected Data Points When you are finished click on the Commit button This will send the list to the SCADA 3000 To remove a data point from the list highlight the data point from the Selected Data Points list box and click on the middle button the one with the arrow pointing towards the left This will remove the highlighted item When you have finished editing your list click on the Commit button to send the new list to the SCADA 3000 o clear the entire list of Selected Data Points click on the bottom button
329. s the sensaphone jpg banner Select Custom to replace that banner with a graphic of your choice and add an http address in the Links to box if you want the graphic to act as a live link Once you ve finished formatting the page click on the Options tab 20 5 SCADA 3000 Users Manual WEB STATUS OPTIONS 20 6 Check the Enable Web Status Report box to generate web status pages for this unit SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Web Status Setup Bile Es Options uars Formatting When the unit is online update the report 7 C According to the Polling Schedule Always List Existing Y Alarms Every 110 Minutes Jv Enable Web Status Report Web Status Report will be saved locally as Default C PROGRAM FILESNSCADA 3000 WebStatus 5_ChestnutStreetPlant html Custom undefined Custom Jsemames Joo pear Create Now Y DK Figure 6 Web Status Options tab Alarm Options In addition to displaying the values of I O points your web page can also include detailed alarm information T hree options are available to customize how you would like alarm information to appear ALL will list the status of all the enabled alarms regardless of whether or not the alarm exists or has been acknowledged NO will list no alarms in the web status report EXISTING will list only those alarms that have been activated at the time of the report If there are n
330. s through five choices as you press the arrow keys The choices are Add to Display Remove from Display Acknowledge All Acknowledge Alarm Display Frozen SCADA 3000 User s Manual Acknowledging Alarms from the Keypad One or more alarms can be acknowledged at the keypad to keep the unit from dialing when personnel are on site The procedure below steps through the key sequence 1 Press the MENU button arrow down to the Alarms category and press ENTER 2 Now press the down arrow key until you reach the alarm you want to acknowledge Press ENTER 3 Press the down arrow key until the LCD displays Acknowledge Alarm Press ENTER and the alarm will be acknowledged If you continue to press the down arrow key the Acknowledge All option will be displayed If you press ENTER while this message is showing all alarms will be acknowledged SYSTEM STATUS The third choice on the main menu System Status presents a four lines of data Date Time Programs Running Datalog activity and Alarm status More comprehensive system status information is available through the software program RETURN The fourth menu choice is Return Return presents the normal view display a scrolling list of the main unit s I O points and as the name implies the information being returned by them Chapter 14 Real Time Screen Design Chapter 14 REAL TIME SCREEN DESIGN SUMMARY The Real time Screen feature allows you to design a graphical representati
331. sage click the button with a red circle and speak into the microphone connected to your computer Click the Center button to stop recording To play the message 22 4 Chapter 22 PC Alarm Dialout back click the button with an Arrow The ID Message is typically a message which identifies where the unit is located For example This is the monitoring system for the Chestnut Street Water plant in Southern Brisco County Next click on the Custom Voice tab at the top of the Voice Setup screen The following screen will appear SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Voice Setup lol Seltings Custom Voice Custom Voice Message Information Description Status Alam Last Recorded B Print 0 High Water Monday January 22 2001 at 9 53 22AM 1 Wate Temperature Monday January 22 2001 at 9 59 344M 2 Fuel Level Monday January 22 2001 at 9 59 444M 3 Plant Security Monday January 22 2001 at 10 00 12AM 4 Pump 1 Falle Monday January 22 2001 at 10 00 284M 5 Pump 2 Falle Monday January 22 2001 at 10 04 344M B Power Failue Monday January 22 2001 at 10 01 38AM A 1D Message Figure 7 Custom Voice screen This screen shows the custom voice message descriptions which alarm they are associated with and when they were recorded Note Voice message association is programmed on the Alarms programming screen Notification Tab The first step is to enter a voice message description for each message you will be recordin
332. scesscssscssscssecssesssnseenes 20 1 REQUIREMENT Seenen enst aaa Ra a ien re plos a ml Gaios USETERINE ES EE C E GLOBAL WEB STATUS SETTINGS usuaria estote i bisou dao fedet obse o EORR Ts een 2 SELECTING DATA POINTS FOR WEB STATUS POLLING ooooooccccocoooccccoconocccononnnncccocononccnnns 4 FORMATTING THE WEBPAGE ceret ern Du Goa eal pedes es rho obiret ta Cod e prete rhet 9 Browser FS SSI sins AAA AAA 5 Settings for Top Left Corner Logo dottorato btt dati er tle etie eto bia Dp ebria ele sitet avoided 5 Settings obama 5 SCADA Table of Contents WEB STATUS OPTIONS ts c oat de e is Cove Nas 6 SS A lca te ala a aes Reta tala a ar a anton aa 6 Online Options bee destitit sas re er A Quad UD o ae aR Leo Re Bion cac uu I Mes 6 local Web Pages amp Web Page Filenames iui eti epit iaa dices ein ee id 6 PPP Delivery CODHODS teta opos plates en dene NEEE dyn aan tebe 6 TRECs Wael A ne ae irk Sore E OE A EO SOR I Ree Rn RE eee rM C 7 SETTING UP A POLLING SCHEDULE FOR WEB STATUS 000 cccccccececcecesenteceeeeeeneeeeeeneneeeeees 7 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS csi a 7 Chapter 21 EMAIL SERVER OPTION sccssscssscssscssscessessscssecssccsnseenes 21 1 REQUIREMENTS 1 tessa da ec ON e Cer nto scores deum thy ab te pet evt uh ae cte HOW DOES T WORKS zara sscdi hada esit ocd cres enata vou oc A II aa aaan PROGRAMMING sortis ri ebat de date ious aAA abite dete aeu gas eV ceti bus Chapter 22 PC ALARM DIALOUT ccsscs
333. selection form SCADA Select the RTU being selected Font Sets the default font for labels and text Click in the font box then click the small button at the end of the box to select a font Charset Specifies the character set of the font Dependent upon what values of Charset are valid as supplied by the font vendor Color Sets the color of the text Height Sets the height of the font object in pixels If you wish to use a specific point size you should set the size property Pitch Can be set to one of three values fpDefault fpFixed or fpVariable Using fpDefault as the pitch value will cause the default pitch style to be used with the font The fpFixed and fpVariable values can be used to explicitly set the pitch a value of fpFixed causes each character in the font to have the same width monospacing while a value of fpVariable allows different characters within a font to have unique widths Size Sets the point size of a font object If you need to ensure that the font fits within a specified area you can manipulate the Height and Pitch properties Style Sets the default style of the font or text fsBold Sets the default to boldface fsItalic Sets the default to italic fsStrikeout Forces a line through the font fsUnderline Underlines the text as default Height Sets the height of the text box Hint Text shown on mouseover Layout Sets the position of the text within the box centered top or bottom jus
334. ssscssscssscssscssscssecssesssnscsnseenss 22 1 Compuler Regulremienls oko ti eoi inte demie to ri uei o bes sed vir obe tle oli debeo in Ed ERR SOFTWARE SETUP se eei DEO beta aD Idam RENE CASI TENE EU LAE co ed Modem Commands and Modem Messages sssssssssse eee er eene 2 a rfe Ss ripae EQ RENE PODER 2 Telephone Voice Volume SM Obl e Lou DU LA Ma 3 SCADA 3000 PROGRAMMIING iere arcada mea ein e et o tuae e nn khoa neas p Se Pd niat 3 Voice IWS A ETHER N S RA 4 PROGRAMMING DESTINATIONS staal cists ct Deae te veri oa ean e o teenies 9 ALARM PROGRAMMING ll iia 6 Alarm Acne ment acti dao 6 SAMPLE ALARM DIALOUT SEQUENCE cceccecceeeeeceeceeceecaeeeeeeecneeeeeeeaeeeeeseneeeeeenneeeeees 6 polo Re TT yg stud 2alag sense 6 CIT Is de dele E RR A EA A E 7 Alphanumeric Padern een ee eC NN 7 A E TEN 7 Chapter 23 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL USING VISUAL BASIC SCRIPT 23 1 REQUIREMENTS rat Feet issn ss ORIS ee ens YR GU CURRERE S Met rat E OREL PUR EN OTA 1 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SCRIPT EDITOR deben t e a E Ix eei steve Ge te aa REFERENCING SCADA 3000 I O POINTS c cccccsssssscesesscessssscessenscssecsseseecnsceseseaesseeaees 3 Sample Application cias 3 Syntax CHECKING sessast esena e te ee t toe eM e dads E a CE Mc e esi ade 4 SAVING your PROOFdET Ai as 5 R nning YOUR TEOGFOHEB ses dd dios tesa as 3 PROPERTIES OF THE SCRIPT COMPONENT 5 s paa te aca that Y a eroe dd certet rhet rp 3 ABOUT THE VISUAL B
335. stem to bring up the system form SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant System Programming System Information Dialout Settings Unit Name Chestnut Steet Plant Dial Method Tone v DisingPrefic Unit ID Number 610 558 6677 Voice Reps fe Max Calling Rounds fi 00 f Slave Address IU E EST Advanced Alpha Page Speed 1200 y r Clock Call Reception Settings Date Monday Juy 31 2000 y Rings tillAnswer fi f Onine Timeout 4 e min Time 11 05 55 AM 5 seuorc Carrier Wait Time 60 E sec Auto Daylight Savings Y Current User Voice Call Security Current User Security Disabled Voice Pw Jer Ack Code On Since 7 31 2000 10 59 40 AM Access Level Administrator User Accounts Y OK Figure 6 System form System Information Both the Unit Name and ID Number should be the same as those you assigned on the New Unit form Dialout Settings 1 Dial Method Can be either tone or pulse Default setting is Tone 2 Dialing Prefix for E Mail prefixes only If you need to dial a 9 to get an outside line before dialing an email server number enter that here For other dialout prefixes see the Destinations section of the manual 2 3 SCADA 3000 User s Manual 24 3 Voice repetitions The number of times the SCADA 3000 repeats alarm messages per call Default setting is 2 4 Maximum calling
336. sure that the unit will continue to function Component selection will vary depending on your geographic location Regions with long periods of low intensity sunlight may not be suitable for solar operation Consult with a solar power specialist for specific questions on component selection and geographic issues Providing reliable power from solar cells requires 3 components one or more solar panels one or more large batteries and a solar battery charger regulator During periods of sunlight the solar cells will provide enough energy to power the SCADA 3000 and charge the batteries When there is no sunlight the batteries will power the unit The figure below illustrates the connection between the components CHARGER J N REGULATOR 4 SCADA 3000 12V BATTERY Figure 3 Solar Power wiring The SCADA 3000 requires 10 15 Volts DC to operate There are many 12V solar panels available which will meet this requirement Current consumption will depend on installed options such as voice modem boards I O modules radio modem or cellular phone The batteries are usually similar to automobile or marine type batteries Many solar panel dealers also carry chargers and batteries and can assist in selecting a matching component system It is important that the components be designed as a system otherwise component damage or power loss may result To size the solar panel requirements use the Estimating Power Consumption worksheet a
337. t and click the middle button to remove it from the list If you decide you are not happy with the list you can erase it completely to start from scratch by clicking the bottom of the three cod Once you have the list assembled you can rearrange the order of the data points by clicking on the four arrows to the right The top and bottom arrows will move the selected data points to the top or bottom of the list respectively The middle two buttons will move them up or down one level Linking Custom Voice Messages to Data Points Click on the first data point in the righthand list and a new area called Voice Status Item con taining two boxes will appear on the bottom of the Status UAFs screen To the left is a checkbox marked Use custom voice message Check this box if you want to use one of the user record able messages as part of the status message for this data point If you check it then either scroll through or type in the appropriate number for the Custom Voice Number on the right Go to the next data point in the list you want to link with a custom message and repeat the process until you have set all of your data points and their messages When you have the list compiled click on the Commit button Next click on the Custom Voice tab to bring up the Custom Voice Message Information screen SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Voice Setup 2 Pump 1 run time alarm 4 Pump 1 temperature high igh erage mon
338. t deeds tete cedere 2 System Information CERNERET TETTE ROM 3 Dialout Selllis toa dataset E ites sate ete A Kb IL ANE I eel E a oA ee 3 Call Reception Seting Snie A sid eiae ue vitis D heels 4 fex ect cm T 4 Chapter 3 HARDWARE INSTALLATION e eeee eene ener enero etna eotnenn 3 1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Siro ici 1 MOUNTING SCADA 3000 cuca naa ano 1 MOUNTING THE SCADA 3000 POWER SUPPLY FGD 3100 ooooooooocccoooccccoocccooccccccncnonoo 3 MOUNTING THE BACKUP BATTERY sucess ened coe Eee op Ene pork epo cn Gee Cue DOR Fo x ERREUR 3 MODEM AND VOICE BOARDS vinci an 4 Modem Card A O sns fret aaa in es tad 4 Installation of the Modem Card anie ctm cse TA ct A cen p DIA LU DU QUE 5 Voice Board Installation sama mallidoi dieta ale di deserta aiquet 6 Chapter 4 POWER SUPPLY 8 BATTERY BACKUP eee ene eere enn 4 1 POWER REQUIREMENTS aceto aera ci RE t e o CURE CER RUR RA EUNDI ANO IRE AQUA IRR UNE GROUNDING AND POWER SURGE PROTECTION sssesseeene eene 2 POWER SUPPLY FUSE cette he dan qe atte Sado 2 ESTIMATING POWER CONSUMPTION t oath re erar ett Pr ea banaue 2 vii SCADA 3000 User s Manual Calculating Power Consumption tor the SCADA 3000 iia perpe eet ted epi dam 2 Power Supply Selection scito A ACIE biduum 3 BACKUP BATTERY OPTIONAL sust bere d deo be RE p Re ira Ee t bt te tentes 4 POWERING THE SCADA 3000 WITH SOLAR CELLS ceni deveatanctu
339. t function properly we suggest that you do the following 1 Record your observations regarding the SCADA 3000 malfunction 2 Call the Technical Service Department at 610 558 2700 prior to sending the unit to Phonetics for repair If the unit must be sent to Phonetics for Servicing please do the following 1 Turn the power switch Off disconnect all wiring and unplug the unit 2 Carefully pack the unit to avoid damage in transit Use the original container if available or a sturdy shipping box 3 You must include the following information to avoid shipping delays a Your name address and telephone number b A note explaining the problem 4 Ship your package to the address below SERVICE DEPARTMENT Phonetics Inc 901 Tryens Road Aston PA 19014 5 Ship prepaid and insured via UPS or US Mail to ensure a traceable shipment with recourse for damage or replacement SCADA 3000 User s Manual K 2 Important Information for Canadian Customers In the event that your Sensaphone SCADA 3000 unit does not function properly Cana dian customers have the option of shipping the unit to one of the following Phonetics authorized Canadian Repair facilities Microwise Computer Systems Galvanic Analytical Systems Ltd 100 Covington Crescent 5664 Burleigh Crescent S E Kitchener Ontario N2N 2X3 Calgary Alberta T2H 1Z8 519 744 9892 403 253 6576 Please record your observations regarding the unit s malfunction and follow the
340. t least once The following example always sets output 0 on and keeps it on as long as input 0 is greater than 100 Example main SCADA 3000 User s Manual do write uaf output 0 0 0n while read _uaf input 0 0 gt 100 WHILE Used to execute a list of statements while a condition is true The statements are only executed if the condition is already true The following example only sets output 0 on when input 0 is greater than 100 and keeps it on until input 0 is less than or equal to 100 Example main while read_uaf input 0 0 gt 100 write uaf output 0 0 on OPERATORS Symbols used to execute mathematical operations and determine whether a particular condition exists Adds two values Subtracts two values Multiplies two values Divides two values Finds the remainder of a division Checks if one condition or another exists amp amp Checks if one condition and another exists ASSIGNMENT Symbol used to assign a numeric value assigns a new value to a variable COMPARATORS Symbols used to compare numeric values to each other Less than Greater than Is equal to Is not equal to Less than or equal to gt Greater than or equal to VA Il I COMMENTS Text used to add notes to a program Typically used to briefly explain what the program or statement is doing They may be used freely to make a program easier to under stand Comments are ignored by
341. t you would like to move by clicking on it or drag the mouse over a group of data points then click on one of the arrows on the right The interior arrows will move the data points up or down one place and the outside arrows will move them to the extreme top or bottom of the list When finished editing the list click on the Commit button NAVIGATING THE DISPLAY USING THE KEYPAD The SCADA 3000 window displays the various menu selections you choose with the buttons below it The main menu choices displayed by pressing the MENU button are DATA POINTS ALARMS SYSTEM STATUS and RETURN The figure below shows a typical display for Input Status PUMP PRESS WATER TEMP OUTSIDE TEMP HIGH LEVEL UP DOWN MENU ENTER Figure 2 SCADA Display Window Scrolling Display The SCADA 3000 will normally scroll through a programmed list of I O points and variables that you select It defaults to the 16 inputs and 8 outputs on the main board You can add or remove items to the scrolling list via the keypad or through the Programming Software From the keypad you would use the Add to Display and Remove from Display functions If you want to go back a menu or just want to return to the programmed scrolling values keep pressing the MENU button Fach time it is pressed the display will go back a menu until you Chapter 13 LCD amp Keypad Programming reach the main menu The last item in the main menu is RETURN Selecting this option will return the d
342. ta Logic Diagram The following definitions describe the timing parameters RTS Hold delay RTS stands for request to send This hardware signal tells the radio modem that we wish to transmit data The RTS signal remains raised until all of the data has been sent The RTS Hold delay is the amount of time that the RTS signal remains raised after the data has been sent Typically this must be set to between 10 50ms but to ensure reliable data transmission you should check your radio modem specifications for this parameter CTS Timeout CTS stands for clear to send The radio modem will raise CTS when it is ready to transmit data The CTS timeout is the amount of time the SCADA 3000 software will wait for CTS to be returned from the radio modem before it gives up DCD Time Out Transmit DCD stands for data carrier detect The DCD signal indicates that the radio modem is receiving a carrier signal from another radio modem The DCD transmit timeout is how long the software waits for DCD to drop before raising RT S when transmitting DCD Time Out Receive DCD receive timeout is how long the software waits for DCD to drop before it stops waiting for a packet to be received Flush Buffers after sending packet Flush Buffers clears the send and receive buffers immedi ately after sending a packet It can eliminate some noise but is not always necessary The following figure shows an illustration of how a typical radio network might look Chapte
343. te Cut objects Cuts the object to the clipboard for pasting elsewhere Copy objects Makes a copy of the object to paste elsewhere Align to grid Aligns the top left corner of selected object to the underlying palette grid Bring to Front Moves the selected object to the foremost position Send to Back Moves the selected object behind any others that overlay it Align Brings up the following Menu Vertical No Change C Tops Centers Centers Right Sides C Bottoms C Space Equally C Space Equally Center in window C Center in window Cancel Help Figure 10 Alignment Menu Align multiple objects horizontally or vertically and relative to each other by clicking in the appropriate alignment option boxes Size Brings up the following menu Shrink to smallest Shrink to smallest Grow to largest C Grow to largest C Width p C Height Jo Figure 11 Size Menu Use the radio buttons to select Width or Height sizing variations or type in the specific width or height you desire The number you type in represents the number of pixels in width or height Scale Allows you to scale the size of the selected object by percentage Type in the percentage and click OK Tab Order Use the up and down menus to move objects higher or lower in the list Creation Order Use the up and down menus to move objects higher or lower in the list GROUPING COMPONENTS IN A BOX PANEL OR PAGE The Group Tab offers t
344. ted on the Real time screen In the case where multiple units are connected via phone lines the distributed control program will read and write to I O on an as connected basis according to the connection frequency programmed on the Real time screen In this case output changes that must be performed on units which are presently unconnected will be queued until a connection is made Visual Basic script is a computer programming language developed by Microsoft that provides the capability for writing sophisticated control programs Integrated within the SCADA 3000 Real time screen editor is a Distributed Control Program editor This editor allows you to write and compile a program written in the Visual Basic language to perform intelligent input output control and mathematical functions Listed within this chapter are explanations on common available functions along with examples on how to make use of them Online Help is available from the editor which provides complete documentation for Visual Basic script The Distributed Control Program can only run when the Real time screen is live The program can be set to run periodically using a programmable delay or continuously by time slicing the computer s processing capability A sample template is provided to get you started REQUIREMENTS The Microsoft Visual Basic Scripting host must be installed on your computer This program can be found on the SCADA 3000 CD DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SCRIPT EDITOR
345. ter Must be unique within the same scope Must be no longer than 255 characters If Then Else Statement Conditionally executes a group of statements depending on the value of an expression If condition Then statements Else elsestatements Or you can use the block form syntax If condition Then statements ElseIf condition n Then elseifstatements Else elsestatements End If 28 7 SCADA 3000 Users Manual 23 8 Arguments condition One or more of the following two types of expressions A numeric or string expression that evaluates to True or False If condition is Null condition is treated as False An expression of the form TypeOf objectname Is objecttype The objectname is any object reference and objecttype is any valid object type The expression is True if objectname is of the object type specified by objecttype otherwise it is False statements One or more statements separated by colons executed if condition is True condition n Same as condition elseifstatements One or more statements executed if the associated condition n is True elsestatements One or more statements executed if no previous condition or condition n expression is True For Next Statement Repeats a group of statements a specified number of times For counter start To end Step step statements Next Arguments counter Numeric variable used as a loop counter The variable can t be an array element or an el
346. ter values you can also force changes by double clicking on the counter value you want to change A Change form will appear to let you enter a new value for the counter Use the Up Down arrows to flip through the pages to access the counters you wish to view RES RESET RES T H nE5 This instruction is used to reset a timer counter or output You can also reset an alarm bit which is equivalent to acknowledging an alarm When rung conditions become true the RES instruc tion will reset the Timer On Delay TON Retentive Timer RTO Count Up CTU or Count Down CTD instruction having the same address as the RES instruction Counter and Timer values will be reset to 0 If the counter preset value is negative the done bit will be set by a RES instruction The instruction executes in 2 5us and requires 22 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may be used with RES instructions Outputs Timer values Counter values Alarms Chapter 15 ladder Logic Programming MOV Move The MOV instruction moves the value in the memory location referenced by the Source to the destination memory location when rung conditions are true The source value can be a fixed constant a value contained in I O or a variable stored in any memory location The MOV instruction executes in 2 9us and requires 44 bytes Valid Sources Valid Destinations Inputs Outputs Outputs Ladder Variables Timers preset amp valu
347. ter 5 Input Wiring 16 Voice Port This jack is for plugging in a telephone to listen to a status report or record messages if the voice option is installed 17 Phone Line This is the jack for connecting to the telephone network 18 Phone Extension This jack is for connecting telephone extensions to the same line as the SCADA 3000 This jack features Line Seizure so that if the SCADA 3000 needs to make a call it will disconnect the extensions and seize the line for its own use 19 Expansion Bus Terminal Strip This terminal strip is for connecting the 4 wire communications link to the I O expansion modules 20 Bus Termination This jumper selects whether the expansion bus is terminated or not 21 Spare Fuses Spare fuses are provided for the main power and 24V supply Chapter 1 Introduction About I Os and Modules The SCADA 3000 comes with 16 universal inputs and 8 relay outputs Additional inputs and outputs may be added by connecting additional I O modules to the main unit Up to 15 modules may be connected to the unit providing as many as 144 total I O points The modules connect to the unit via a 4 wire communications bus They may be located up to 2000 feet away from the main unit Modules are available to connect a variety of I O devices FGD 3010 Scada 3000 8 Channel Universal Input Module FGD 3020 Scada 3000 4 Channel Pulse Count Input Module FGD 3030 Scada 3000 4 Channel Thermocouple Input Module FGD 3040 Scada 3000
348. termines the calling priority for each destination The three choices are Disabled Until Acknowledged and Inform Disabled Destinations programmed with Alarm Call Mode Disabled will never be called This is simply a way to disable dialing to this destination if necessary Note that this only affects alarm dialout SCADA 3000 will still dial to deliver reports if selected Until Acknowledged Destinations programmed with Alarm Call Mode Until Acknowledged will continue to be called until one of them acknowledges the alarm Once acknowledged the remaining destina tions programmed as Until Acknowledged will not be called Example An alarm occurs and the SCADA 3000 is programmed to call destinations 31 82 and 3 and all 3 destinations are Alarm Call Mode Until Acknowledged The unit will call destination 1 if the alarm isn t acknowledged it will call 2 If destination 2 doesn t acknowledge then the unit will call destination 3 If the alarm still hasn t been acknowledged SCADA 3000 will call destination 1 again This process will continue until one of the destinations acknowledges the alarm Note Fax E mail and Modem destinations cannot be programmed as Until Acknowledged call modes Inform Destinations programmed with Alarm Call Mode Inform will be called until the alarm mes sage has been successfully delivered one time to all Inform destinations regardless of acknowl edgment Ifa trans
349. the Main Programming Form select Status then Web Status Report to bring up the Web Status form Click on the UAFs tab SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant Web Status Setup ml x Options UAFs Formatting M Select Data Points that will appear in the Web Status Report Available UAFs alarms y Selected Data Points 8 0 0 Phonetics Test 1 0 1 Water Temp 4 1 0 ALARM 1 ER 1 0 2 Pump 1 3 1 0 3 Pump 2 4 10 5 Well 2 4 2 0 ALARM 2 4 3 0 ALARM 3 RU 4 4 0 ALARM 4 0 0 3 MOD 0 OUT3 45 0 ALARM 5 El T 0 1 Ladder Timer 0 Running A 5 0 ALARM 6 T 1 1 Ladder Timer 1 Running 4 7 0 ALARM 7 mj 41 0 ALARM 1 48 0 ALARM 8 4 2 0 ALARM 2 49 0 ALARM 9 4 10 0 ALARM 10 55 of 64 Slots Available 411 0 ALARM 11 A 12 0 ALARM 12 xl f Commit Create Now Y OK Figure 4 Web Status UAFsTab All data points in the SCADA 3000 are referenced by the UAF format On the form above there are two large list boxes Available UAFs and Selected Data Points Available UAFs comprises all the data points that can be chosen to appear in the status report Selected Data Points on the right shows which ones have been selected From the drop down box next to the heading Available UAFs choose the type of value you wish to add Inputs Outputs Timers Counters Bits Ladder Variables C Variables Gas Flow Alarms and Diagnostics When you pick a category a list of all possible points in that category will appear
350. the SyntaxCheck button The editor will provide a message to indicate if there were any errors detected along with the location of the error Chapter 23 Distributed Control Using Visual Basic Script Saving your Program When you have finished editing your program be sure to save it by clicking the Save button Enter a unique name for your program and click OK Note Do not use template vbs as a filename as this will overwrite the original tem plate program Click Close to exit the editor Running your Program After the program passes the Syntax Check you can try to run it Remember that the program will actually read and control I O so it s highly recommended that you test the program in a scenario where mistakes in logic won t damage equipment or place people in danger To run your program the Real time screen must first be running The reason for this is that the I O values used in the program are read from and written to the Real time screen The Real time screen handles all data communications between the SCADA units and the Distributed Control program Once the Real time screen is running click the Run button on the Distributed Con trol management screen A message should appear that first says Starting then Running To stop the program click Stop PROPERTIES OF THE SCRIPT COMPONENT If you click once on the Distributed Control management screen the property editor will display the component properties Listed below a
351. the computer You can clear the information on the form by clicking the Clear button Alarm Printing and Logging Alarms that are received can also be immediately printed and or logged to a delimited text file for permanent storage or for importing into other programs To enable these features click the Alarms button from the toolbar on the Control Center form and then select the Logging Tab The form below will appear Alarms fx Current Alarms Alarm History Logging Audible r Defauk v MaintainLogFile View Reset Select File C PROGRAM FILES SCADA 3000 incoming log Tab Delimited IV Enclose Text Fields in Quotes JV Include Units C Comma Delimited Alam Type as Text Alarm Number as UAF Sample Log Entry 5 25 2000 10 50 23 AM Unit Name 123 456 7890 3 0 Alam Name LOO Source Name 1 23 Volts 1 00 Timestamp Unit Name Unit ID Alarm Type Alarm UAF Alarm Name Source UAF Source Name Current Value Limit Exceeded Y OK Figure 18 Alarm Log screen SCADA 3000 User s Manual Printing To print alarms as they are received click the Auto Print Incoming Alarms box Next choose a printer by clicking the select button Logging To log alarms to a delimited text file click the box labeled Maintain Log File Next click the Select button to enter a name for the file The default file name is Incoming log Now choose how you would like the fields delimited either Tab or Comma
352. the main board or an input expansion module The Group for this type would be the module address in the network from 0 15 The Element is the channel within that module Note that all input channels are numbered starting at 0 not 1 Examples 1 0 0 Input 0 on the Main Board L5 3 Input3 on module 5 Output An Output would be any physical output channel on either the main board or an output expan sion module The Group for this type would be the module address in the network from 0 15 The Element is the channel within that module Note that all output channels are numbered starting at 0 not 1 Examples O 0 7 Output 7 on the Main Board O 2 4 Output 4 on module 2 Chapter 10 Generic Programming Timer The SCADA 3000 contains 64 timers for use within the Ladder program The Group for this type is the timer number from 0 63 The Element specifies an individual function for the selected timer There are 5 elements associated with each timer Element Element Range of Number Description Value 0 Timer Enabled Oorl O disabled 1 enabled 1 Timer Running QO or 1 O disabled 1 enabled 2 Timer Done Oorl O disabled 1 enabled 3 Preset Value 0 to 32 767 4 Timer Value 0 to 32 767 Examples 50 0 This UAF indicates if Timer 0 is enabled or disabled T 12 4 This UAF references the current timer value of timer number 12 Counter The SCADA 3000 contains 64 counters for use within the Ladder program There are two types of Co
353. the pitch value will cause the default pitch style to be used with the font The fpFixed and fp Variable values can be used to explicitly set the pitch a value of fpFixed causes each character in the font to have the same width monospacing while a value of fp Variable allows different characters within a font to have unique widths Size Sets the point size of a font object If you need to ensure that the font fits within a specified area you can manipulate the Height and Pitch properties Style Sets the default style of the font or text fsBold Sets the default to boldface fsltalic Sets the default to italic fsStrikeout Forces a line through the font fsUnderline Underlines the text as default Height Vertical size in pixels overridden if you chose a Max Min Height Hint Type in the text that will appear upon mouseover Left Sets the position of the component as measured from the left side of the palette Max Value Meter Upper datapoint value limit Min Value Meter Lower datapoint value limit Off Color Color of the component in the off state Default color is Red On Color Color of the component in the on state Default color is Green Show Hint Checkbox Enables the hint message to display on mouseover State Checkbox This is the On Off Enabled Disabled Datapoint state Stay On Top Checkbox Check if you want the element to float above any other graphics Top Y coordinate of the top edge of the valve
354. the screen To exit from the Real time screen select File then Close from the main menu of the R T Builder form Chapter 15 ladder Logic Programming Chapter 15 LADDER LOGIC PROGRAMMING Ladder Logic is one of the languages used to program the SCADA 3000 for control functions While the C language is more mathematically capable it does not handle On Off functions very well That s where Ladder Logic comes in It is the preferred language for control fanc tions With C Programming you write formulas With Ladder Logic you build constructs out of a set of symbols The ladder symbols and expressions represent the program logic used to control the machine or process By putting together the various symbols you can build very sophisticated control programs The rules conventions that dictate how programs can be con structed are listed within this section Listed below are the ladder elements and functions that are supported in the SCADA 3000 A description of each follows the list Example programs are illustrated at the end of this chapter Note Windows NT is required if you plan on writing programs that contain 500 or more instructions Ladder Logic Elements Supported XIC Examine if Closed XIO Examine if Open OTE Output energize OTL Output latch OTU Output Unlatch OSR One shot rising TON Timer on delay TOF Timer off delay RTO Retentive timer CTU Count up counter CTD Count down counter RES Reset timer or counter MOV
355. ther Opaque or Transparent background for the gauge when empty Color GaugeLevel Color of gauge background if Opaque is selected Constraints Progress Bar GaugeLevel Limits the maximum and minimum size of the bar MaxHeight Sets the maximum height of the bar 0 disables this property MaxWidth Sets the maximum width of the bar 0 disables this property MinHeight Sets the minimum height of the bar 0 disables this property MinWidth Sets the minimum width of the bar 0 disables this property DataColors Strip chart Assign a different color to each of up to 8 charted I O points DataFill Strip chart Checkbox DataNames Strip chart Assign a name to each I O being charted Datapoint Use the submenus to select the I O Datapoint and the unit SCADA being moni tored and linked to the gauge DataPoints Strip Chart Select up to eight I O points to be charted DataType Strip chart DataValue X Specifies the horizontal location of the data value from 1 to 1 O center DataValue Y Specifies the vertical location of the data value from 1 to 1 O center Display Orientation for bar gauges doHorizontal and doVertical Display Percent GaugeLevel Displays percent full based on Max and Min values Display Value Checkbox if you want the datapoint value displayed FillColor GaugeLevel Color of the Container or Vessel when filled FillDirection GaugeLevel Vertical or Horizontal fill representation FillSty
356. thly flow aximum level this month Figure 2 Custom Voice Tab SCADA 3000 User s Manual This list is generated automatically from the custom messages you have assigned on the Status UAFs screen and from the Alarm Notification screen Up to 64 messages can be listed here from 0 63 Note Message 64 or message 32 if you choose the 32 messages option is the recordable ID Message that the SCADA 3000 recites at the beginning of any status report to identify the RTU Type in a brief description for each one to identify status alarm messages in order to help you record them Thus Description 0 might read Refrigeration Unit One and Description 1 might be One hour average temperature a C program calculation Once you ve typed in the list of messages in order you can print this list and use it as your guide for the next step recording your custom messages What you type here does not have to match verbatim what you plan to say it s merely a means of noting what the message represents Once you have your list then record your custom messages Recording and Playback of Messages Voice messages may be recorded and played back either locally by plugging a telephone directly into the Voice Port jack or remotely by calling in to the unit Both methods are outlined below Note Pressing the pound key as soon as you have finished speaking a message will end the recording Local Voice Programming Plug the cord of an o
357. tified Left Sets the position of the text box as measured from the left side of the palette Show Hint Check if you want the mouseover hint to appear Top Sets the position of the text box as measured from the top of the palette Transparent Makes the background color of the text box transparent Visible Check to make the element visible Width Sets the width of the text box Wordwrap Makes text within the text box wrap around to the next line if it exceeds the box width The DataPointValue displays the current numerical value or state of the specified I O See Properties listed above The DataPointAlert can be used to change or set a property of another element on the palette when an I O value changes from On to Off or crosses a threshold As an example you could place the DataPointAlert and the WavPlayer elements on the palette Assign the DataPointAlert to an I O value and set the threshold type and threshold value properties to determine when to play a Wav file The DynComponent property selects the element on the palette you wish to change in this case the WavPlayer The DynProperty selects the property of the DynComponent you wish to change In our example you would select Play because we want the Play property to 14 15 SCADA 3000 User s Manual be set when the DataPointAlert is tripped You can use the DataPointAlert in many ways to affect changes in the realtime screen components Note that depending on the prope
358. to compare numeric values to each other lt Less than gt Greater than Is equal to lt gt Is not equal to lt Less than or equal to gt Greater than or equal to COMMENTS Text used to add notes to a program Typically used to briefly explain what the program or statement is doing They may be used freely to make a program easier to understand Comments are ignored by the program A comment is identified by a single quote at the beginning of the line comment 23 9 SCADA 3000 Users Manual MONTH DAY YEAR HOURS MINUTES SECONDS amp WEEKDAY These variables represent the values from the real time clock in your PC They do not have to be declared in a Dim statement The variable names are as follows Month Now Holds the present value from 1 to 12 Day Now Holds the present value from 1 to 31 Year Now Holds the present value in 4 digit format e g 2001 Hour Now Holds the present value in 24 hour time from 0 to 23 Minute Now Holds the present value from 0 to 59 Second Now Holds the present value from 0 to 59 Weekday Now Holds the present value from 1 Sunday to 7 Saturday Example This program will set DataPointValue4 to 35 at midnight if Hour Now 0 and Minute Now 0 and Second Now 0 then DataPointValue4 Value 35 end if PROGRAMMING METHODOLOGY 23 10 There are three methods that will typically be used when creating a control system based on a distributed contro
359. to enable or disable alarms before or after they are setup When this box is not checked e g disabled the alarm will not be detected Source Data Point This parameter identifies the physical location of the signal to be moni tored It can be any valid data point in the SCADA 3000 The first 16 alarms default to the UAF locations for the 16 inputs on the motherboard In the dropdown box next to the heading choose the data point category by clicking on the down arrow The choices are inputs outputs timers counters bits ladder variables C variables gas flow alarms and diagnostics When you pick a category a list of all possible points in that category will appear Click on the item you wish to use as the alarm source and click OK Select a UAF xj 0 0 Level Well 1 1 Level Well 2 2 Inflow 3 Outflow 4 Water Temperature 5 Pump 1 Run Time 6 Pump 2 Run Time 7 Fuel Level 8 Security S Leak Monitor 10 AC Voltage 11 System Alarm 12 Pump 1 Temperature 0 0 0 0 0 d d 0 0 d 0 d Figure 13 Source Data Points Alarm Type This parameter describes the source as being an analog value or a digital value There are three choices Normally Open Bit 0 Normally Closed Bit 1 and Limit If your source is an analog signal e g temperature or tank level then choose limit as this type of signal will involve programming a high and low limit Limit is for a data point where values may flu
360. ts Outputs Ladder variables Timers preset amp value C Variables Counters preset amp value Ladder variables C variables Gas flow values enable and flow rate only Diagnostics Alarms MULT Multiplication The MULT instruction multiplies the values stored in the two referenced memory locations labeled as Source A and Source B when rung conditions are true The result is stored in the 15 15 SCADA 3000 User s Manual destination memory location The operand values can be fixed constants values contained in I O or variables stored in any memory location The MULT instruction executes in 15us and requires 68 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may be used with MULT instructions Valid Sources Valid Destinations Inputs Outputs Outputs Ladder variables Timers preset amp value C Variables Counters preset amp value Ladder variables C variables Gas flow values enable and flow rate only Diagnostics Alarms DIV Division The DIV instruction divides the value stored in the memory location referenced by Source A by the value stored in the memory location referenced by Source B when rung conditions are true The result is stored in the destination memory location The operand values can be fixed constants values contained in I O or variables stored in any memory location The DIV instruction executes in 15us and requires 80 bytes Following is a list of the data points that may
361. ty of devices that you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your telephone number is called In most but not all areas the sum of the REN s of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that you may connect to your line you may want to contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area This equipment may not be used on coin service units provided by the telephone company Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs Should the SCADA 3000 cause harm to the telephone network the telephone com pany may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advance notice isn t practical the telephone company may tempo rarily discontinue service without notice and you will be notified as soon as possible You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations of the FCC that could affect the proper functioning of your equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service If you experience trouble with this equipment or you need information on obtaining servi
362. tyle on the Property Editor to alter the beveling Properties Align To align graphic component to edges of the palette area alBottom Stretches the component across the bottom of the palette alClient Fills the palette with the component Useful for adding a background graphic alLeft Stretches the component along the left edge of the palette alNone No realignment is applied Note this will not correct any other previously applied alignment alRight Stretches the component along the right edge of the palette alTop Stretches the component across the top of the palette Alignment taCenter taLeftfustify taRightJustify Aligns the text in the label box Anchors Sets one or more sides of the graphic label as a positional anchor with respect to the edges of the palette akBottom Anchors the element a fixed distance from the bottom of the palette akLeft Anchors the element a fixed distance from the left side of the palette SCADA 3000 User s Manual akRight Anchors the element a fixed distance from the right side of the palette akTop Anchors the element a fixed distance from the top of the palette Autosize Label Automatically sizes the background box to the size of the text Brush Shape Color Color fill for the shape Style Fill patterns for the shape Caption Label Name or text assigned to graphic Center Image Checkbox Color Background color of Label or element if applicable Constraint Lim
363. ud rates and communication types are listed below COM 1 Default setting 38400 bps Standard COM 2 Default setting 38400 bps Standard User Inactivity Timer The User Inactivity Timer is an optional feature which is used to automatically disconnect a SCADA 3000 from an online session when the user has not actively moved the mouse or pressed any keys on the keyboard The purpose is to prevent an unattended online session from occur ring because the SCADA 3000 will not dial out for alarms while an online session is in progress To enable this feature click on File and then Options from the Sensaphone Control Center Click the Use Inactivity Timeout box set the desired timeout in minutes and the click OK Main Web Status Debug Level fi zi Enable PC Alarm Dialout M Internet Settings Access Type Dialup Networking Phone Book Enty y Phone Book Entry Voicenet Dialup Y User Inactivity Timer Use Inactivity Timeout Timeout eo minutes X Cancel Figure 13 User Inactivity Timer Chapter 10 Generic Programming Chapter 10 GENERIC PROGRAMMING This chapter includes information on how to program the following SCADA 3000 parameters that are constant regardless of communication type System UAFs VO Points SAVING AND LOADING PROGRAMMING FILES All of the SCADA 3000 programming information including expansion module programming can be saved to one or more files C progra
364. ump and turns it off 15 27 SCADA 3000 User s Manual OTL 0 8 Instruction UAF Figure 13 Float Switch control Example 3 In this example a timer is used to delay the start of a system by 10 seconds When the system power switch is turned on the timer starts running When it reaches the preset value the timer done bit is set which makes the XIC instruction on rung 2 true This in turn activates output 2 which turns on the system CNT PRE 1000 END Figure 14 Timer Delay 15 28 Chapter 15 ladder Logic Programming Example 4 The following program uses a Count Up and a Count Down instruction to keep track of the number of acceptable widgets produced As a widget comes down the production line an optical sensor on input 6 senses the widget and makes the XIC instruction true which increments Counter 5 When widgets are rejected they are diverted down another conveyor with an optical sensor on input 10 When the reject sensor sees a widget it decrements Counter 5 With this configuration the counter is able to keep track of the acceptable widgets produced A reset button on input 12 resets the counter to 0 Figure 15 Count Up Count Down instruction Example 5 The following program will monitor a normally open push button switch connected to input 10 When the switch is depressed the program will reset acknowledge alarm 0 The OSR instruction prevents the reset instruction fro
365. unit to poll using the selection box at the top of the screen Set the time for the first poll and the interval for all subsequent polls The interval can be set for monthly weekly daily or custom time intervals The example above shows a custom interval set at 6 hours Next choose the action s to be performed during the poll In this case you want to choose Update Web Status Note You can select more than one action to take place during a poll As programmed above the selected unit Chestnut Street Plant will be polled every six hours and a new web page will be generated and uploaded to the internet To create web pages for more than one unit you must set up a separate poll for each Finally be sure to enable polling by clicking the Polling Enabled box on the Polling Setup screen FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Can I create web pages for more than one SCADA 3000 Yes Every time you poll a 3000 unit the software can create a new web page for that unit Each unit will have its own web page address based on the unit name If you repoll the same unit the software simply overwrites the old web page with the new information 20 7 SCADA 3000 Users Manual Do I need a separate internet account for each SCADA 3000 No Generally you can put as many web pages on one account as you like Internet providers allocate a certain amount of storage for web pages Since the SCADA 3000 web pages are relatively small 60K you can put many on one sit
366. unters Count Up and Count Down The Group for this type is the counter number from 0 63 The Element specifies an individual function for the selected counter There are 7 elements associated with each counter Element Element Range of Number Description Values 0 Up Counter Enabled Oorl O disabled 1 enabled 1 Down Counter Enabled 0or1 0 disabled 1 enabled 2 Counter Done 0or 1 0 disabled 1 enabled 3 Counter Overflow Oorl O disabled 1 enabled 4 Counter Underflow 0or1 0 disabled 1 enabled 5 Counter Preset 32 768 to 32 767 6 Counter Value 32 768 to 32 767 Examples C 0 0 This UAF indicates if Counter 0 is enabled or disabled C 19 6 This UAF references the current value of Counter number 19 Bit The SCADA 3000 contains 4096 bits arranged as 256 16 bit words that can be used within the Ladder program Bits can only have one of two possible values 0 or 1 The Group for this type refers to the word number from 0 to 255 The Element refers to the actual bit number from 0 to 15 Word Bit Number Number 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1000001000001 00 0 1 0 1 01 0 0 0 01 0 0 0 00 0 0 2 0 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 1 SCADA 3000 User s Manual Examples B 0 0 This UAF refers to bit number 0 of word number 0 B 2 12 This UAF refers to bit number 12 of word number 3 Ladder Variable The SCADA 3000 contains 128 user defined floating point variables for use within the Ladder program The Group specifies which of the
367. ut Limits JF Min 10 00 Output UAF 0 21 Max 70 00 Data Type Constant UAF kp factor 0 80 E Reload Time 1 0 secs Kifactor 0 80 gt Target SetPoint 40 00 kd factor 0 80 g Dead Zone 3 00 Figure PIDFom Select the PID algorithm you wish to program by clicking on one of the buttons labeled PID 0 through PID 7 Listed below are the programming parameters associated with each PID algo rithm Each parameter must have a value entered for that algorithm to calculate properly Name Type in a name to describe the process that the PID algorithm will be controlling Example Water Pressure Enable PID Clicking this box will start the PID algorithm Do not click it until you have finished programming all of the parameters associated with the PID form Once enabled the algorithm will execute automatically based on the Reload Time The Output UAF will change based on the results of the algorithm Input UAF The input UAF is the feedback for the process This must be an analog signal Select the input UAF by clicking the button next to the Input UAF text box A choice of all possible UAF s will be displayed Select the input which will provide the feedback for your process or enter the UAF manually by typing the UAF directly into the text box Output UAF The Output UAF identifies the output device which will affect the process The output value will change as necessary to maintain the setpoint Reload Time Th
368. ut conflict However if you are using a Radio Communication network each unit zzust have a unique slave ID 5 Select the Comm port to which the unit is connected 6 Click OK Communicating with the Unit Return to the Unit Database form and click the Online button An interim Connecting form appears briefly as your computer connects to the unit 22 Chapter 2 Quick Start Guide The Main Programming form appears You may now begin programming The Register Verification process will run in the background until it finishes comparing the software in the computer with that in the RTU This procedure is required to ensure data integrity among multiple users of the unit The Register Verification status bar shows the down load progress and can be hidden or displayed at the user s discretion by clicking on View gt Register Verification from the main menu and selecting Show Register Verification If you choose not to view Register Verification the clock showing Local Unit Time indicates if you are communicating with the RTU If the time on the clock is not moving advancing then you are not in fact connected If you view Register Verification at that point you will not see any progress in the status bar t SCADA 3000 Chestnut Street Plant File Status Programming Modules Diagnostics View Alarm Fault Error Updating o aaa us o 011 1390 10 Figure 5 Main Programming form Select the Programming pull down menu Choose Sy
369. utput relays identical to the eight on the main unit ANALOG OUTPUT This module offers 4 analog output channels The outputs have 12 bits of resolution and can be configured as 4 20mA 0 20mA or 0 10V Most analog outputs are used for PID applications looped information used to maintain conditions as outlined in Chapter 17 ANUNCIATOR The annunciator module provides eight LED indicators in a 1 8 DIN panel mount enclosure The eight LED indicators may be programmed to represent the on off status of any real or virtual parameter in the SCADA 3000 Chapter 8 Software Installation Chapter 8 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION amp SETUP This section describes how to install and configure the SCADA 3000 Software for your com puter and modem MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS Intel Pentium processor or equivalent 20 MB of free disk space 32 MB of RAM 64 MB RAM recommended Graphics card and monitor compatible with Microsoft Windows 95 98 or NT such as VGA Microsoft Windows 95 98 or NT Mouse Windows compatible phone modem and or RS232 ports INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE The SCADA 3000 Windows Software setup program makes installation quick and easy Make sure that all Windows applications are closed before attempting to run setup If you encounter problems during installation please call Phonetics Technical Support at 610 558 2700 The SCADA 3000 Software for Windows will install to a directory named C Program Files SCADA3000 unless you choose to c
370. uue y o231nog unre y 9 c 2NIWIAV ID2O d SIASIV IV AI l 4 Appendix L Programming Forms eo DO e EAS EMM 0 pp 67 AAA AAA 87 E ESE li AAA 9c p SA A gt A sc Lo o p T T ve AAA AAA A c AA cc AAA AHH Ic poH 07 AE MA l poni 8I AAA A LI EE A A 91 Ooo LEE ct pe due oe o gu o yl p dqu uu u El Lo o p LOL J cl ENE H A A Ee ue M ol SI Hal ST DO ol o OS N AJJAOAIH gpd kD IA L PIA po wW ur repy b T S 9U07 TIPO SSIIPP Y 19QUINN 9UIEN ulopoJA 3ed eud y ase rejA 8 9910A xe sedAp eq uuoju pospoymouyoy mun tpe qestq 59PON 2 uuepy T 0 SNOLLVNILSAG LAO IVIA A 1 5 V DIALOUT DESTINATIONS 32 63 SCADA 3000 User s Manual Report Intercall Dela Type Dial Alarm Mode Call Zone s 1 4 Number Address Name l 6 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 l 7 SUA Appendix L Programming Forms GUTUJOJAT WV0O CI AVUYALVS AVGTIIA AVUSANHL AVOISHNGOHA AVGSHIL AVGNOW AVUNAS WV0O CI AVGANLVS Avda AVUSANHL AVGSHNGHM AVGSHAL AVGNOW AVGNNS Souoz 89 umo INO o1nSrjuoo O WRISRIP uioj10q eu ur EH SMOT OF e durexo UY 3107 Os pue Z euoz se Wd 0 9 01 Wv 0 8 uro1j Aepung pue Aepimes euoz se Wa 9 UN Wv 8 uro Lepuy usnoag BPUO A europ prnoo no o durexo JO peurgo
371. w S eo No v eo DIO IN Seem SF wo c oo o Jo IA lala In Appendix L Programming Forms co N ad C1 v No c oo o 28583 8 5 mM xt po ts foo NIN IN IN IN IN oN N ag Jg O i eo l O SCADA 3000 User s Manual SAva 41193u J10d9YH SP I09IY JO N A 307 ese q SP 1099Y JO 4 N A 301 JU9AH SLJAOdHA XI SAVA SAVAN SAVA SAVA SAVA SAVA PIS SONSOUSPIC SUBI Y MOJA SBD SAQLA 2 se qeureA Joppe SUY SIJUNO SIUIL sjndjno sjndug SJYAN e qe reAv Spuesesp 7 semuq777 sog 7 TEAU sjurod 71 0 dn DOT VIVA TIIA QO Appendix L Programming Forms SHV SHV SAVA SAVA SAVA SAVA SAVA SAVA PPPS sonsouSer SULJY SBD SAJQRIIBA 2 se qermA Joppe SUY SI3JUNOD SISI sindjno synduy ejdsrp 10 sq e qe reAv AV IdSIG GO T X SCADA 3000 User s Manual N A Id e1qeUy AAA AN XR IDE MESSER dic NENNEN NENNEN AA dv yop py EAS es ee eee avanoa TH AVNA dy S10338 4 SUINI aa er a E ce UI CENE 5507 PC pp pp ij juod PS oium posce Aut propa po oo EL LLL LLL ava mdmo pL AVA vada bj LLL LLL LL XN L did 9 Id s Id Y dId Id dd T did 0 dId O oje no eo O VIYILIOS E jeu 103 pe1ojuo AJLA L ILY LSAW Jo1oureded yey 9J0N uomneurogur Axessooou ou ur rr WOSE qmd Y 104 SNOLLV IQ2 IVO Cd IX Appendix L Programming Forms MOTH ATUO juourooe dsiqq oAntsoq AYN sesinq
372. you can scroll through 3 menu choices ADD TO DISPLAY REMOVE FROM DISPLAY or DISPLAY FROZEN SCADA 3000 User s Manual Counters The fourth option under Data Points is Counters The choices are COUNTER NUMBER 0 63 Use the down arrow to scroll through the counters Pressing ENTER on any will bring up a COUNTER PARAMETER list Select any of the seven parameters by pressing ENTER this will display the current value or to execute the Add Remove or Freeze functions For each using the arrow keys you can scroll through 3 menu choices ADD TO DISPLAY REMOVE FROM DISPLAY or DISPLAY FROZEN Bits The fifth option is Bits The display offers a scrolling WORD NUMBER list from 0 255 Select any of these by pressing ENTER to view the scrolling BIT NUMBER list from 0 15 Again pressing ENTER for any Bit Number will reveal the current value or to execute the Add Remove or Freeze functions For each using the arrow keys you can scroll through 3 menu choices ADD TO DISPLAY REMOVE FROM DISPLAY or DISPLAY FROZEN Ladder Variables The next option is Ladder Variables The display offers a scrolling LADDER VARIABLE list from 0 127 Press ENTER on any Number to view the current value or to execute the Add Remove or Freeze functions For each address using the arrow keys you can scroll through 3 menu choices ADD TO DISPLAY REMOVE FROM DISPLAY or DISPLAY FROZEN C Program Variable Next is the C Program Variables list Again the display offe
373. ystem Information Dialout Settings Unit Name Chestnut Steet Plant Dial Method Tone Y Diaing Pref Unit ID Number 610 568 6677 Voice Reps f2 MaxCalingRounds 100 j SlaveAddess 1 E E Advanced Alpha Page Speed 1200 y Clock Cal Reception Settings Date Monday Juy 31 2000 y Rings til Answer 1 zi Online Timeout 4 j min Time 11 05 55 AM 5 seuorc Carrier Wat Time 60 sec Auto Daylight Savings v Current User Voice Call Security 3 Current User Security Disabled Voice Pw Poe Ack ode p On Since 7 31 2000 10 59 40 AM Access Level Administrator User Accounts Y OK Figure 7 System Programming form 2 Click on User Accounts The form below will appear User Accounts xi Select User 0 of 65 used SCADA 3000 Uses Access Security Information for User 0 User Name No User Selected Access Level Unknown Logins Last Login PS Delete 15 Edt 10 unused 11 lt unused gt x Frink Figure 8 User Accounts form D unused Set up a new user account by clicking on the first unused account number and clicking the Edit button The individual user account form will appear 9 5 SCADA 3000 User s Manual 9 6 Edit Information for User 0 User Name Joseph Smith New Password Access Level Administrator E Re Type E sol Logins Password Saved No Modified Z OK Figure 9 Edit Account Inf

SCADA 3000 - CAS Systems Limited

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents